Agilent Technologies HP 8566B Operating And Programming Manual

Silicon

Notice

Investigations

Information

- Contact

920-955-3693

Us

Packard company brand name. The brand name has now been changed to Agilent

Technologies. The two products are functionally identical, only our name has changed. The document still includes references to Hewlett-Packard products, some of which have been transitioned to Agilent Technologies.

Printed in USA March 2000

HEWLETT

PACKARD

OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL

8566B

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

100 Hz - 2.5 GHz/2 - 22 GHz

SERIAL NUMBERS

This manual applies directly to Model 8566B RF

Sections with serial numbers prefixed 2410A and IF-

Display Sections with serial numbers prefixed 2403A.

0 Copyright HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 1984

1212 VALLEY HOUSE DRIVE, ROHNERT PARK, CALIFORNIA.94928. U.S.A.

MANUAL PART NO. 08566-90040

Microfiche Part No. 08566-90044 Printed: March 1984

CERTIFICATION

Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that thb product met its published specifications at the time

of

shipment

from

the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau

of

Standards, to the extent allowed by the Bureau’s calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities

of

other International Standards Organization members.

WARRANTY

This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard

Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.

For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by HP

Buyer shah prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to

HP from another country.

HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.

NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

EXCL USI YE REMEDIES

THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.

HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY

OTHER LEGAL THEORY

ASSISTANCE

Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available

for

Hewlett-Packard products.

For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office. Addresses are provided at the back

of

this manual.

Section I

Manual Operation

Chapter 1 -GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2 - DATA

Chapter 3 - FUNCTION

Chapter 4 - CRT DISPLAY

Chapter 5 - TRACE

Chapter 6 - MARKER

Chapter 7 - SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE

Chapter 8 - COUPLED FUNCTION

Chapter 9 - SWEEP AND TRIGGER

Chapter 10 - INSTRUMENT STATE

Chapter 1 1 - SHIFT KEY FUNCTIONS

Chapter 12 - USER DEFINED KEYS

Chapter 13 - PLOTTER OUTPUT

GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

GENERAL INFORMATION

The HP 8566B is a high-performance spectrum analyzer which operates from 100 Hz to 2.5 GHz in the low frequency band and 2 - 22 GHz in the preselected microwave band. It uses a synthesized LO to provide accurate frequency tuning and an internal micro-computer to automate controls and provide useful operating features.

HP 8566B SPECTRUM ANALYZER

The HP 8566B consists of an 85662A Display Section and an 85660B RF Section. Connect the two sections along with the inter-connection cables as shown in the illustration below.

Connect interconnection cables as shown:

Line Module

85662A

Display Section

Line Module.

85660B

RF Section

HP-IB

Connector

I

Interconnect Cable

(85662-60093)

\

Interconnect Cable

(85662-60094)

REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS

Manual Operation 1

INITIAL POWER ON GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTION

Before connecting the line power cords, make sure the appropriate line voltage and line fuse have been selected for both the RF and Display sections of the analyzer. For complete information on line voltage and fuse selection, refer to the HP 8566B Operator’s Handbook. For information on line power cords for a specific country, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard office.

INITIAL POWER ON

After making the AC power line connections, the STANDBY lights of both the RF and Display section should be on. As long as the instrument is operating (LINE ON) or in STANDBY, the accuracy specifications of the internal frequency standard will be met. After a cold start, such as on-receipt of instrument, the analyzer requires 24 hours to stabilize prior to meeting specified performance.

LINE ON AND STANDBY INSTR CHECK LED

Upon LINE ON, the instrument will perform an automatic internal instrument check. If one or both of the red instrument check lights (INST CHECK I and II) remain on after this brief check routine, refer to the chart below to localize the problem.

LED On

I

II

Problem

Digital Storage failure in 85662A

Interface Failure

Controller (A15)

Solution

Check bus interconnect cable (85662-60094)

Check bus interconnect cable (85662-60094) and check if Al2 board is connected tightly

Check if Al5 is connected tightly in 85660B and that contacts are clean.

Calibration

In order to meet specified frequency and amplitude accuracy, the analyzer’s calibration must be checked periodically to ensure the highest performance.

2 Manual Operation

GENERAL INFORMATION

RF INPUT

c

0

FREQZERO

Connect cable from CAL OUTPUT signal to RF input to perform initial calibration.

CAUTION

Excessive signal input power will damage the input attenuator and the input mixer. The spectrum analyzer total RF power must not exceed + 30 dBm (1 watt).

DC Precaution: The HP 8566B cannot accept DC voltages in 0 dB ATTEN. With 10 dB or greater input attenuation, a maximum of k7V DC can be accepted without damage. A blocking capacitor is recommended at the input when DC is present with an

RF signal.

Manual Calibration Procedure

1.

After instrument has stabilized, press m

2.

Press @ 8; this recalls the following stored control settings from the analyzer’s internal memory:

Center Frequency = 100 MHz

Frequency Span = 2 MHz

Reference Level = - 7 dBm

Res BW = 1 MHz

Scale = 1 dB/Div

Marker = Normal

3.

Adjust AMPTD CAL for a marker amplitude of - 10 dBm. *

4.

Press [1Ic1LLl 9; this recalls the following:

Center Frequency = 100 MHz

Frequency Span = 0 Hz

Reference Level = - 7 dBm

Res BW = 30 Hz

Scale = 1 dB/Div

Sweep Time = 10 Sec.

l

If connection cable has significant loss, it must be accounted for separately.

Manual Operation 3

RF INPUT

CRT DISPLAY

5.

Maximize amplitude response with FREQ ZERO adjustment.

Error Correction Routine

GENERAL INFORMATION

A 30 second internal error correction routine minimizes uncertainties due to control changes in the analyzer. To start the routine, press (,,,,, W (%?I.

A “CORR’D” readout will appear on the left edge of the CRT upon completion of this routine. If the message

“Adjust AMPTD CAL” appears in the display, repeat the manual calibration before running the error correction routine again.

CRT DISPLAY

The analyzer’s CRT display presents the signal response trace and all pertinent measurement data. The active function area names the function under DATA control and shows the function values as they are changed. All the information necessary to scale and reference the graticule is provided.

Reference User display level annotation

MARKER frequency amplitude bun

17.wa ass 4 CIHX

Active function readout ’

,TRACE A

/TRACE B

Internally

’ generated graticule

- 11

PF’: B

Center

/ L/

Resolution

W frequency bandwidth

1 LHX YBW 1 0 0 HZ

I

Video bandwidth

Sweep time span

PLOTTER OUTPUT

The trace data, graticule, and annotation on the analyzer’s screen can be directly output via HP-IB to a Hewlett-

Packard plotter (such as the HP 7245A/B, 7240A, 7470A, or 9872C) by pressing the LOWER LEFT key on the front pane1 of the analyzer.

4 Manual Operation

GENERAL INFORMATION

FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW

FRONT PANEL OVERVI IEW

Control Groups

1 CRT DISPLAY:

2 TRACE:

3 REFERENCE LINE:

4 SCALE:

5

KEY FUNCTION:

6 SWEEP and TRIGGER:

7 RFINPUT:

8 DATA/FUNCTION:

9 CAL OUTPUT:

10 MARKER:

11 COUPLED FUNCTION:

12 INSTRUMENT STATE:

13 LINE ON &STANDBY:

14 REORDER/PLOTTER

FUNCTIONS:

Signal response and analyzer settings

Control of signal response display

Measurement and display aids

Selects logarithmic or linear amplitude scale

Access to special functions

Selects trace update trigger

100 Hz to 22 GHz ( + 30 dBm max. power)

Fundamental analyzer control

Calibration signal

Movable bright dot markers for direct frequency and amplitude readout

Maintenance of absolute amplitude and frequency calibration by automatically selecting certain analyzer control settings

Local (1~1) select key, SAVE and RECALL keys and FULL SPAN keys

Powers instrument and performs instrument check

Controls output to recorder or HP-IB controlled plotter

Manual Operation 5

REAR PANEL OUTPUTS

REAR PANEL OUTPUTS

GENERAL INFORMATION

21.4 MHz IF Output

IF Input/Output

Video Input/Output

Recorder Outputs

External Trigger

Display Outputs

HP-IB

Connector

Sweep and Tune Output

Frequency Reference

10 MHz Output

Display Outputs

Display outputs allow all the CRT information to be displayed on an auxiliary CRT display such as the HP 1310A

Large Screen Display.

Display Outputs output

<75 nsec rise times. 1V full deflection.

BLANK

<30 nsec rise time. Intensity: - 1V blank, 0 to

1V intensity modulation.

TTL level >2.4V for blanking. Compatible with most oscilloscopes.

Recorder Outputs

The recorder outputs allow the x-y plot of trace data with x-y plotters using positive penlift coils or TTL penlift input. The front panel keys enable outputs for the calibration of x-y plotter reference points:

6 Manual Operation

GENERAL INFORMATION

0

Recorder outputs

0

SWEEP

VIDEO

PENLIFT

RECORDER

LOWER

LEFT

UPPER

RIGHT

@ a

A voltage proportional to the horizontal sweep of the CRT trace that ranges from OV for the left edge and to + 1OV for the right edge.

Detected video output (before A-D conversion) proportional to vertical deflection of the CRT trace. Output increases 100 mV/div from 0 to

1V

A blanking output, 15V occurs during CRT retrace; otherwise output is low at OV (pen down).

REAR PANEL OUTPUTS

RECORDER Outputs when keys or HP-IB commands are enabled

Lower

Left

Upper

Right

OV left

1ov right o v lower

+ 1v upper

+ 15v + 15v

21.4 MHz IF Output

21.4 MHz IF Output

21.4 MHz

IF OUTPUT output

A 5052, 21.4 MHz output related to the RF input to the analyzer.

In log scales, the IF output is logarithmically related to the RF input signal; in linear, the output is linearly related.

The output is nominally - 20 dBm for a signal at the reference level.

The analyzer’s resolution bandwidth setting controls the bandwidth. The input attenuator and IF step gain positions control the amplitude.

Sweep Plus

Tune Output

Sweep Plus Tune Output

SWEEP + TUNE

OUT

Output

l.OV per GHz of tune frequency, 110 kQ load.

Accuracy: - lV/GHz + 2% -t 10mV

10

MHz

Output

10 MHz Output output

10 MHzOUT

> - 5 dBm. 50R output impedance

Manual Operation 7

REAR PANEL OUTPUTS

Frequency Reference Input/Output

GENERAL INFORMATION

To lock the spectrum analyzer to an external frequency reference, set the FREQ REFERENCE switch to EXT.

Analyzer performance will be degraded unless frequency reference phase noise and spurious signals are < - 140 dBc single sideband (1 Hz) referred to 10 MHz at a 100 Hz to 10 kHz offset. To lock another spectrum analyzer to the spectrum analyzer internal frequency reference, set the FREQ REFERENCE switch to INT

Frequency Reference

Input/Output

Input/Output

EXT INT

External Frequency Reference Requirements:

Frequency: 5 MHz & 50 Hz or

10 MHz ? 100 Hz

Power: 0 to 10 dBm

Input Impedance: 5Of2 nominal

Internal Frequency Reference Characteristics.

Frequency: 10 MHz

P o w e r : 0 dBm

O u t p u t impedance: 5OQ

HP-IB Input Output Connector

The Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus allows remote operation of the analyzer as well as input and output of measurement data. See Section II of this manual.

IF and Video Connectors

The IF and Video connectors allow the 85650A Quasi-Peak Adapter to be used with the analyzer for EM1 measurements

NOTE

When the Quasi-Peak Adapter is disconnected from the analyzer, make sure the IF INP connector connects to the IF OUT connector with one short BNC cable, and VIDEO

INP connector connects to the VIDEO OUT connector with the other short BNC cable.

Failure to connect the BNC cables will result in a loss of signal.

8 Manual Operation

GENERAL INFORMATION

IF and Video Connectors

IF INP

VIDEO INP

REAR PANEL OUTPUTS

Input

21.4 MHz input. Input is nominally - 11 dBm

(with spectrum analyzer input attenuator set to

10 dB) .5OQ input impedance.

0 - 2V 139Q input impedance.

IF and Video Connectors

IF OUT

VIDEO OUT

21.4 MHz output. Output is nominally - 11 dBm (with spectrum analyzer input .attenuator

set to 10 dB) .5OQ output impedance.

0 - 2V Output impedance < 10 kQ.

External Sweep Trigger Input

The External Sweep Trigger input allows the analyzer’s internal sweep source to be triggered by an external voltage.

External Sweep Trigger

Input

Input

EXT TRIGGER

Must be >2.4V (1OV max) . 1 kQ nominal input impedance.

Manual Operation 9

GETTING STARTED FRONT PANEL CONCEPT

Chapter 1

GETTING STARTED

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter is intended to provide you with a quick overview of the use and capability of the HP 8566B Spectrum

Analyzer. The chapters following provide the details on each aspect of operation.

FRONT PANEL CONCEPT

The basic controls on the HP 8566B front panel consist of FUNCTION keys and DATA control keys. Functions are activated by pressing the appropriate key; its value is then changed via the DATA control knob, step keys or numeric keyboard. The activated FUNCTION will appear on the CRT as well as its current value.

FUNCTION/DATA

Controls

ACTIVE FUNCTION and DATA VALUE

The front panel controls are grouped by function. The majority of measurements can be made with only the

FUNCTION/DATA group illustrated. The major FUNCTION controls are CENTER FREQUENCY FRE-

QUENCY SPAN (or START/STOP FREQ), and REFERENCE LEVEL. The value of the activated FUNCTION can be changed continuously with the knob, incrementally with STEP KEYS or exactly with the numeric keyboard.

Knob

Step

Keys

Numeric

Keyboard

MAKING A MEASUREMENT

Two FULL SPAN keys allow you to select a wide

Manual Operation 1 1

MAKING A MEASUREMENT

0- 2.5 GHz or 2 -22 GHz’ frequency span. Both keys preset all the analyzer functions to automatically maintain a calibrated display during the course of the measurement.

Example

Connect the CAL OUTPUT signal to RF INPUT

Press l%J

This presets the analyzer to a full 0- 2.5 GHz span with 0 dBm Reference level and automatically couples al1 secondary receiver functions.

GE-l-l-ING STARTED

,,

:3 &I e&c 0.0 d&n .Tllh 10 de

T

--_.

_

--

-.' t -- --' -.'

-.

t-i'-- -- --and use the knob or the numeric keyboard to t quency to 100 MHz. Note that the activated FUNC-

TION (CENTER FREQUENCY) appears on the CRT graticule field.

Press (91 and use the knob , step keys @ bl or numeric keyboard to reduce the frequency

$6 to 100 kHz.

/

FREQUENCY

‘The I’;:] key is also activated with LINE ON.

12 Manual Operation

GETTING STARTED

0 or numeric keyboard to position the peak of the signal on the top graticule line.

DIRECT FREQUENCY AND AMPLITUDE READOUT

.-. -. .-

LEVEL lzxrEu a...e.. m*

Pf5 ml 1 .“I wn 3 L”,

The frequency and amplitude of the signal are read out from the graticule border. All secondary analyzer functions

(resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time, and attenuation) were automatically adjusted to maintain a fully calibrated display. The coupled functions can also be uncoupled to allow manual operation.

For instance, to manually control the resolution bandwidth, press (::‘1 and change bandwidth with any combination of DATA control. The above also applies to I’:“:“) , @ , [,,,.) , or [‘::::‘1

DIRECT FREQUENCY AND AMPLITUDE READOUT

Markers can be used to quickly identify signal frequency and measure signal separation or amplitude differences.

amplitudes -delta (A) markers are available to

Activate a marker 02 the display with NORMAL.

Tune marker with 0 . The frequency and amplitude of the signal are read out with the marker.

To measure the harmonic(s) of the signal, press A and tune the second marker to the signal’s harmonic. The frequency separation and amplitude difference are read out.

SAVE/RECALL

SAVE/RECALL

GETTING STARTED

The HP 8566B instrument control settings can be saved in an internal memory and later recalled to make a measurement. [/ [I(c1111 m to 0 provide access to the six internal storage registers.

SHIFT KEYS

In addition to the front panel functions listed on the keys, another set of functions can be assigned to the same keys by pressing the blue B key prior to activating a front panel key. These will be covered in more detail in Chapter

11.

AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENTS

The HP 8566B is fully programmable via the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB) -HP’s implementation of

IEEE STD 488-1975. Internationally, HP-IB is in concert with the IEC main interface document.

A computing controller/calculator can be used with the HP 8566B to configure an automatic measurement system. Just as the analyzer’s front panel is keyed manually to control functions and change values, simple program codes are transmitted via the HP-IB with a controller to make measurements automatically These program codes are listed in the Remote Operation section of the instrument pull-cards.

Detailed information on remote operation is found in Section II of this manual.

14 Manual Operation

DATA DATA CONTROLS

CHAPTER 2

DATA

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DATA controls are used to change function values for functions such as center frequency, start frequency, resolution bandwidth, or marker position.

DATA CONTROLS

The DATA controls are clustered about the FUNCTION keys which “call up” or activate the most frequently used spectrum analyzer control functions: center frequency, frequency span (or start/stop frequency), and reference level. The other functions that accept DATA control are shown below:

FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS USING DATA CONTROLS

To the left of the FUNCTION Keys are the Data knob 0 and the DATA STEP keys @ @ , which are used to make incremental changes to the activated function. To the right of the FUNCTION keys is the DATA number/ units keyboard which allows changes to an exact value.

Manual Operation 15

DATA ENTRY READOUT

DATA

The DATA controls will change the activated function in a manner prescribed by that function. For example, center frequency can be changed continuously with the DATA knob 0 , or in steps proportional to the frequency span with the DATA STEP keys @ a , or set exactly with the DATA number/units keyboard. Resolution bandwidth, which can be set only to discrete values, can still be changed with any of the DATA controls. The DATA knob 0 and DATA STEP keys 13 61 increment the setting from one bandwidth to the next. An entry from the number/units keyboard which may not coincide with an allowable bandwidth will select the nearest bandwidth.

DATA ENTRY READOUT

DATA entries are read from the CRT display as they are changed.

PREVENTING DATA ENTRY

A function can be deactivated by pressing m . The active function readout is blanked and the ENABLED light goes out, indicating no DATA entry can be made. Pressing a function key re-enables the DATA controls.

DATA KNOB

cies), reference level, marker positions, display line, and threshold. It can also change the function values which are only incremented.

Clockwise rotation of the DATA knob will increase the function value. For continuous changes, the knob’s sensitivity is determined by the measurement range and the speed at which the knob is turned. For example, when the center frequency is activated, 0 increases the value of the center frequency one horizontal division of span per one quarter turn.

DATA STEP KEYS

dependent either upon the analyzer’s measurements range, on a preset amount, or, for those parameters with frequency value by an amount equal to one division of the frequency span (one tenth of the frequency span). If the center frequency step size m has hen preset,

El will increase the center frequency by that preset amount. If frequency span were activated, 10) would change the span to the next lower value in predetermined sequence. Activate resolution bandwidth and [& ~ will select the next widest bandwidth. Each press results in a

--I single step,

16 Manual Operation

DATA DATA NUMBER/UNITS KEYBOARD

DATA NUMBER/UNITS KEYBOARD

The DATA number/units keyboard (or DATA keyboard) allows exact value entries to center frequency, frequency span (or start/stop frequency), reference level, log scale, marker positions, display line, threshold, and the COUP-

LED FUNCTIONS.

An activated parameter is changed by entering the number (with the CRT display providing a readout) then selecting the appropriate units key. The value is not changed (entered) until the units key is pressed.

The number portion of the entry may include a decimal, l number. Corrections to number entries are made with :::,:

0

, which erases the last digit for each press.

Example: With center frequency activated,

(TJ-Jp-JJQ[Z][Z]~@ will set the center frequency to 1.250 GHz.

If the units key were pressed without a number entry, 1 is entered (except in zero frequency span).

Negative DATA Entry

Negative entries from the number units keyboard can be made for power and frequency but not time and voltage.

0 example, in reference level, with the dBmV units, an entry of will enter - 50 dBmV

Negative frequency entries can be made using m-m as a prefix to the frequency entry For example, to enter a negative start frequency, press p-J(TJ(TJ@~

This enters the frequency value as - 100 MHz.

Not all functions will accept negative entries (the sign will be ignored).

MULTIPLE DATA CHANGES

A function, once activated, may be changed as often as necessary without reactivating that function (see Chapter

3, FUNCTION). Any of the DATA controls can be used in any order. l

It is not always necessary to make a DATA entry. For example, start and stop frequency may be activated simply to allow readout of the left and right display reference frequencies as start/stop frequencies.

l

Exceptions are the SHIFT KEY FUNCTIONS which use only DATA number/units keyboard. See Chapter 11.

Manual Operation 17

F U N C T I O N GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 3

FUNCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the use of the major function block- CENTER FREQUENCY FREQUENCY SPAN (or

START/STOP FREQUENCY), and REFERENCE LEVEL.

NCTION -

A FUNCTION is enabled by pressing the desired FUNCTION key Once enabled, the function, along with its current data value, is displayed in the active graticule area of the CRT as well as outside the graticule border. To change the value of the active function, use either the DATA knob, step keys, numeric keyboard, or a combination of all three. The HOLD key above the DATA knob can be used to retain the present instrument state and prevent any inadvertent entry of DATA. HOLD clears the active function area of the CRT as well as de-activates any function.

Active

Function

Frequency

Span

Manual Operation 19

CENTER FREQUENCY

CENTER FREQUENCY

F U N C T I O N

The center frequency can be tuned continuously from 0 to 22 GHz using any combination of DATA controls.

Additional band overlap enables the center frequency to tune up to 24 GHz and below to - 1 GHz.

The center frequency can be set with 1 Hz resolution. Readout resolution is 1% of the frequency span, hence the highest readout resolution is obtained with narrow frequency spans. Data entered, however, is always accurate to

1 Hz even though the center frequency readout may display less resolution.

During band crossings (from 0 - 2.5 GHz low band to 2 - 22 GHz microwave band) or at band edges (below 0 Hz or above 22 GHz), the frequency span may change to enable the desired center frequency to be set. (See

Appendix for detailed information.)

DATA Entry with CENTER FREQUENCY

[-iEz] @@

(EC)

. . . .

#I

Changes the center frequency by about one half the total frequency span each full turn.

Changes the center frequency by one tenth of the frequency span, i.e., by one division. COUPLED FUNCTION [‘::::‘I can be used to change this step size.

Allows direct center frequency entry. The analyzer will accept a center frequency entry with 1 Hz resolution. Even though the readout may show a fewer number of digits (due to wide frequency span), as the span is narrowed the full entry will be read out. Abbreviated readouts are not rounded.

Example

Once a signal response is placed at the center of the display, the frequency of the signal can be read out from

CENTER FREQUENCY The input signal is a 9 GHz synthesized source.

Press 1’6::) for a full span display.

Tune signal to center of display with (-ZZ)~.

. . . L .-I.* b -

I. *

! ! ! ! ! 1

20 Manual Operation

F U N C T I O N

Reducing the frequency span will increase the center frequency readout resolution.

Press [Fj @ @ then (x]

FREQUENCY SPAN

FREQUENCY SPAN

The frequency span changes the total display frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency. Note that the frequency span readout refers to the total display frequency range; to determine frequency span per division, divide by 10.

As the frequency span is changed, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth automatically change to provide a predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging, respectively. Sweep time also changes automatically to maintain a calibrated display.

The analyzer can be adjusted to span a maximum of 2.5 GHz in the low band and 22 GHz (2 to 24 GHz range) in the microwave band. A minimum span of 100 Hz is allowed in both bands as well as 0 Hz (zero span) which enables the analyzer to function as a fixed-tune receiver. In zero span, the analyzer can display modulation waveforms in the time domain.

DATA Entry with FREQUENCY SPAN

Changes the frequency span continuously.

Changes the frequency span to the next value in a 1, 2,5, 10 sequence.

Enters an exact value up to three digits, depending on span. Additional digits will be deleted without rounding.

Manual Operation 21

I

FREQUENCY SPAN

Example

Use FREQUENCY SPAN to zoom in on signals.

Connect CAL OUTPUT

This selects a convenient

2.5 GHz.

to RF INPUT press [06::1 full span display from 0 to

Tune center frequency to 100 MHz with: [?%%-I

100 MHz.

Reduce span with: [F]@@or~

The desired span can also be selected with the numeric keyboard. Note that narrow frequency spans provide increased center frequency resolution.

In the microwave band, pressing m enables a 20 GHz full span.

22 Manual Operation

F U N C T I O N

F U N C T I O N

Example

FREQUENCY SPAN

Operating the spectrum analyzer in zero span. The modulation waveform of an AM signal can be displayed in the time domain.

In the frequency domain, we can accurately determine the modulation frequency and level.

I I I I I I I I.1

I” I

To demodulate the AM, increase the resolution bandwidth to include both sidebands with the IF passband.

L-E-@@

Position the signal at the reference level and select a linear voltage display

(G&ii)gFJ fi SCALE.

Manual Operation 23

START/STOP FREQUENCY F U N C T I O N

I/h i i i

To select zero span, press [F) m a

Video trigger can be used to trigger on the waveform.

The sweep time control can be adjusted to change the horizontal scale.

START/STOP FREQUENCY

Another way to adjust the frequency range is by using START/STOP FREQUENCY instead of CENTER FRE-

QUENCY and FREQUENCY SPAN. Activating START FREQ or STOP FREQ causes both to read out in place of

CENTER FREQUENCY and SPAN on the CRT START FREQ sets the left graticule frequency and STOP FREQ sets the right graticule frequency; both are mutually exclusive with CENTER FREQUENCY and FREQUENCY

SPAN.

The INSTRUMENT STATE keys, w and m , select a start/stop frequency from 0 to 2.5 GHz and 2 to 22

GHz, respectively. Additional over-range allows start frequency setting of - 1 GHz and stop frequency of 24 GHz.

The maximum start/stop frequency span allowable is 22 GHz; the minimum span is 100 Hz and zero span

(START FREQ = STOP FREQ) .

Start/Stop frequency readout resolution is 1% of the span (span = stop frequency - start frequency). Both start or stop frequencies can be entered with 1 Hz resolution.

DATA Entry with START/STOP Frequency

Changes the start or stop frequency. The amount of change per turn is a constant percentage of the frequency span.

or Changes the frequency by one tenth of the total frequency span.

Exact start or stop frequencies can be entered. The number of digits read out depends upon the frequency span.

24 Manual Operation

F U N C T I O N

Example

Set start/stop frequency to monitor FM broadcast band

REFERENCE LEVEL

Press (?iiEiJ .

Note that horizontal scaling is unchanged, although the START/STOP frequency readouts are replaced by center frequency and span

(108 - 88 = 20 MHz).

I i i i t

REFERENCE LEVEL

The REFERENCE LEVEL function changes the absolute amplitude level of the top graticule line. The vertical scale (amplitude units per division) is selected from the SCALE control group. To measure signal level, the peak of the signal’s response is positioned on the top graticule line and its amplitude is read out from REF LEVEL.

The reference level can be adjusted from - 89.9 dBm to + 30 dBm ( - 139.9 dBm to + 60 dBm with extended range) with 0.1 dB resolution. The input attenuator is automatically coupled with the reference level to prevent gain compression; signals which are above the gain compression point will be displayed above the reference level line. Different mixer input levels as well as amplitude units can be selected (see (L*lrl FUNCTIONS Chapter 11).

Manual Operation 25

REFERENCE LEVEL

DATA Entry with REFERENCE LEVEL

F U N C T I O N

In logarithmic scale, the changes are in 0.1 dB steps: in linear scale, the changes are made to the least significant digit.

In logarithmic scale, changes the reference level in steps according to dB/ division scale. In linear scale, changes the reference level in 1 dB steps.

Allows entry of exact reference levels. Digits entered beyond the displayed number of digits are deleted.

Example

Measure amplitude of calibration signal.

Press @

(-E] 100 MHz position signal peak to top graticule line. Read amplitude from REF LEVEL.

26 Manual Operation

; , i i i

\

FUNCTION/DATA SUMMARY F U N C T I O N

FUNCTION/DATA SUMMARY

KNOB

0

CENTER

FREQUENCY

Change continuously with up to 1 Hz resol u t i o n i n n a r r o w spans.

FREQUENCY

SPAN

START/STOP

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE

LEVEL

Change continuously a with n x 2 Hz resolution *

Continuous with 0.1

dB tuning resolution.

STEP KEYS

@I@

: t::

1:::

Change frequency in one division steps

( i . e . , 1 0 % o f frequency span).

quency with up to 1

Hz resolution.

m

- 1.000000000 GHz _ 1 to 2.5 GHz rDJUSTMENT

RANGE

:03.999999950

GHz. a

2 to 24 GHz

READOUT

1% of SPAN (Up to

1 Hz in narrow

- Change span in ” 2’

5, 10 sequence.

Incremental change in accordance with log scale. In linear, changes incrementally in 1 dB steps.

*

Enter quency with n x 2 Hz

Enter exact reference exact fre- level. Digits entered beyond last displayed resolution * digit are deleted.

m

100 Hz to 22 GHz and zero span.

106::

100 Hz to 2.5 GHz and zero span.

- 1 3 9 . 9 dBm t o

+60dBm.

0.1 dB in log; 4 sigc nificant digits in linear.

* where n = harmomc number

Manual Operation 27

CRT DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE DISPLAY

CHAPTER 4

CRT DISPLAY

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the CRT display adjustments, readouts, and graphics.

ADJUSTMENT OF THE DISPLKY

The adjustments for intensity, focus, and alignment simultaneously affect all the lines and characters on the display.

0

Controls intensity for all the CRT writing.

FOCUS

A screwdriver adjustment which focuses all the CRT writing. Focusing any one element on the CRT

0

focuses all the writing.

nLlGN

0

A screwdriver adjustment which tilts all the displayed CRT information.

DISPLAY SECTION LINE POWER

STANDBY

0

The light indicates power condition of the Spectrum Analyzer Display section as dictated by the LINE power switch on the 85660B RF section.

CRT DISPLAY OVERVIEW

The cathode ray tube of the Spectrum Analyzer Display section displays:

0 active function name and value

0 graticule l traces of the signal response

0 values that calibrate the frequency, time, and amplitude axes l values for the spectrum analyzer receiver parameters -that is, COUPLED FUNCTIONS.

0 operator originated labels and graphics

Manual Operation 29

CRT DISPLAY OVERVIEW

Active Function

The function which has been activated for DATA entry is read out in the graticule area shown.

I

!O do,

OFF 8 0 d&l .TTEN 18 dtl

CRT DISPLAY vB* 3 WI

Activating a function immediately writes its name in the active function area along with its present value. The following summarizes the names and readout formats for the front panel designated active functions after an

INSTRUMENT PRESET

Function

Examples of Active

Function Readout

FuNcT’oNc)

Function

I--)

Examples of Active

Function Readout

MARKER

MARKER

12.0 GHz

19.8 dBm

SPAN

20 GHz

START

2 GHz

MARKER A

20.0 MHz

- 12.4 dB

STOP

22 GHz

(,,,.

MARKER ZOOM

12.0 GHz

- 32.8 dBm

(,,,::c’)

REF LEVEL

.O dBm

COUPLED FUNCTION

(,.J(I*I(1lM

MARKER

12.0 GHz

- 140.4 dBm (1 Hz)

I::‘1 pg)

RES BW

3 MHz

VIDEO BW

3 MHz r-

(,.,,,

REFERENCE LINE

DISPLAY LINE

- 45.0 dBm

THRESHOLD

- 90.0 dBm SWEEPTIME

500 msec

SCALE RF ATTEN

10 dB

El

LOG

10 dB/

CF STEP

100 MHz

KEY FUNCTION

(See [,,,I KEY FUNCTIONS,

Chapter 11.) eactivates the active function and bk$!s the active readout.

30 Manual Operation

CRT DISPLAY

Gralicule

CRT DISPLAY OVERVIEW

The display graticule is an internally generated 10 division by 10 division rectangle for referencing frequency, time, and amplitude measurements. Double markings at the left, right, and bottom designate the center axes.

4

Center line

The graticule may be blanked from the display with KEY FUNCTION [unl m and restored with [ n.

For CRT photography, the graticule may be intensified independent of the annotation and trace by pressing the following sequence:

For more intensity, repeat the last two number entries, 1163 Hz and 2115 Hz. I’;:1 returns the graticule.to

normal.

Traces

Three separate traces, A, B, and C, can be written onto the display. Each trace consists of 1000 separate straightline elements drawn between 1001 fixed points across the CRT X and Y axis coordinates designate the particular points between which the elements are drawn. Terms used to describe trace composition are defined as follows:

Point

A “point” in the context of this manual is a fixed location on the CRT display. There are

1,001 points along the X (horizontal) axis of the CRT graticule, numbered from 0 on the far left graticule line to 1000 on the far right graticule line. Similarly, there are 1,001 points along the Y

(vertical) axis of the CRT graticule, numbered from 0 on the bottom graticule line to 1000 on the top graticule line. An additional 22 points of overrange available above the top graticule line provide the

Y axis with a total of 1,023 points.

Manual Operation 3 1

CRT DISPLAY OVERVIEW CRT DISPLAY

Display Unit

One display unit is the distance between two points (see above) along an X or Y axis. The distance along the X axis between the far left graticule line and the far right graticule line is

1000 display units. The Y axis length between the bottom graticule line and the top graticule line is also 1000 display units. Although the Y axis can be extended another 22 display units above the top graticule line, the extended area is not calibrated.

X, Y coordinates to a particular point on the display are given in display units relative to X, Y coordinates 0,O at the junction of the far left and bottom graticule lines.

Element

An element is a distinct portion of the trace drawn on the CRT It comprises a point and the visible straight line drawn to it from the preceding point. An element drawn parallel with a vertical or horizontal graticule line is one diplay unit long. An element drawn at an angle to the graticule lines is longer, its actual length depending on the angle.

Vector

A vector is identical with an element, except that it can be either visible or blanked.

Point of x, y coordinates

Overrange = 22 point su t

I

.r

A m a.

-cr

R_

Point of x, y coordinates

1000.1000

Point of f x, y coordinates

0.0

Graticule center x, y coordinates

500,500

TRACE DISPLAY TERMS

Point of x, y coordinates

1000,0

NOTE

When the analyzer is operated manually (i.e., with its front-panel controls), the display size remains constant and the above definitions are fully applicable. When it is operated remotely with a controller, however, three additional larger display sizes are available through the display-size programming commands. For these larger-than-normal display sizes the lower left reference coordinates and the upper right trace limit expand beyond the CRT’s outer graticule lines. For further information on remotely-controlled

(i.e., programmed) display sizes, refer to commands Dl, D2, and D3 under Programming Commands in Section II of this manual.

32 Manual Operation

CRT DISPLAY

Locations of Permanent Readouts

The vertical and horizontal graticule axes are scaled by these readouts:

(iF -5.4 k

1s 4”

;4

Vertical scale

CRT DISPLAY OVERVIEW

Center frequency

(or start freq.)

CeNrm 4aa.e no3 I 1,. h”l vml 30 LHX

Frequency span

PIN I . . . beI*

PQ 3e I)..=

/

(or stop freq.)

The COUPLED FUNCTIONS that describe the swept receiver characteristics of the spectrum analyzer are:

I

ATTEN ,a *

I,, ,

RF attenuation

RerolLtion bandwidth

V&e0 bandwidth

Full\scale svnep time

To blank all the character readouts, press KEY FUNCTION ( o. To restore, press m p.

Manual Operation 33

CRT DISPLAY OVERVIEW

Other Readouts

Title (see KEY FUNCTION)

Detection

\

REF .?3.8 dam

Mode ,‘,’ deI

(see s”l” KEY \-=’

FUNCTION) de

Display line .-2L; ~

*a-

Marker amplitude and frequency (s_ee MARKER)

Amplitude and/or frequency scales uncalibrated

CRT DISPLAY

Threshold level

Frequency offset

A number of other special function readouts can be activated. These are covered in Chapter 11.

34 Manual Operation

T R A C E TRACE IDENTIFICATION

CHAPTER 5

TRACE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the use of the TRACE functions for writing, storing, and manipulating trace data.

G--

‘P

TRACE

TRACE Controls

Trace A

‘Trace B

Trace C

TRACE IDENTIFICATION

Traces are differentiated by intensity. Trace A is bright, trace B and trace C are dim. i and m allow positive identification.

Manual Operation 35

TRACE MODES

TRACE MODES

T R A C E

Four mutually exclusive functions or modes for trace A and trace B determine the manner in which the traces are displayed. Indicator lights by the keys show the current modes.

WRITE Modes (sweeping): m Displays the input signal response in trace selected.

m Displays and holds the maximum responses of the input signal in trace selected.

STORE Modes (not sweeping):

[.,,.

Stores the current trace and displays it on the CRT display.

[,,,., Stores the current trace and blanks it from the CRT display.

Trace Memory

An understanding of the TRACE modes requires a description of the trace memory and trace data transfer within the analyzer.

Display traces are not written onto the CRT directly from the spectrum analyzer’s IF section. Instead, the analog signal response is converted to digital information and stored in one trace memory which can then be transferred to the CRT display. The way in which the information is displayed depends upon the TRACE mode selected.

Memories ’

RF

Input b

RF/IF

Sections

Analyzer

/

Video Response

Analog to

Digital

Data Updated at

Sweeptime

Rate

I

Data Displayed at

Refresh

Rate

I

I

I

I

TRACE MODES DETERMINE HOW DATA IS ENTERED INTO

AND DISPLAYED FROM TRACE MEMORIES

The analyzer’s response is transferred into the trace memory at the sweep rate of the analyzer; that is, its sweep time. The trace memory is written onto the CRT display at a refresh rate of about 50 Hz, rapid enough to prevent flickering of the trace on the CRT Trace intensities remain constant as analyzer sweep times are changed.

36 Manual Operation

TRACE

NOTE

It is important to understand the difference between sweep and refresh.

S w e e p refers to the spectrum analyzer sweeping from a start frequency to a stop frequency and storing measured amplitude data into a trace

Refresh memory.

refers to the transfer of display memory data to the CRT display.

TRACE MODES

WRITE Modes

For the write modes, the analyzer signal response is written into trace memory during the sweep and the memory contents are displayed on the CRT m A ( B ) Sets all the values in the trace memory A(B) to zero when first activated (bottom line graticule) , then displays the signal response.

a A(B)

Latest signal response is written into the trace A(B) memory only at the horizontal positions where the response is greater than the stored response.

When both m A and m B modes are selected, the analyzer writes into (sweeps) A and B alternately.

STORE Modes

In the STORE modes, no updating of the trace memory is made. The current memory data is saved.

(,,,, A(B) The trace A(B) data are displayed on the CRT (that is, the refresh is enabled).

(,,1..

A(B) The trace A(B) data are not displayed on the CRT (that is, the refresh is disabled).

Example

With TRACE modes, signals can be observed as the analyzer sweeps, can be stored for comparison, erased, or monitored for frequency drift.

Center and zoom in on a 20 MHz signal:

Press

(Eiq p-J (-i-J @

[F- @ (g pJ

Since [‘s::l has set m A and (,,,.,1 B, only A is displayed.

Manual Operation 37

TRACE

This response can be stored:

Press (,,,. A.

TRACE MODES

Write the same signal with B and change its position relative to trace A:

Press m B.

[iii%-> a t i i i

*

1

l L

A /\

: \ j iii i ‘I-, i i

Blank trace A;

Press @ A.

This trace can be recalled with m A as long as m A or [21 A is not used first.

NOTE

The l on the top right corner of the CRT indicates that the CRT readouts may not correspond to the trace(s). In this case, the readouts apply only to TRACE B and not TRACE A.

38 Manual Operation

TRACE

To display the drift of a signal, press a & hp liF .e &

1e .”

ATlD4 10 Y

TRACE EXCHANGE

Trace B sweeping

/

Trace A

PI L ! i

TRACE EXCHANGE

m exchanges trace A and B, changing their relative intensities and storage memory locations and enables

A and B [,.. . For example, in the trace display above, the modes and display appear.

Trace B

Clear Write

Trace A

Max Hold

4

1. .

Press @

Manual Operation 39

TRACE C MODES T R A C E

TRACE C MODES

A third trace, C, can be used to store a signal response. Trace C is not swept from the analyzer IF section as are traces A and B, but is input using a trace B into C function (B + C) or a B and C exchange function (B z C).

Access to the trace C modes is through KEY FUNCTION @ The modes are:

View C:

Blank C:

B-C:

B*C: mj Displays trace C.

(,,., k Blanks trace C from CRT display.

(,,,,, 1 Writes trace B into trace C. Trace A and B modes are not changed. If trace C is not displayed, it remains undisplayed.

m i Exchanges traces B and C. If trace B is displayed before the exchange, trace C is now displayed. If trace B is not displayed before the exchange, trace C is not displayed.

TRACE ARITHMETIC

TRACE arithmetic allows one trace to be modified by another trace or a display line position.

A-B

A-B

B

[ m

Trace B amplitude (measured in divisions from the bottom graticule) is subtracted from trace A and the result written into trace A from sweep to sweep. Trace B is placed or kept in a STORE mode.

Turns [.-,-,I off.

Subtracts the amplitude of the display line from trace B and writes the result into trace

B. Trace B is placed or kept in B Details on display line are in Chapter 7, REFER-

ENCE LINE.

Example

Trace arithmetic with the display line can be used to correct for the frequency response characteristics (flatness) of a swept measurement system typified by this setup: where the device under test is to be characterized for insertion loss over a specific frequency range.

The analyzer and source are set to the proper amplitude level and frequency span with the source output connected directly to the analyzer input.

m B, sweep source then

(,,. B.

t: i i i I l

40 Manual Operation

T R A C E

The display line is activated and set below the source/ analyzer response.

DL[tlgll a.

TRACE ARITHMETIC

The difference between the display line (in display units) and the source/analyzer response is stored in trace B with I’;:’

Negative values of the [‘;:II line are stored even though not displayed.

Now the device under test is connected between source and analyzer and its response is corrected for source flatness uncertainty by using

BA@.

w-s-

- 7.Y n

- 2e.. -me.

Manual Operation 41

TRACE PRIORITY

TRACE PRIORITY

T R A C E

Functions which act upon a trace always act upon the highest priority trace. Priority is defined by the trace modes as follows:

Highest priority a

Lowest priority

EB view C

[,,..,]A

[.,,.,)B blank C

Marker functions, for example, use trace priority to decide which trace to mark. See Chapter 6.

42 Manual Operation

GENERAL DESCRIPTION MARKER

Chapter 6

MARKER

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the use of the MARKER and DATA controls for making many measurements faster and with greater accuracy. Markers can be displayed only on TRACE A and TRACE B.

Two types of functions make up the MARKER group; MARKER MODE S , which enable or disable markers and their related functions; and MARKER ENTRY functions, which allow the scaling of the display frequency and amplitude using marker information.

Markers are bright spots which lie directly on the display trace. The horizontal position of an activated marker is controlled by the DATA controls. The marker can be positioned at a specific frequency with the DATA number/ units keyboard.

Readout of marker amplitude and frequency appears in the upper right of the display outside the graticule. When a MARKER MODE is active, its amplitude and frequency readout also appears in the active function area of the

MARKER CONTROLS

Manual Operation 43

MARKER OVERVIEW

MARKER OVERVIEW

MARKER l Direct readout of the amplitude and frequency of a point along the trace.

l Direct readout of amplitude and frequency differences between points on the trace.

l Expansion of a span about a specific frequency.

l Placing a single marker at the highest response.

l Automatic peaking of preselector.

l Direct noise level readout.

l Analysis of stored traces.

l Amplitude and frequency display scaling.

FUNCTION

EEI

E

@

El

(,,,lM

MARKER with [,,,.

ENTRY I”c”l-1 p!&jm

MARKER ON BUT NOT ACTIVE

An activated marker mode can be deactivated by activating another function, such as display line, or by DATA

I*OLD) . This does not erase the marker itself nor the upper right display readout. If the marker mode is reactivated,

DATA control and active function readout will continue from its last position.

If a marker mode is deactivated by a function (other than MARKER ENTRY) where a value change of the new function results in a resealing of the amplitude or frequency axes, the marker will not stay on the trace. Reactivating the marker will start it at the display center.

MARKER OFF

[ disables any marker mode, and blanks the marker readout from the CRT display. DATA controls are disabled if the marker was active.

MARKER IN VIEW

MARKER m and a may be used on traces A or B in the view mode. This allows detailed analysis of responses which are nonperiodic or unstable.

The markers will be placed on a viewed trace according to the priority defined in Chapter 5, TRACE PRIORITY

SINGLE MARKER - NORMAL

@ activates a single marker at the center of the display on the trace of highest priority. Trace priority is defined in

Chapter 5. The marker will not activate on the TRACE modes m A, [--I B, view C or blank C.

Measurement and Readout Range

Marker frequency has one digit more resolution than center frequency, and marker amplitude has one digit more resolution than reference level.

44 Manual Operation

SINGLE MARKER-NORMAL MARKER

DATA Entry

Moves the marker continuously along the trace at about 5 horizontal divisions each full turn. The marker moves in display unit increments.

Moves the marker along the trace one tenth of the total width per step.

0 moves marker to the right.

Places the marker at the frequency entered. An out-of-range entry results in placement of the marker at a graticule edge.

Example

Reading frequencies and amplitudes of signals is greatly simplified using MARKER (--I .

For a given display, activate the single marker with

B then tune the marker with 0 to position it at the signal peak.

The frequency and amplitude is read out in two display areas.

To read the left-hand signal’s parameters, move the marker to the signal peak with 0 .

The signal’s amplitude and frequency is read out directly.

Manual Operation 45

DIFFERENTIAL MARKERS-A

DIFFERENTIAL MARKERS -

A

MARKER a activates a second marker at the position of a single marker already on the trace. (If no single marker has been activated, m places two markers at the center of the display.) The first marker’s position is fixed. The second marker’s position is under DATA control.

The display readout shows the difference in frequency and amplitude.

Example

-10.0

Measuring the differences between two signals on the same display.

First ss the marker on one of the signal peaks with

(-IIo.

Activate m , movAthe second marker to the other signal peak with 0 , and read their differences directly.

-

Fractional Differences

When the reference level is calibrated in voltage, marker m amplitudes are given as a fraction, the voltage ratio of two levels.

With logarithmic amplitude scale and the reference level in voltage, the fraction is based on the equation: dB ddlerence fraction = 10

-( 20 )

Since this equation yields the harmonic distortion due to a single harmonic, its distortion contribution can be read directly from the display.

46 Manual Operation

MARKER

Example

Set up m on the peaks of a fundamental (left) and its harmonic (right).

With the display referenced and scaled as shown, the readout “.0100X” designates the fractional harmonic content. Percent is calculated as 100 x (.OlOO) = 1 .O%.

With a linear amplitude scale and a reference level calibrated in voltage, the fractional amplitude readout is the simple linear ratio of the two markers.

DIFFERENTIAL MARKERS-A

Example

To measure % AM modulation from a spectra1 display, calibrate the display with the reference level in voltage and the amplitude scale in voltage.

Place the single marker on the carrier peak, [--J

0

, and the second marker on one of the sideband peaks, m 0 The fractional amplitude readout gives one half the modulation index .283.

%AM = 100x2x .28 = 56%.

L INSR

. ..-.--

I t

Measurement and Readout Range

The m function formats the amplitude readout according to reference level units and scale.

Reference

Level Units

SCALE

Logarithmic

SCALE

Linear dBm dBmV dBpV

Amplitude in dB Amplitude in dB

Voltage

Amplitude ratio dB d,lferencr

10

-( 20 )

Ratio of marker amplitudes

AMPLITUDE READOUT FORMAT FOR MARKER a

Manual Operation 47

DIFFERENTIAL MARKERS-A MARKER

The frequency readout for all MARKER m conditions has up to 4 significant digits, depending upon the portion of span measured.

The amplitude readout in dB has a resolution of f .Ol dB for linear scale. The resolution for logarithmic scale depends upon the LOG m value:

LOG SCALE dB PER DIV

RESOLUTION

DATA Entry

The minimum incremental change for m frequency is 0.1% of the frequency span.

E--JO

EI@@

One full turn moves the active marker about one tenth of the horizontal span.

One step moves the marker one tenth of the horizontal span.

Positive entry places marker higher in frequency than the stationary marker, negative entry places marker lower in frequency. Larger entries than allowable will place the marker on the adjacent graticule border,

-

Negative frequencies can be entered using a i m prefix as the minus sign. For example, to set a m span of 10 MHz with the second marker positioned to the left of the first, press

MARKER ZOOM

@ activates a single marker on the trace of highest priority (see TRACE PRIORIn Chapter 5).

In Ilo0.J , the DATA knob and STEP keys change the values of different

functions.

0

Positions Marker

Changes FREQUENCY SPAN and sets CENTER FREQUENCY equal to MARKER frequency

48 Manual Operation

MARKER

DATA Control Use for [,,,.

DIFFERENTIAL MARKERS-A

The marker can be moved along the trace with the DATA knob 0 , and the frequency span can be changed about the marker with DATA step @ and @ . Each step also sets center frequency equal to the marker frequency.

Measurement and Readout Range

The measurement and readout range for marker zoom is the same as marker (UL) .

DATA Entry

El @J(g)

@a

Moves the marker continuously along the trace. Rate dependent on speed of rotation. The marker moves in display unit increments.

Changes the frequency span to the next value in the sequence and sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency.

Places the marker at the frequency entered. An out-of-range entry places the marker at a graticule border.

Example

In wide frequency spans, it is often necessary to expand a portion of the frequency span about a specific signal in order to resolve modulation sidebands or track frequency drift.

Manual Operation 49

DIFFERENTIAL MARKERS-A

From a full span, select a signal using the marker with

Eli.

To center the marker and signal and expand the fre-

Expanding twice more with @ @ shows that the marker requires recentering on the signal.

50 Manual Operation

I !!

i i I

MARKER

Recenter w i t h 0

A U T O M A T I C Z O O M

Continue using @ (and recentering the marker on the signal when necessary) until the desired resolution is achieved.

AUTOMATIC ZOOM

The analyzer can automatically zoom in on a signal specified by a marker. The desired frequency span is input from the DATA number/units keyboard.

To use the automatic zoom function: entify the signal to be zoomed in on.

and enter the desired span with the DATA number/units keyboard.

When the units key is pressed, the zooming process will begin.

Example

A single carrier needs to be examined in a 200 kHz span to see the sidebands. Because the SIGNAL TRACK function automatically maintains the signal on the center of the CRT you can zoom automatically from a very wide span to a narrow span to look close-in at the signal.

Manual Operation 51

PEAK SEARCH

Place a marker on the carrier with B 0

MARKER

Press @FJ (,,:,,,I .

Enter the span.

F’;;ls m @ B , and auto zoom will be -Aid 1 I 1 A 1 I I i

200 kt-42 /I I I I I

PEAK SEARCH

Peak Search

Peak search places a single marker at the highest trace position of the highest priority trace. The active function is not changed.

Example

Use PEAR SEARCH to position the marker at the peak of the signal response.

In a narrow span, the marker may be placed at the signal peak.

Press m .

52 Manual Operation

MARKER MARKER ENTRY

Note that the marker seeks the maximum trace response, no matter what the cause of the response. A larger signal, or the local oscillator feedthrough, would have attracted the marker.

MARKER to Next Peak

The marker can also find the next highest peaks by successively pressing [,.,,,I K @

Marker to Minimum

The minimum trace value can be located by pressing

[ N .

MARKER ENTRY

m , m and marker m into span. Immediately set the corresponding FUNCTION value equal to the readout of the active marker or markers:

ENTRY

/

marker frequency into ( ~&%%I j

i

RESULT marker amplitude into

(-1 m immediately records the single or the differential marker frequency in COUPLED FUNCTION I”.‘::‘] for use w i t h [z) D A T A @ @

Manual Operation 53

MARKER ENTRY

MARKER

A marker entry can be made any time a marker is on the trace. ( @ “r;;? with only one marker displayed takes

0 Hz as the lower frequency.) The active function will not be changed.

Example

One of the fastest, most convenient ways to bring a signal to the center of the display is by using l”r:-)

Activate a single marker and tune it to the desired sisnal: (,,,I 0 .

Change the center frequency to the marker frequency.

l”c:-] will also work if start/stop frequencies are read out.

Example

One way to tune to a particular portion of a spectrum being displayed is to use the A + span function.

Activate the single marker and place it at either end of the desired frequency span with I--] 0 .

5 4 M a n u a l ODeration

I i i i i i i i i i I

MARKER

Activate the second marker and place it at the other end of the span with m 0

MARKER ENTRY

Set the start and stop frequencies squal to the left and right marker frequencies with B a

Marker m is activated.

A + span will work the same with start/stop frequency readout. Note that the markers can be placed at either end of the span.

Example

Here is a technique for viewing a fundamental and its harmonics (or any evenly spaced portions of the spectrum) with high resolution.

Narrow the span about the fundamental as necessary with m , centering the carrier.

Set the center frequency step size with m cessive harmonics will be displayed.

Manual Operation 55

SIGNAL TRACK -AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY CONTROL

-am-..

70 e.

MARKER

S E C O N D HARMONIC T H I R D H A R M O N I C F O U R T H H A R M O N I C

Similar stepping can be accomplished using marker a into step size for intermodulation products or other evenly spaced signals such as communication channels.

SIGNAL TRACK - AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY CONTROL

The analyzer is capable of automatically maintaining a drifting signal at the center of the display To operate

SIGNAL TRACK:

Press [--1 , and place the marker on the signal to be tracked with

Press B to initiate the tracking. The light above the key indicates tracking. (Press again to turn off .)

As the signal drifts, the center frequency will automatically change to bring the signal, and marker to the center of the display.

MARKER m , any other MARKER mode or the instrument preset turns the tracking function off.

The upper sideband of a transmitter is to be monitored as the carrier frequency is tuned.

Locate the sideband with [--y)

4 R . . L

I. ad

Al-lVdl@-

I I I

I I I I I

56 Manual Operation

MARKER

The upper carrier sideband is tracked with m then zoomed in with [T] Q m (%1.

PRESELECTOR PEAK

As the carrier frequency is changed, the sideband response will tend to remain in the center of the display. The center frequency and marker frequency reads out the sideband’s frequency.

A combination of (::GKw:l and a allows the “real time” signal frequency drift to be read on the display.

PRESELECTOR PEAK

Preselector peak automatically adjusts the preselector tracking to peak the signal at the active marker. When the marker is tuned to a signal and m is pressed, an internal routine searches for the peak response of the preselector and adjusts the tracking accordingly. Using preselector peak prior to measuring a signal yields the most accurate amplitude reading.

Preselector peak operates with the I--] , (,,,. , or m markers. If the marker is OFF pressing m will initiate a peak search routine and then peak the response at that marker. A “PEAKING!” message appears on the active graticule area to indicate operation of the peaking routine. PRESELECTOR PEAK only operates in the 2 - 22

GHz preselected band.

Example

Peak the signal for accurate amplitude measurement.

Tune marker to signal of interest.

Press @ 0 .

Manual Operation 57

NOISE

LEVEL MEASUREMENT

Press m to peak preselector tracking. Measure amplitude by reading marker.

MARKER

The specific preselector correction factor applied in the example above is stored. A [15::) INSTRUMENT PRESET will not erase the correction factor; however, another PEAKING routine in the same band will store a new correction factor in that band.

The factory set preselector tracking can be recalled with [,,, = @ The preselector can be manually adjusted by pressing (,,, / (“:::1 (See Chapter 11.)

How It Works

The internal preselector peaking routine automatically searches and sets the peak response of the YIG filter at the marker frequency. Each peaking operation only affects the frequency band in which the signal is located (four possible bands). A correction factor, representing the tracking offset, is stored in memory for that particular band each time the peaking routine is used. Correction factors (one per band) remain in memory unless a new peaking routine is initiated that may result in a different number. The last m correction factors are saved along with control settings in the internal storage registers upon execution of a I-11 followed by a number from 1 to 6. Thus, up to six correction factors could be saved for any of the frequency ranges listed in the chart below:

( BAND 1 FREQUENCY RANGE 1

2

1

3

4

2.0 - 5.8

GHz

5.8 - 12.5

GHz

12.5 - 18.6 GHz

18.6 - 22

GHz

NOISE LEVEL MEASUREMENT

When noise level is activated and the marker is placed in the noise, the rms noise level is read out normalized to a

1 Hz noise power bandwidth.

58 Manual Operation

MARKER

Noise level enabled: @ b

Noise level disabled: [,,,,, b

NOISE LEVEL MEASUREMENT

The noise level measurement readout is corrected for the analyzer’s log amplifier response, and the detector response. The value is also normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth.

Measurement and Readout Range

Noise level measures noise accurately down to 10 dB above the spectrum analyzer’s noise level. The readout resolution is in steps of +- 0.1 dB.

DATA Entry

See MARKER @ , [8) , and m.

Example

In a communication system, the baseband noise level as well as signal to noise ratio measurements are required.

Select a frequency in the baseband spectrum clear of signals with a single marker. Press IUI] 0

NOISE LEVEL MEASUREMENT

MARKER

Read the noise at the marker by pressing OBrl) b

The noise at 64 MHz is - 134 dBm in a 1 Hz bandwidth. This corresponds to - 134 dBm + 36 dB/4 kHz =

- 98 dBm in 4 kHz voice channel bandwidth.

Signal to noise measurements require the measurement of the noise level, as the example above, and the measurement of the absolute signal level. *

Measure the power level of the adp signal. To turn the noise level off, press fxiFJm and read the power level.

The signal to noise ratio referenced to 4 kHz bandwidth is - 32 dBm - ( - 98 dBm) = 66 dB.

*Normalization to a desired bandwidth uses the equation 10 log,0 ( desired BW

1Hz )

60 Manual Operation

SCALE SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE

Chapter 7

SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the use of SCALE and REFERENCE LINE control groups for setting the amplitude scale, and for making amplitude level measurements more conveniently.

R E F E R E N C E L I N E E

DISPLAY LINE

1:

THRESHOLD

SCALE

SCALE keys allow the scaling of the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic or linear units without changing the reference level value.

LOG.

m (DATA entry) scales the amplitude to 1 dB, 2 dB, 5 dB, or 10 dB per division.

If m is pressed when the scale is linear, 10 dB per division will be automatically entered. The subsequent

(DATA), if any, will then replace the automatic 10 dB/div.

Press

Manual

Operation 61

SCALE

LIN

SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE level, the bottom graticule becomes zero voltage. Reference level, and all other amplitudes, are read out in voltage. However, other units may be selected. See AMPLITUDE UNITS SELECTION, Chapter 11.

If m is pressed when the scale is linear, 10 dB per division will be automatically entered.

LIN

Press (

In LINEAR, a specific voltage per division scale can be set by entering a voltage reference level value. For example, to set the scale to 3 mV/division, key in 30 mV reference level, (Voltage entries are rounded to the nearest 0.1 dB, so the 30 mV entry becomes 30.16 mV which equals - 17.4 dBm.)

DATA Entry m(-j pq @

Changes scale in allowable increments (1, 2, 5, or 10 dB per division).

Enables direct scale selection of allowed values. Other entries are rounded to an adjacent value.

LIN

No DATA entry will be accepted with the linear SCALE selection key, 0

Example

It is convenient to observe AM sidebands in linear as well as logarithmic scales for analysis of both modulation percentages and distortion products.

6.2 Manual Operation

SCALE

AND

REFERENCE

LINE

Modulated AM signal displayed in the 10 dB/division scale shows the carrier, its sidebands, and distortion products.

SCALE

Linear scaling enables the observation of the sidebands proportional to the carrier.

LIN

Press (-J

As in the MARKER m example, Chapter 6, a direct readout of the percent modulation can be made.

The fractional readout is one -half the modulation index (only one sideband is measured).

%AM = 2(.25) x 100 = 50%.

t I I I I III I

Note that the carrier signal need not be placed at the reference level for an index ratio measurement.

I I 1

LOG

Change to a logarithmic scale with m and change the dB/division with @ @ .

The sidebands are 12 dB down from the carrier, verifying the earlier measurement results.

Manual Operation 63

REFERENCE LINE SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE

Harmonic distortion of the modulating signal can be measured as in MARKER m , Chapter 6.

The modulation frequency is 18.8 kHz and the distortion caused by the second harmonic is 2.4% (read out as .024X).

REFERENCE LINE

The reference line functions, DISPLAY LINE (DL) and THRESHOLD (TH), place horizontal reference lines on the display. Their levels are read out in absolute amplitude units.

DISPLAY LINE uses l l measure signal levels with direct readout.

establish a standard for go/no-go test comparisons.

0 eliminate or reduce amplitude errors due to system frequency response uncertainty

THRESHOLD provides: l a base line clipper whose level is read out.

0 a minimum threshold level that can be set.

DISPLAY LINE

DISPLAY LINE [1.1113 (DATA entry) places a horizontal reference line at any level on the graticule. The line’s amplitude, in reference level units, is read out on the left-hand side of the CRT display.

64 Manual Operation

SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE DISPLAY LINE

The DISPLAY LINE can be positioned anywhere within the graticule. When activated after LINE power ON or m , the display line is placed 4.5 divisions down from the reference level.

DISPLAY LINE m erases the line and readout from the CRT display but does not reset the last position. If the display line is activated again before LINE power ON or [a;l:l , it will return to its last position.

DISPLAY LINE position is always accessible for HP-IB and TRACE m , even if never activated. See Chapter 5,

TRACE ARITHMETIC.

t

The DISPLAY LINE readout has the same number of significant digits as reference level.

DATA Entry

(go

I

Moves the line about one division for each full turn. The line moves in display unit increments.

1

m @@

Moves the line one-tenth of the total amplitude scale per step.

@iiJH

Positions the line to the exact entry level. Entry may be in mV, FV -I- dBm,

+ dBmV, or f dB& depending upon which units are selected.

Example

When the amplitude of a number of signals in the same span require a quick readout, the DISPLAY LINE can be used.

Activate the DISPLAY LINE with @

With and read out its absolute amplitude level.

a d%“V

Moving the DISPLAY LINE to each signal reads out its amplitude.

Manual Operation 65

T H R E S H O L D

THRESHOLD

SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE

THRESHOLD (,.,,. (DATA entry) moves a lower boundary to the trace, similar to a base line clipper on directwriting CRT spectrum analyzers. The boundary’s absolute amplitude level, in reference level units, is read out on

The THRESHOLD can be positioned anywhere within the graticule. It operates on TRACE m , m, or for TRACES A, B, and C simultaneously. When activated after LINE power ON or 1’6::] , the THRESHOLD is

The THRESHOLD level does not influence the trace memory; that is, the threshold level is not a lower boundary for trace information stored and output from the trace memories through the HP-IB. TH [ removes the

THRESHOLD boundary and readout from the CRT display but does not reset the position. If threshold is activated again before LINE power ON or I’d::] , it will resume at its last level.

The THRESHOLD readout has the same number of significant digits as reference level.

DATA Entry

Moves the THRESHOLD about one division per rotation. The line moves in (,.,.io

Moves the THRESHOLD one-tenth of the total amplitude scale per step.

I (t*ll.l l pJ

Positions the THRESHOLD to the exact entry level. Entry may be in mV, k dBm, f dBmY or + dB& depending upon units selected.

66 Manual Operation

SCALE AND REFERENCE LINE

Example

The THRESHOLD can be used as a go/no-go test limit.

A series of signals can be tested for a specific

THRESHOLD level by placing the THRESHOLD at the test level.

Press THRESHOLD (,.,,,I 55.2 dBm. Only those signals > - 55.2 dBm will be displayed.

T H R E S H O L D

Manual Operation 67

GENERAL DESCRIPTION C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

Chapter 8

COUPLED FUNCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the COUPLED FUNCTION group and its use in various measurements. The COUPLED

FUNCTIONS control the receiver characteristics of the spectrum analyzer.

The values of the COUPLED FUNCTION are automatically selected by the analyzer to keep absolute amplitude and frequency calibration as frequency span and reference level are changed. * The functions are all coupled with

LINE power ON, a m or I”;‘:) FULL SPAN key, or when their individual [1u10) is activated.

couples

I

Function

L

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N Ill i ri

ulLo”ples

Function

=Q j

RES 1

E

Sweeptime, full scale

Video Bandwidth

Resdution Bandwidth

I

Center Frequency

Step Size

RF Attenuation

OFF

I

MANUAL

Light

I

ON

For each COUPLED FUNCTION:

Sets the function to the preset value dictated by the analyzer’s current state. The function is coupled.

MA UAL

-:&s

Function value will not change with instrument state. DATA entry changes value. The MAN-

UAL light goes on and stays on until the function is placed in m once again.

I [

In most cases, the [-1 coupled functions will change values to maintain amplitude calibration when one or more of the others are manually set. If the amplitude or frequency becomes uncalibrated, “MEAS UNCAL” appears in the right-hand side of the graticule.

*Center frequency step size does not affect amplitude or frequency calibration.

Manual Operation 69

DATA ENTRY FOR COUPLED FUNCTIONS

Coupled

Function

i::‘1

ml

(::::‘I

[,1,,1

I’::::‘]

Selects

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

3 dB resolution bandwidth (IF filter) which largely determines the ability of the analyzer to resolve signals close together in frequency.

3 dB bandwidth of the post detection low pass filter that averages noise appearing on the trace.

The total time for the analyzer to sweep through the displayed frequency span or display a detected signal in zero frequency span.

The setting of the input RF attenuator which controls signal level at the input mixer.

Selects center frequency change for each DATA @ @ when I=] is activated.

DATA ENTRY FOR COUPLED FUNCTIONS

Discrete values are entered for [:;‘I , [‘:“;“J , [‘I:::‘1 , and (.,,,. . The DATA entry from DATA a a n d @j ;,&J selects these values sequentially from the current value. A DATA entry from the keyboard which is not exactly equal to an allowable value will select an adjacent value. For example, [::‘1 will select 30 kHz

QQ@ bandwidth, the next higher IF bandwidth.

RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH

[:;‘I (DATA entry) sets bandwidth selection to MANUAL and changes the analyzer’s IF bandwidth. The bandwidths that can be selected are 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz,

1 MHz, and 3 MHz.

Example

A measurement requiring manual resolution bandwidth selection is the zero span (time domain) observation of modulation waveforms. An example can be found in Chapter 3, ZERO FREQUENCY SPAN - FIXED TUNED

RECEIVER OPERATION.

70 Manual Operation

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N V I D E O B A N D W I D T H

Another use of manual resolution bandwidth is for better sensitivity over a given frequency span.

The low level intermodulation products of a signal needs to be measured. With the functions coupled, the analyzer noise may mask the distortion products.

Reduction of the noise level by 10 dB (increased sensitivity) is achieved by decreasing the bandwidth by a factor of 10.

-

(THRESHOLD has been activated to clarify the display. 1 lu

4l.B

k

The sweep time automatically slows to maintain absolute amplitude calibration if m is coupled.

VIDEO BANDWIDTH

[.;“.“) (DATA entry) sets the video bandwidth selection to manual and changes the analyzer’s post detection filter bandwidth. The bandwidths that can be selected are 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz.

hp

19 .

Manual Operation 7 1

V I D E O B A N D W I D T H

Example

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

Signal responses near the noise level of the analyzer will be visually masked by the noise. The video filter can be narrowed to smooth this noise.

A low level signal at this center frequency can just be discerned from the noise.

Narrowing the video bandwidth clarifies the signal and allows its amplitude measurement.

P r e s s m @I @I @l @I

The sweep time will increase to maintain amplitude calibration.

NOTE

The video bandwidth must be set wider or equal to the resolution bandwidth when measuring pulsed RF or impulse noise levels.

Video Averaging

Narrowing the video filter requires a slower sweep time to keep amplitude calibration, since the narrower filter must have sufficient time to respond to each signal response. Video averaging is an internal routine which djgjtalfy averages a number of sweeps, allowing a more instantaneous display of spectra1 changes due to center frequency, frequency span, or reference level changes. See Chapter 11.

72 Manual Operation

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

SWEEP TIME

SWEEP TIME m (DATA entry) sets the sweep time selection to manual and changes the rate at which the analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency or time span.

The sweep times that can be selected are:

SWEEP TIME SEQUENCE

FREQUENCY SPAN

(~100 Hz)

20 msec to 1500 set continuously

ZERO FREQUENCY

SPAN (0 Hz)

1 psec to 10 msec

20 msec to 1500 set

1,2,5, and 10 continuously

Example

To identify signals quickly in a very narrow frequency span (where the resolution bandwidth would be narrow), the sweep time can be temporarily reduced (e.g., speed up sweep rate).

A frequency span of 10 kHz will have a selected resolution bandwidth of 100 Hz and a sweep time of 3 seconds.

INPUT ATTENUATION

To quickly see signals present in the span, press I::::‘1 0 its span, couple sweep time again with m

Note that the MEAS UNCAL message appears automatically as the faster sweep time causes some distortion of the spectral response.

10 al

ATID I.

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

CEmnve* 3.e H*

PIN I . . . .“Z

51p I ” Wm.0

INPUT ATTENUATION

I11111] (DATA entry) sets the attenuation function to MANUAL and changes the analyzer’s RF input attenuation.

The levels of attenuation that can be selected are 10 dB to 70 dB in 10 dB steps, or 0 dB under special conditions.

Generally, the reference level does not change with attenuator settings.

I aam .Y M.

¶=ud 2” .*,

When the RF input attenuator function is coupled (AUTO), the value selected assures that the level at the input mixer is less than - 10 dBm (the 1 dB compression point) for on-screen signals. For example, if the reference level is + 28 dBm, the input attenuator will be set to 40 dB: + 28 dBm - 40 dB = - 12 dBm at the mixer.

The input mixer level can be changed to assure maximum dynamic range. See EFFECTIVE MIXER LEVEL,

Chapter 11.

CAUTION

Greater than + 30 dBm total input power will damage the input attenuator and the input mixer.

74 Manual Operation

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

Zero Attenuation

INPUT Al7ENUATlON

As a precaution to protect the spectrum analyzer’s input mixer, 0 dB RF attenuation can only be selected from the number/units keyboard, press (,,,.1 @(x-

Reference Levels I - 100 dBm and > + 30 dBm

Reference levels 5 - 100 dBm or between + 30 dBm and + 60 dBm can be called when the reference level extended range is activated. Low reference level limits depend upon resolution bandwidth and scale.

I

Press m (,1,.1 to extend the reference level range.

See Chapter 3, FUNCTION (F) , and Chapter 11, (,.,,, KEY FUNCTIONS.

Determining Distortion Products

If the total power to the analyzer is overloading the input mixer, distortion products of the input signals can be displayed as real signals. The RF attenuator can be used to determine which signals, if any, are internally generated distortion products.

Example

The two main signals shown are producing intermodulation products because the analyzer’s input mixer is overloaded.

To determine whether these intermod products are generated by the analyzer, first save the spectrum displayed in B with @I B B B.

Manual Operation 75

CENTER FREQUENCY STEP SIZE

(If the reference level changes, it will be necessary to return it back to its original value.) hp e -I..8 h

1. .”

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N

1 I 1 I 1 I

YI 1.. “1

1 ] op 2.. ..*

Since some of the signal responses decrease as the attenuation increases (by comparing the response in A with the stored trace in B) , distortion products are caused by an overloaded input mixer. The high level signals causing the overload conditions must be attenuated to eliminate this condition.

CENTER FREQUENCY STEP SIZE

m (DATA entr ) sets step size to MANUAL, changes and stores the step size entered into a register. While [“::::‘) is in MANUAL, &E-] 0 change center frequency by the step size value stored in the register. Several functions can be used to enter step size value to the register. When a CF STEP SIZE is AUTO, the center frequency steps will be 10% of the frequency span, even though the CF STEP SIZE register contains another value.

Entry Value m State step size [,,,, , [ FULL

SPAN or LINE power ON

I”::::il (DATA entry)

MARKER @

100 MHz

DATA entry value marker frequency readout coupled (AUTO) uncoupled (MANUAL) uncoupled (MANUAL)

The step size can be varied from 0 Hz to greater than 20 GHz with 1 Hz resolution. It is displayed with the same resolution as center frequency.

76 Manual Operation

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N CENTER FREQUENCY STEP SIZE

When the center frequency is activated with step size in MANUAL, the active function readout includes both the center frequency and the step size value.

i i i I

DATA Entry

(TFJQ

fig lF5[@

Changes the step size in display unit increments.

Changes the step size in steps equal to one-tenth of the frequency span.

Selects a specific step size to a resolution equal to the current center frequency readout.

Example

Surveillance of a wide frequency span sometimes requires high resolution. One fast way to achieve this is to take the span in sequential pieces using a tailored center frequency step. This example looks from 0 Hz to 2.5 GHz in

50 MHz spans.

First set the span and center frequency: For a span of

50 M H z , p r e s s (5) m m @

S e t t h e center frequency to 25 MHz with [z) @

Q(ul.

.t i 1 i 1 I I I

I 1 I I m 25.. ml=

-IlLHI

I 1 I I vml 3ee LIHZ

I I J

WAN se.. ma=

¶w 2e I ) . . .

Manual Operation 77

CENTER FREQUENCY STEP SIZE

Set the step size to 50 MHz, (‘::::‘I reactivate center frequency with [Zg) and step to

225 MHz.

hp

C O U P L E D F U N C T I O N cwnw f---3

Now each u sets the center frequency to the next 50 MHz span for a span by span surveillance of the spectrum. (Center frequency = 25 MHz, 75 MHz, 125 MHz, etc.) Center frequency step size can also be defined by the marker. See the MARKER ENTRY portion of Chapter 6.

78 Manual Operation

SWEEP

SWEEP AND TRIGGER

Chapter 9

SWEEP AND TRIGGER

This chapter describes the use of SWEEP and TRIGGER control functions.

SWEEP controls enable: m continuous, or repetitive sweeping (sweep time L 20 msec) .

B a single sweep which will repeat only on demand (sweep time I 20 msec) .

TRIGGER controls select the function which will begin a sweep:

B as soon as possible,

[.,, line voltage passes through zero on a positive swing, m an external signal voltage passes through - 1.5V on a positive swing.

[,,,I the level of a detected RF envelope reaches up to the level on the CRT display determined by the

LEVEL knob.

T R I G G E R i

SWEEP AND TRIGGER CONTROLS

SWEEP

The spectrum analyzer frequency sweep (sweep times 220 msec), once triggered, continues at a uniform rate from the start frequency to the stop frequency unless new data entries are made to the analyzer from the front panel or the HP-IB. With faster sweeps, changes to center frequency, for example, appear continuous. With long sweep times, a change in center frequency noticeably suspends the sweep while the analyzer updates its state and readout, then the sweep continues from where it was, tracing out the new spectrum.

Manual Operation 79

TRIGGER SWEEP AND TRIGGER

The SWEEP light indicates that a sweep is in progress. The light is out between sweeps and during data entry. (The light is out for sweep times 110 msec.)

After a sweep, the next sweep will be initiated only if:

0 continuous sweep mode is selected or a single sweep demand is made,

0 the trigger conditions are met, l data is not entered continuously from the front panel DATA controls or the HP-IB.

Continuous Sweep

[-1 enables the continuous sweep mode. Provided the trigger and data entry conditions are met, one sweep will follow another as soon as triggered. Pressing m initiates a new sweep.

Single Sweep

@ enables the single sweep mode. Each time [,,,,,,I is pressed, including when the SWEEP mode is changed from continuous, one sweep is initiated provided that the trigger and data entry conditions are met. A sweep in progress will be terminated and restarted upon (,,.,,, .

Zero Frequency Span Sweep

In zero frequency span, sweep times from 1 psec to 10 msec are also available. In these sweep times, the SWEEP

[,,,) , @ are disabled. The video signal response is not digitally stored (trace modes also disabled), but multiplexed directly onto the display along with the graticule and readouts. The graticule and readouts are refreshed following each fast sweep.

To avoid flicker of the display when external or video triggers are less frequent than 25 msec, the analyzer will trigger internally. If triggers dependent only on external or video trigger are required, press or 11.111) ‘[,,,, disables “auto” video trigger feature

NOTE

For zero frequency span sweep times 110 msec and 11*111) x or @ y, the CRT display graticule and readout depend upon triggering. If no trigger is present, the CRT display will be blank.

TRIGGER

The analyzer sweep is triggered by one of four modes selected.

l l l

(:2:., allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep.

i allows the next sweep to start when the line voltage passes through zero, going positive.

[ allows the next sweep to start when an external voltage level passes through = 1.5V, going positive.

The external trigger signal level must be between OV and + 5V

80 Manual Operation

SWEEP AND TRIGGER TRIGGER

EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT l B allows the next sweep to start if the detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the LEVEL knob. The LEVEL corresponds to detected levels displayed on the CRT between the bottom graticule (full

CCW) and the top graticule (full CW).

An RF envelope will trigger the sweep only if it is capable of being traced on the CRT display-that is, the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are wide enough to pass the modulation waveform of an input signal.

Example

A zero span display of this video waveform will trigger for all LEVEL knob settings.

t i I I 1

If the video signal lowers on the display, the LEVEL must be set towards the minus side.

If the level does not cause a trigger within 25 msec, the sweep will be triggered anyway to ensure a display. Note that this is true only for sweep times ~10 msec.

M a n u a l O p e r a t i o n 8 1

INSTRUMENT STATE FULL SPAN INSTRUMENT PRESET (2 - 22 GHz)

Chaper 10

INSTRUMENTSTATE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the INSTRUMENT STATE keys. Each key allows access to or activation of a specific set of functions and their values. Some of the sets are built into the analyzerand some are user defined.

I N S T R U M E N T S T A T E

Instrument states that can be selected:

FULL SPAN

@ m

A full 2-22 GHz span with coupled operation and all the functions set to known states and values.

FULL SPAN

@ A full 0 Hz to 2.5 GHz span with coupled operation and all the functions set to known states and values.

m(TJ Saves the complete set of current front panel function states and values for later recall. Registers 1 through 6 are available for storage.

@(TJ Recalls the complete instrument state saved in the register called.

Calls for front panel control after the analyzer has been placed in a remote state by an HP-IB controller.

FULL SPAN INSTRUMENT PRESET (2 - 22 GHz)

m provides a convenient starting point for making most measurements. That is, it calls for a full 2 - 22 GHz span, coupled functions, and a 0 dBm reference level, to name a few. LINE power ON automatically calls for an instrument preset.

The states that are set include all the functions and values of l l front panel functions, and

[,.,,11 KEY FUNCTION S , and l functions accessible only by the HP-IB.

Manual Operation 83

FULL SPAN INSTRUMENT PRESET (2 - 22 GHz)

Front Panel Preset

INSTRUMENT STATE m enables all the front panel functions designated by keys with white lettering. It will save a trace response in

TRACE B, but not A or C.

,m, FUNCTIONS ACTIVATED WITH FULL SPAN KEY

To be precise:

FUNCTION:

DATA:

COUPLED FUNCTION:

TRACE:

Start Frequency

Stop Frequency

Reference Level

Hold

2 GHz

22 GHz

0 dBm

All set to a which corresponds to the following values:

Resolution Bandwidth 3 MHz

Video Bandwidth

Sweep Time

1MHz

500 msec full scale

Attenuator 10 dB, coupled to maintain < - 10 dBm at input mixer

Center Frequency Step Size 100 MHz entered in register

A

B

A - B

Clear-Write

Blanked, but information in memory saved off off

MARKER:

INSTRUMENT STATE

I,.,and@:

SCALE:

REFERENCE LINE:

States are saved including the current state. See @ a below.

Logarithmic, 10 dB/division

Display line off

Threshold off

5.5 divisions up

1 .O divisions up

84 Manual Operation

INSTRUMENT STATE FULL SPAN 0 - 2.5 GHz

SWEEP: Continuous

TRIGGER: Free run

INSTR CHECK:

An internal instrument check is made. If the check is false, lights will stay on.

KEY FUNCTION:

Normal

[auto] FUNCTIONS:

Chapter 11, m KEY FUNCTION S , discusses the implications of activating instrument preset during [,.,, FUNCTION use.

If the key is activated (shift light on), m unshifts the key. This is equivalent to pressing [--I

HP-IB FUNCTIONS:

“Dl” Display size-normal

“EM” Erase trace C memory

“03” Output format ASCII absolute

“PD” Pen down

“DA’ Display address set to 3072

Graphic information or control language written into the analyzer memory by HP-

IB functions such as graph (GR) , plot (PA), label (LB), or display write (DW) will be erased unless stored in trace memory B. Instrument preset also rewrites all the display graticule and character readouts into the appropriate section of the display memory.

FULL SPAN 0 - 2.5 GHz

The 0 - 2.5 GHz FULL SPAN key selects a start/stop frequency of 0 Hz and 2.5 GHz respectively, a reference level of 0 dBm, and sets all the COUPLED FUNCTIONS to AUTO. Basically, B is the equivalent of an instrument preset in the low band. It presets everything that m does except that m will not execute the instrument check sequence.

SAVING AND RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATES

[ (DATA keyboard entry) and @ (DATA keyboard entry) save and recall complete sets of user-defined front panel function v lues. The DATA entry from the keyboard names the register which stores the instrument state. Six registers, 0 through @ , can be saved and recalled. Only another [ will erase a saved register.

The registers contain their last states even with a loss of line power (power failure). The registers are maintained with an internal battery supply for about a 30-day period after line power failure.

@gr;7 is a special recall function which recalls the instrument state prior to the last instrument preset or single function value change, whichever has most recently occurred. It aids in recovering from inadvertent entries.

Registers 8 and 9 contain preset control settings that are used for calibration purposes. (See Calibration procedure under GENERAL INFORMATION at the beginning of this section.) Register 0 restores the current state of the analyzer, which is useful for servicing.

The current instrument state, if the POWER switch is turned to STANDBY (or a short-term loss of ac line power), can be recovered at POWER ON if m is activated previous to a power loss.

Manual Operation 85

SAVING AND RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATES INSTRUMENT STATE

Some [,.., KEY FUNCTION values or states cannot be saved. Neither can information in the display memories, such as a title or trace.

Example

When a test sequence is used over and over, the instrument states can be set up in the registers prior to testing for recall during the procedure.

Keying in a specific state: (06::)

(ZE--@p-J@

[~](gYi-J~~

[y)@

LIN ( SCALE

Then save with [,., Q

P r e s s a

And recall the last state with (llellll [1] O n c e t h e state has been recalled, any function can be used for more detailed measurements.

Note that in this case, the state could also have been recalled by (.,,.rrl [1] .

Registers 1 - 6 can also be locked to prevent any loss or change in the contents of the storage registers.

[,.lrl I-11 locks the registers and (,.,,, (..cLLL unlocks the registers.

86 Manual Operation

INSTRUMENT STATE

LOCAL OPERATION

LOCAL OPERATION

@ enables front panel control after an HP-IB remote LISTEN or TALK command has been executed. An HP-IB local lockout will disable @ until an HP-IB return to local command is executed or the LINE power is turned to

STANDBY then ON again.

Indicates instrument has been addressed through HP-

IB.

Indicates instrument is in remote operation.

The addressed light remains on until an HP-IB device clear command or any unlisten command is executed.

Manual Operation 87

(,,,rr KEY FUNCTIONS

Chapter 11

I KEY FUNCTIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes access and use of the B KEY FUNCTION.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Shift functions supplement a front panel function or provide unique measurement capabilities. The @ functions are not named on the front panel but are coded by the blue characters beside the keys. For- example, the frequency offset function is designated by the code V On the front panel the code V is found in the FUNCTION section : V

The shift functions are activated by pressing (WTII and then the front panel key with the appropriate blue code. A complete summary of shift FUNCTION S is in this chapter under FUNCTION SUMMARY There is an index to all shift functions at the end of this chapter.

Example

Activate the shift function V (frequency offset) with press [ shift light on press shift light off and offset function activated

The shift light can always be turned off with I--u] , which returns the front panel keys to their designated function.

m does not disable the selected shift function (except for title).

DATA Entry

An active shift function value is read out and identified in the active function area of the display the same as any other function using DATA entry Once the data has been entered, any other function can be activated. The shift function will retain its last value until the a key is pressed, or the LINE switch is switched to STANDBY

Manual Operation 89

FUNCTION SUMMARY

General r HP-IB Service request

P Enter HP-IB address f Power on in last state z Display Address j Display Write

Amplitude

Z Amplitude offset

A U n i t s : dBm

B dBmV

C

D voltage dB@

I Extended reference level range

- Negative entry

, Mixer level k& KEY FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION SUMMARY

Display o Annotation blanked p Annotation on w Display correction data g CRT beam off h CRT beam on m Graticule blanked n Graticule on

E Title

Trace c A+B-+A

Fl d e

Detection: normal positive peak negative peak i k sampling

Trace C: blank trace C

B?t,C

1 B - C j view trace C

G Video averaging on

H Video averaging off

Trigger-Zero Span x 1 without 25 msec triggering y B without 25 msec triggering

Instrument State

( Save registers locked

) Save registers unlocked

T Fast preset 2 - 22 GHz

U Fast preset external mixer

S Fast HP-IB operation t Band lock

Q Band unlock

Error Correction

W Execute routine

X Use correction data

Y Do not use correction data w Display correction data

Diagnostics w Display correction data q Disable step gain

R Frequency diagnostic on

F YTO pretest mode

J Manual DACS control

# Turns off YTX self-heating correction

Frequency

V Frequency offset

- Negative entry v Signal identifier ext. mixer

Marker

K Marker to next peak

N Marker to minimum

0 Enter A+ span

M Noise level on

L Noise level off u Stop single sweep at marker

= Factory preselector setting

/ Manual preselector setting

*A Amplitude in dBm

B Amplitude in dBmV

C Amplitude in dBpV

D Amplitude in voltage

E Title

F Removes IF Offset for YTO preset

G Video averaging on l

H Video averaging off

I Extended reference level range

J Manual DACS control

K Marker to next peak l

L Noise level off

M Noise level on

N Marker to minimum

0 Enter A + span

P Set HP-IB address

* Q Band unlock

R Frequency diagnostic on

S Fast HP-IB operation

ALPHABETICAL KEY CODE SUMMARY

T Fast preset 2 - 22 GHz

U Fast preset external mixer

V Frequency offset

W Execute error correction routine

X Use correction data

*Y Do not use correction data

Z Amplitude offset

*a Normal detection b Positive peak detection c A+B-‘A d Negative peak detection e Sample detection f Power on in last state g CRT beam off

*h CRT beam on i BsC j View trace C

*k Blank trace C

I B - C m Graticule blanked

*n Graticule on o Annotation blanked

*p Annotation on q Disable step gain r HP-IB service request t Band lock u Stop single sweep at marker v Signal identifier ext. mixer w Display correction data

X

111 without 25 msec triggering

I

El z Display address

- Negative entry

= Factory preselector setting

/ Manual preselector setting

( Save registers locked

) Save registers, unlocked

I Display write

Mixer level i Turns off YTX self-heating correction

‘These functions selected with [‘a.‘:l INSTRUMENT PRESET

90 Manual Operation

151111 KEY FUNCTIONS (,.,,, -,v,z

DATA entries to shift functions are made only from the number/units keyboard. The ENABLED light remains off even though data may be entered.

Data is entered (that is, changes the instrument state) only when a units key is pressed. If the entry has no units (an address, for example), use the

0 key as the terminator.

NEGATIVE DATA KEYBOARD ENTRY

Entering negative data from the DATA keyboard requires the use of a negative symbol prefix on the number entry.

Negative entry: [,.,,, (

For example, to enter a negative 100 MHz offset frequency:

Press & [z) to activate frequency offset.

P r e s s (,..I] ( - I 0 m m @ to enter a negative frequency.

Not all values can be entered with a negative prefix. For example, a negative entry to a voltage reference level will result in entering the positive value.

Negative entries in dB can be made with the - dBm units key or the negative prefix with the + dBm units key. If 0 are used, the value will be entered as positive.

FREQUENCY AND AMPLITUDE OFFSET

The CRT display amplitude and frequency readout can be offset. Entering an offset does not affect the trace.

V

Frequency offset: (,,,,I [=I

(DATA keyboard entry)

Amplitude offset:

(DATA keyboard entry

Offset entries are added to all the frequency or amplitude readouts on the CRT display, including marker, display line, threshold, start frequency, and stop frequency.

FUNCTION

To eliminate an offset, activate the offset and enter zero. A FULL SPAN key also sets the offsets to zero.

Offsets are stored with the [,,, functions for recall with @ .

Manual Operation 91

When an offset is entered, its value is displayed on the CRT iji ii i I

I i i i”“;? KEY FUNCTIONS

DATA entry from the keyboard can be in Hz, kHz, MHz, or GHz for frequency and dB, - dB, mV and FV for amplitude. The amplitude offset readout is always in dB. An entry in voltage can be made and will be converted to dB offset.

The offset range for frequency is - 99.999999990 to + 99.999999999 GHz in 1 Hz steps. The amplitude offset range is greater than f 100 dB in 0.1 dB steps. Least significant digits will be truncated for frequency and amplitude offset entries.

Example

An 102.6 MHz up converter with 12.7 dB attenuation is placed between a signal source and the spectrum analyzer. The offsets can be set so that the CRT display shows the trace referenced to the signal as input to the converter.

Amplitude offset is entered as a positive value to compensate (offset) the loss of the converter.

Note that the original REF LEVEL of 0 dBm is now changed to 12.7 dBm also.

92 Manual Operation

m KEY FUNCTIONS

Frequency offset is entered as a negative value since the input frequency to the converter is lower than the output.

(,.,,, V -, A, B, C, D

EFFECTIVE MIXER LEVEL

The effective mixer level is equal to the REFERENCE LEVEL minus the INPUT ATTENUATOR setting. It specifies the maximum signal level that will be applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the

REFERENCE LEVEL. A FULL SPAN key (0 - 2.5 GHz or 2 - 22 GHz) sets the mixer level to - 10 dBm, which is 5 dB below the analyzer’s 1 dB compression point. The effective mixer level can be manually set from - 10 dBm * to - 70 dBm in 10 dB steps by pressing [ , (comma sign) and entering the desired eve1 through the numeric keyboard. For instance, to set a mixer level at -40 dBm, press: (,,IIl , m d (zl . As the analyzer’s REFERENCE LEVEL is changed, the coupled input attenuator will automatically change to limit the maximum signal at the mixer to - 40 dBm for signals I REFERENCE LEVEL.

AMPLITUDE UNITS

The following shift key codes immediately select the corresponding units for all the amplitude readouts: reference level, marker, display line, and threshold.

When a units change is made, all readouts are converted so as to preserve the absolute power levels of all the readouts. For example, a 0 dBm threshold level converts to 47.0 dBmV (50 ohm input) when dBmV units are called.

SHIFT KEY

FUNCTION

AMPLITUDE

UNITS i A. . . . . .

(or FULLSPAN key) . . . . . . . dBm

@ B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dBmV

[,,,,, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBpV m D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . volts

The keys for these functions are located in the COUPLED FUNCTION group.

‘In the Extended Reference Level Range (Shift I, under EXTEND REFERENCE LEVEL RANGE in this chapter), the effective mixer level can be set to 0 dBm.

Manual Operation 93

H I, =,/

EXTEND REFERENCE LEVEL RANGE

k& KEY FUNCTIONS

Normally, the reference level can be set from - 89.9 dBm to + 30.0 dBm in coupled operation. The limits of the range can be extended to a maximum of - 139.9 dBm and + 60 dBm.

I press B m

The lower limit of reference level depends upon resolution bandwidth and scale.

Scale h lo9 linear linear

Resolution

Bandwidth

11 kHz

23 kHz sl kHz

>3kHz

Minimum reference level with extended reference level

10 dB attenuation 0 dB attenuation

- 129.9 dBm

- 109.9 dBm

- 109.9 dBm

- 89.9 dBm

- 139.9 dBm

- 119.9 dBm

- 119.9 dBm

- 99.9 dBm

When the reference level is set at a minimum, the level may change if either scale or resolution bandwidth is changed. The extended range is disabled with instrument preset.

FACTORY PRESELECTOR SETTING

Activating (,,t = will reset the internal preselector to a factory set 2 - 22 GHz tracking range. The factory setting provides a preset adjustment for each of the four frequency bands in the 2 - 22 GHz range. These preset adjustments optimize the preselector tracking over the full 2 - 22 GHz frequency range. The tracking can be optimized at any single frequency with the ()::::LJ key. A @ adjustment in one band will not affect the preselector tracking in the other three bands. (See Chapter 6 for more information.)

MANUAL PRESELECTOR TRACKING

The internal preselector can be manually adjusted for a peak response in the 2-22 GHz band. m / @ enables manual entry of a DAC number from 0 - 63 with the DATA knob, step keys, or numeric keyboard. The

DAC reading corresponds to a voltage which sets a particular preselector tracking offset. The location of the

MARKER determines the band (four independently adjustable bands) to be adjusted.

The Manual Preselector Tracking function is useful for peaking the preselector at locations where a stable CW signal is absent. For instance, drifting signals or pulse modulated signals do not easily lend themselves to the use of

@ . The automatic preselector peak routine depends on a stable CW signal. In this situation, a means for manually tracking the preselector may provide a more reliable setting.

94 Manual Operation

kd KEY FUNCTIONS

MARKER SWEEPS

Stop Sweep at Marker, TALK after Marker

To stop the sweep at the marker, press MARKER I--] and press 11*0 u kd u, K, N

A marker must be activated to enter this sweep function.

Each time a sweep is triggered, it will stop at the marker, even if the marker has been moved. A marker being moved when the sweep passes may not stop the sweep.

To disable the stop sweep at marker functions press MARKER m or I’a::] .

In remote operation, the analyzer will not TALK until the trace sweep stops at the marker. TALK is suspended by keeping the HP-IB Data Valid line not true until the marker is placed.

MARKER TO NEXT PEAK/MARKER TO MINIMUM

Successive peaks can be identified by continuously using [ K. If a trace displays many different signal levels, a m can be used to find the largest signal. Then m K can be used successively to find the next largest signal.

Example

Press @ to find largest signal.

@ K to find next largest signal.

I ! !

! ! ! !

! !

! 1

Marker to Minimum

The minimum data value in a trace can be quickly located with B N.

Manual Operation 95

k2 m, n, o, p, g, h, w

GRATICULE AND ANNOTATION ON/OFF m KEY FUNCTIONS

The graticule and character readouts can be selectively blanked with key functions. This is valuable when alternative graphics are drawn on the CRT through the HP-IB.

Graticule

Blank:

On: press [,,,, m press B n

Annotation

Blank:

On: press (,.,,, 0 press [,.,,, p

CRT BEAM ON/OFF

The CRT beam power supply can be turned off to avoid unnecessary wear of the CRT if the analyzer is operated unattended.

Reducing intensity or blanking the traces does not reduce wear on the CRT

Beam off: press [,.,,, g

Beam on: press (,.,,,1 h

CRT beam power off does not affect HP-IB input/output of instrument function values or trace information.

DISPLAY CORRECTION DATA

The correction data generated from the error correction routine can be displayed.

Display correction data: press m w

Do not display correction data: press [)b:;IJ

The readout is detailed in this chapter under ERROR CORRECTION ROUTINE.

96 Manual Operation

.1 II* -5, .h” .*.. .*., .* .‘S n -..

CORRECTION DATA DISPLAYED

I KEY FUNCTIONS

TITLE

(,.lrll E, c, a, e, b, d

The user can write a message in the top CRT display line. When the title is activated, the front panel blue characters, number keyboard numbers, decimal, backspace, and space can be typed onto the top line starting at the left of the display. The full width of the display can be used (total of 58 characters); however, marker readout may interfere with the last 16 characters of the title.

Activate title:

Enter text:

To end a title:

(,,,, E (shift light on) abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

/4?L = () ,><

0123456789. [space] press I--] (shift light off)

A title will remain on the display until the title function is activated again, la;l:] is pressed, or an instrument state is recalled with @ .

To erase a title without changing the instrument state, end the title function if still active, then press ( E B.

A + B + A enables the restoration of the original trace A after a a has been activated. A + B + A is executed with both Trace A and Trace B in [,,,, : press m c.

When executed, m is turned off and the amplitude in trace B is added to the amplitude in trace A (in display units) and the result is written into trace A.

Additional A + B * A executions will each add another trace B response to the cumulative trace A

TRACE DETECTION MODES

One of four detection techniques can be selected for displaying trace information.

Mode normal sample

Access

FULL SPAN key o r [,,lrr a me l Most measurements

Use l Noise Level measurements

0 Zero frequency span waveforms for sweep times

2 20 msec l Video averaging positive peak negative peak

(,.,,,jb md l Diagnostic aids for servicing

Manual Operation 9 7

(,,,,, a, e, b, d

V i d e o

S i g n a l

L% KEY FUNCTIONS

Track

H o l d

\

A I D

COtlV~rtW

M e m o r y

_

C R T

Display

During a sweep, only a specified amount of time is available for writing data into each of the 1001 trace memory addresses. In two of these time periods, the positive and negative peak detectors obtain the maximum and minimum video signal excursions, respectively, and store these values in

ahernate trace memory addresses. This technique allows a graphic presentation of noise on the CRT display.

Normal Mode

In normal mode, a detection algorithm selectively chooses between the positive and negative peak values to be displayed. The choice is made dependent upon the type of video signal present.

Data from the positive peak detector (signal maximums) will alway be displayed in the odd-addressed trace memories (1, 3, . . . 1001). If, within the time period following the storage of a value in an odd-addressed memory, ’ there is no change in video signal level, the positive peak detector value will also be stored in the even address. In other words, the even-addressed memory will also contain positive peak detection data if the signal during that time period is monotonic. Negative peak detector data (video signal minimum) will be stored in the evenaddressed trace memory if the signal has a point of inflection during the time period.

Normal mode is selected with instrument preset.

Sample Mode

In the sample mode, the instantaneous signal value of the final analog-to-digital conversion for the time period is placed in memory. (As sweeptime increases, many analog-to-digital conversions occur in each time period, but only the final, single value can be stored.)

Sample mode is selected automatically for video averaging and noise level.

Positive and Negative Peak Modes

Positive and negative peak modes store signal maximums and minimums, respectively, in all trace memories.

98 Manual Operation

m KEY FUNCTIONS

Readout

Here, the same signal response is displayed with each trace detection mode.

k!Yd j, k, I

N O R M A L SAMPLE

POSITIVE PEAK NEGATIVE PEAK

TRACE C

A third trace memory is available for the storage and display of trace information. Only the storage modes (view and blank) can be used.

View C: (,,,1 j

BlankC: (,,, k

These are analogous to the TRACE A and B modes discussed in Chapter 5.

Trace C cannot be written into directly from the analyzer except when video averaging is used.

Trace information from B can be transferred to C. To transfer from TRACE B to TRACE C, use

B-,C: B b

Manual Operation 99

(,,,,1 i, I, B, j, m KEY FUNCTIONS

The sweep will be suspended, the trace in memory B will be read and written into trace C from left to right in about

20 msec. Trace C is viewed. Sweeping will then resume from where suspended. The trace information in B is not changed.

To exchange traces B and C

The trace information in B and C is interchanged point for point from left to right in about 20 msec. If trace B is not displayed, it remains undisplayed. If trace C is not displayed, it remains undisplayed.

To store TRACE A into trace C. the trace A data must first be transferred into trace B: press m (I*(rl 1 (which also erases last trace C) or press m (,.,,,1 i (which also saves last trace C in B)

Example

Comparisons of up to three different signal traces can be made simultaneously using traces A, B, and C. In this example, the modulation level of a signal will be changed for each trace. To start, clear the display with (,,,, A and [,,,., B.

The signal with the desired level of modulation will be stored in trace C:

Press m B and allow one sweep.

Press (,,,, 1 which writes the trace from B into C.

Change the modulation level, allow one sweep and store in B with m B.

To view C, press m j.

100 Manual Operation

a

KEY FUNCTIONS

Change the modulation level again and press m A, and store with (,,,. A. The three traces are differentiated by intensity.

.

m A, ‘2, H

VIDEO AVERAGING

Video averaging is a trace display routine that averages trace responses from sweep to sweep without requiring a narrow video bandwidth. (Averaging with the video bandwidth is discussed in Chapter 8, COUPLED FUNCTION m .) Both video averaging and reducing video bandwidth are primarily used to improve the analyzer’s ability to measure low-level signals by smoothing the noise response.

To activate video averaging (and sample detection mode),

G press (z] [??I (DATA keyboard entry)

H

To disable video averaging, press (,, @

CAUTION

Video averaging may result in an uncalibrated amplitude display when frequency span

> 1000

Resolution Bandwidth

Readout in the active function display area is “VID AVG 100”. The number represents the maximum number of samples (or sweeps) for complete averaging. The DATA entry can be used to change the maximum sample number in integers from 0 to 1000. A unity sample limit allows direct writing of analyzer response into Trace C (see

Trace C below). A 100 sample limit is selected upon instrument preset. The higher the sample limit, the more smoothing possible. Averaging with high sample limits can provide more smoothing than the 1 Hz video bandwidth.

During video averaging, the current sample being taken is read out at the left of the display.

Manual Operation 101

@G

I”;;! KEY FUNCTIONS

The advantage of video averaging over narrowing the video filter is the ability of the user to see changes made to the amplitude or frequency scaling of the display while smoothing the noise response. For example, when a 100

Hz video bandwidth is used with a 200 kHz frequency span, the sweeptime is 2 sec. Almost a full sweeptime duration would have to pass before any center frequency change effect on the trace could be seen. If video averaging is used instead of the narrow video bandwidth, any change to center frequency will be seen immediately, even though full averaging will take roughly 6 sec. (Any change to control settings such as CENTER

FREQUENCY FREQUENCY SPAN, etc., will cause the video averaging process to be restarted.)

Example

To display very low-level signal responses, very narrow resolution and video bandwidths are required. The accompanying increase in sweep time can make measurements cumbersome. Video averaging allows the display of lowlevel signals without the long sweep time.

“P RD= -13.1 de*

10 dW

.TTEN 18 dB

Viewing a low-level signal with a video bandwidth of 1

Hz requires a 150-second sweep.

Disable the narrow video filter by pressing the (wr(ll key that is above the m key.

Start video averaging by pressing (,.,,, h

Now the low-level signals begin to show quickly.

Changes to the frequency range or amplitude scale will restart the sampling to show the signals quickly, without having to wait 150 seconds. In fact, the video averaging shown took 42 x 300 msec = 12.6 sec.

Video Averaging Algorithm

The averaging of each amplitude point depends upon the number of samples already taken and last average amplitude.

n-l _

Y”=y

1

’ Y(n-l) +TYn

102 Manual Operation

bt KEY FUNCTIONS where Fn latest average amplitude value in display units n current sample number

Tn _ 1 last average amplitude in trace memory (TRACE A or B) yn new amplitude entry from analyzer (Trace C) tY.L k, G, x, y, (, )

The new amplitude value, yn, is weighted more heavily by the last average amplitudeij, _ 1 than the new amplitude entry, yn.

When n equals the limit set (e.g. 100, the preset limit), the last average amplitude is gradually replaced with new data. Thus, the average will follow a slowly changing signal response, particularly if the sample limit is small.

Trace C

Video averaging requires the use of trace memory C. When video averaging is activated, the input signal response is written into trace C, the averaging algorithm is applied to these amplitudes and the results written into TRACE A.

Thus, two traces are displayed: the input signal in C and the averaged signal in A.

Trace C may be blanked without affecting the operation of video averaging.

Press (,,rl) k

Trace C may be written into as traces A and B if a video average sample limit of one is selected.

If either trace A or B is in a write trace mode, the analyzer response will also be written into trace C.

EXTERNAL AND VIDEO TRIGGER

The front panel (.,l and m trigger modes automatically keep the display refreshed in zero frequency spans for sweeptimes less than 20 msec. To eliminate the automatic refresh feature:

X

For external triggering: Press B 1111

For video triggering: Press (,,,, b

LOCKING SAVE REGISTERS

After saving instrument states in one or more of the six registers, 1 through 6, the registers can be secured from being written over and destroyed. The recall function is not affected.

L o c k : m (m

Unlocked: m &j

When locked, an attempt to [,,, will write “SAVE LOCK” on the CRT and no DATA entry can be made.

Manual Operation 103

l2Ylw,x,yw

ERROR CORRECTION ROUTINE

i

KEY

FUNCTIONS

A built-in analyzer routine measures and records the amplitude and frequency error factors due to a number of parameters, then corrects the display for them. The routine takes about 30 seconds to run. When complete, instrument preset will be called and the correction factors applied.

Connect CAL OUT to RF INPUT

Execute the routine: @J W

Use correction factors: (,., X

Do not use correction factors: (,,,, Y

Display correction factors: B w

If “ADJUST AMP’TD CAL” appears on the CRT manual calibration adjustment is necessary before the routine can be successfully run. See GENERAL INFORMATION for the manual calibration procedure.

Indicates that the routine has been run and the display is corrected.

t i

I

1 i i

I

1 i i

I

I i 1

Correction can be turned on or off using m X and (,.,,, Y after the routine has been successfully completed.

See DISPLAY CORRECTION DATA in this chapter.

For more information on accuracy, see the 8566B Spectrum Analyzer Data Sheet.

104 Manual Operation

1

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

6

7

8

9

10

2

3

4

5

18

26

27

28

29

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

30

31 m KEY FUNCTIONS

The readout of the correction factors is as follows:

Line Parameter

LOG and LIN scale

(Res BW L 100 kHz)

10 dB/

5 dB/

2 dB/

1 dB/

LOG SCALE

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

RESOLUTION

BANDWIDTH

LOG and LIN scale

(RES BW <lOO kHz)

A20

A10

SG 20-2

SG 20-l

SG 10

LG 20

LG 10

STEP GAINS

20 dB

30 dB

40 dB

50 dB

INPUT

ATTENUATOR

60 dB

70 dB

Correction Values Displayed

Amplitude offset error between log and linear scale. Reference at 1 dB log.

Amplitude errors due to changing log scale.

Reference to - 10 dBm CAL OUTPUT signal.

Amplitude errors due to switching bandwidths. Reference to 1 MHz resolution bandwidth.

Frequency offset errors due to center frequency tuning inaccuracies of resolution bandwidth.

Same as line 1.

Amplitude error due to switching attenuator. Reference to 10 dB Attenuator position.

ERROR CORRECTION ROUTINE

Amplitude error due to changing IF step gain. Reference to - 10 dBm REFER-

ENCE LEVEL.

The total amplitude correction value composed of linear/log scale offsets, bandwidth errors, and attenuator errors can be output to a computer/controller with KS91. This error can then be corrected with software to yield a more accurate amplitude measurement.

Correction values are stored in memory for a 30-day period in the event of power-line failure.

Manual Operation 105

i2d T, U,

S,R,t,

Q, U, u

FAST PRESET/HP-IB

i KEY FUNCTIONS

A partial instrument preset can be initiated with [,,,, T or B U. These key functions operate essentially the same as the @ instrument preset in that a specific full span is set, functions automatically coupled, and shift functions turned off. The difference is that the fast presets do not exercise the instrument’s internal self-test routine, which controls the two check LEDs and, as a result, can be executed much faster.

Fast preset 2 - 22 GHz: press @ T

Fast preset external mixer: press (1*(rrl U

Under remote operation, an HP-IB operation mode can be set which allows the analyzer to operate faster than normal. The Fast HP-IB mode is enabled with a [,.,rl S. A m instrument preset will disable the Fast HP-IB mode, whereas the Fast presets will not disable the Fast HP-IB mode.

Fast HP-IB: press [,.,,, S

BAND LOCK

If desired, the analyzer can be locked on a selected frequency band (local oscillator harmonic number). In normal operation, pressing the CENTER FREQUENCY key enables the analyzer to be tuned with one of the tuning controls from 0 to 22 GHz ( - 1 to 24 GHz over-range). Executing a band lock limits the analyzer’s tuning range to the selected harmonic number.

To execute band lock, B R (Diagnostics On) and the tuning controls can be used to display the harmonic numbers. [,,,, t locks the frequency range to the desired harmonic number.

Band lock: (-II t

Band unlock: [,.,,, Q or FULL SPAN key

EXTERNAL MIXER

Two shift functions are available to specific usage with an external mixer. Shift U selects an LO tuning range for external mixer operation. Shift v enables a signal identifier routine which uses the marker to automatically identify the signal under observation.

Fast preset external mixer: B U

Signal identifier external mixer: [,.,,11 v

106 Manual Operation

(,,.r KEY FUNCTIONS T”r;i F U N C T I O N I N D E X

All the shift functions are listed below. (DATA) indicates the functions that use a number and unit entry.

GENERAL

CODE PAGE

Display Address (DATA)

Display Write (DATA)

HP-IB service request

HP-IB address (DATA)

Fast HP-IB operation

Power on in last state

Mixer input level

FREQUENCY AND AMPLITUDE ’ f

;

S f

Amplitude offset

Amplitude units selection dBm dBmV dB/.# voltage

Removes IF Offset for

YTO pretest

Extended reference level range (DATA)

Frequency offset (DATA)

Signal identifier external mixer

Mixer level

Negative entry (DATA)

MARKER

Marker to next peak

Marker to minimum

Enter A + Span

Noise Level on

Noise Level off

Stop single sweep at marker

Factory preselector setting

Manual preselector setting

DISPLAY

Annotation blanked

>

Z

A

B

C

D

F

I

V

/

V

-

K

N

0

M

L

U

=

0

1 0 6

8 5

9 3

91

9 3

9 3

9 3

9 3

APP. H

94

91

1 0 6

9 3

91

9 5

9 5

5 3

*

*

*

*

Annotation on

CRT beam off

CRT beam on

Graticule blanked

Graticule on

Title

TRACE

Save Registers locked

Save Registers unlocked

Fast preset 2 - 22 GHz

Fast preset external mixer

Band lock

Band unlock

ERROR CORRECTION

5 8

5 8

9 5

9 4

9 4

9 6

Execute Routine

Use data (display corrected)

Do not use data (display not corrected)

Display correction data on CRT

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS

P

: m

;.

A + B - A

Detection Modes: normal positive peak negative peak sample

Trace C blank C

BzC

B - C view C

Video averaging on

Video averaging off k

9 7

9 7

9 7

9 7

9 7

9 9

1 0 0

9 9

9 9

101

101

TRIGGER. ZERO SPAN. SWEEP <20 msec

1111 without 25 msec trigger m without 25 msec trigger

X

Y

1 0 3

1 0 3

INSTRUMENT STATE

T

U

,’

;

W

X

Y

W

9 6

9 6

9 6

9 6

9 6

9 7

1 0 3

1 0 3

1 0 6

1 0 6

1 0 6

1 0 6

1 0 4

1 0 4

1 0 4

1 0 4

To aid in servicing the spectrum analyzer, there are a number of diagnostic shift functions. These functions

Frequency diagnostic on

Disable step gain

Manual DACS control

Display correction data

Turns off YTX self-heating correction are listed here. Their operation and use are covered in the HP 8566B Service Manual.

CODE

R l

See Section II of this manual

:

W

#

Manual Operation 107

USER DEFINED KEYS ENTERING A COMMAND LIST

Chapter 12

USER DEFINED KEYS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the procedure for defining a numeric key(s) to allow the storage and execution of a list of commands. The procedure for remote storage and execution of command lists is contained in Section II of this manual.

ENTERING A COMMAND LIST

The title mode must be activated to enter a command list. When the title mode is activated, the front panel blue characters, numeric keys, decimal, backspace, and space can be entered onto the top line starting at the upper left corner of the display. The full width of the display can be used (58 characters total).

Activate title:

Enter command list:

B E (shift light on)

CFlOOMZSP2MZST50MS (up to 58 characters)

T-----x center frequency = 100 MHz scan time = 50 msec i frequency span = 2 MHz

To end a command list: @ (shift light off)

KEY DEFINITION

After a command list is entered into the title block, it is stored under a defined numeric key(s).

Press:

Select any numeric key(s) (0 - 999) :

Terminate by pressing: m (shift light on)

10 (shift light off)

0

NOTE

The

0 key must be pressed to terminate the key definition procedure. If it is not, the command list will not be stored under the numeric key(s).

Manual Operation 109

USER DEFINED KEYS EXECUTING A SOFT KEY

EXECUTING A SOFT KEY

After a command list is stored under a numeric key(s), it can be executed

Press:

Enter defined numeric key(s) :

Terminate by pressing:

(,,,, (shift light on)

10 (shift light off)

0

NOTE

The

0 key must be pressed to terminate this execution procedure. If it is not, the command list will not be executed.

1 10 Manual Operation

PLOTTER OUTPUT EXECUTING PLOTTER OUTPUT

Chapter 13

PLOTTER OUTPUT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the procedure for executing the PLOTTER OUTPUT function, and provides information for preventing problems that may arise while attempting to execute it.

EXECUTING PLOTTER OUTPUT

Connect an HP plotter via HP-IB to the spectrum analyzer:

Set the HP-IB address on the plotter to address 5:

16 8 4 2 1

4+1=5

ADDRESS

If the address switch on the plotter cannot be located, refer to the plotter’s operation manual.

LOWER

LEFT

Press the lower left recorder key 0 to execute the

PLOTTER OUTPUT function.

a

The function plots everything that is displayed on the CRT If desired, traces A, B, and C, the annotation and the graticule can be individually blanked from the CRT using front-panel functions (refer to Chapters 5 and 11).

Manual Operation 1 1 1

PLOTTER PENS

You can also blank the HP logo from the display. To do this from a computer, execute:

OUTPUT 718; “DA 2174; DW 32;32;”

Or, to execute it from the front panel, press:

PLO-lTER O U T P U T

PLOTTER PENS

Traces A, B, and C, and the annotation and graticule are individually plotted with four different pens, provided there are four pen locations in the plotter. Pens 1, 2, and 4 plot traces A, B, and C, respectively, and pen 3 plots the annotation and graticule. For a two-pen plotter, pens 1 and 2 take the place of pens 3 and 4, respectively.

NOTE

There are certain types of equipment that prevent the PLOTTER OUTPUT function from being executed correctly. They are discussed in the next two sections.

CONTROLLER

The analyzer should not be connected via HP-IB to an active controller while attempting to execute the PLOTTER

OUTPUT function from the front panel. This is because the analyzer will abort any attempts to execute the function from the front panel when an active controller is on the bus.

PLOTTER

The 7245A/B, 7240A, 9872C, and 7550 Graphics Plotters work readily for executing the PLOTTER OUTPUT function. However, the HP 757OA, 7585, 7470A, and 7475A plotters require special operating instructions. The

HP 7570 and 7585 plotters work only in EMULATE MODE. For more information on EMULATE MODE, refer to the plotter’s operating manual. On the HP 7470A plotter, set the US/A4 rocker switch to the US position. For the

HP 7475 plotter, the US/MET and A4/A3 rocker switches must be set to the US and A4 positions.

112 Manual Operation

Section II

Programming

FUNCTIONAL INDEX

PROGRAMMtNG COMMANDS

PROGRAMMiNG NOTES

This section describes remote operation of the spectrum analyzer.

The Functional Index contains all the remote commands arranged by functions.

The Programming Command section describes operation of the commands, which are listed in alphabetical order.

The appendixes at the end of this section contain useful information:

Appendix A describes the contents of the spectrum analyzer display memory.

Appendix B contains programming techniques for custom graphics.

Appendix C lists the learn string contents.

Appendix D describes the service request commands and their use.

Appendix E explains how to increase execution speed of analyzer programs.

Appendix F contains a graph of the analyzer tuning curves.

Appendix G describes how the spanwidth is automatically adjusted when the analyzer is tuned near the edge of its band.

Appendix H explains how to use the first LO output as a tunable microwave source.

Appendix I describes some differences of operation between the HP 8566A and HP 8566B.

Appendix J lists new HP 8566B commands and original HP 8566A commands that function identically.

Programming 1

REMOTE OPERATION OVERVIEW

The standard HP 8566B Spectrum Analyzer with an HP-IB controller allows:

Remote operation of the analyzer front panel functions, including the shift key functions.

Output of any analyzer function value or trace amplitude. See individual commands, including OL. See

Appendix C.

Input of special CRT display labels and graphics. See TRGRPH, LB, GR, TEXT, KSE, and DSPLY commands.

Interrupt of controller for service or data transfer. See Appendix D.

Creation of custom soft key functions. See KEYDEE KEYEXC, FUNCDEF, 16 KSC, and REPEAT commands.

Creation of custom command language using flow-of-control commands. See FUNCDEE IF and REPEAT commands.

Creation of user-defined variables. See VARDEF command.

To set the center frequency to 4.621 GHz and the span to 10 MHz:

OUTPUT 7 18; “IF’; CF 4.621GZ:

- - -. - -

S F 10MZ; ”

. - select

HP-IB rr-22::~:::: activate center frequency set center frequency value optional spaces Inserted for clarity’ activate frequency span set frequency span value

2 P r o g r a m m i n g

Input CRT Labels and Graphics

To write “Center Frequency” in the top center of the graticule area: required delimiter y positlon

The following ASCII characters are a label

Text

Label terminator

Reacttvates center frequency

I

I

,.ENTER 4.621 6 O*I

I

.nE\ m 1.6 LHI

I LA-L1 1 I

WW 16.6 W!

VI* 3” *m SW’ 26.6 -..c

HP-IB Controller

Any HP-IB compatible controller can be used to operate the HP 8566B. The overall system measurement speed and capability depend to a large extent on the computing, storage, and interrupt capabilities of the controller.

The HP Series 200 Desktop Computers, HP Models 16, 26, and 36, are the computing controllers in this manual.

4 P r o g r a m m i n g

Addressing the Spectrum Analyzer

Communications between instruments via HP-IB require that a unique address be assigned to each instrument.

The analyzer address, preset at the factory to 18, appears on the CRT display when the LINE power is turned from STANDBY to ON.

L.-------- _________ iL ________ dev’ce_c_od_e ---- ---1

Address Readout

Two formats are available for addressing an HP-IB instrument or device. One command format uses separate addresses for TALK (“R”) and LISTEN (“2”). The other uses only a bus address (“18”) to designate the recipient of the command.

In all examples, the preset address of the HP computing controller is HP-IB SELECT CODE “7”

0 : O U T P U T 7 183

P r o g r a m m i n g 5

The read/write address of the HP 8566B can be changed from the front panel or via HP-IB by using the shift function I?

Pressing [,.,, b. Q a @ sets the address to 18.

To set the address to 8, press (,,,, b (TJ @.

From the controller, the address can be set to 8 via HP-IB:

O U T P U T 7185”ESF’ 8 H Z ; ’ code for (XFJ h address J 7 T t e r m i n a t o r

As long as the analyzer internal battery has power, the analyzer address remains unchanged. (Battery lasts one year.)

In addition to these features, an internal switch can be set which changes the default address at Power Up.

Call your nearest HP service office for more information.

Remote/Local Operation

If the controller has addressed the analyzer to TALK or LISTEN, the ADRS’D indicator lights. When the analyzer is addressed with an HP-IB device command, the analyzer will go to remote, and the REM indicator also lights.

ADRS’D

0

REM

? 0

Remote operation generally prevents front pane1 control of the analyzer except by those functions not programmable: LINE power, calibration and display adjustment, and video trigger level.

Return to front panel, or local control by pressing @ , or executing a local device command from the controller such as

LOCAL 718.

6 P r o g r a m m i n g

CAUTION

An HP-IB transmission may be disrupted if the analyzer LINE power is cycled. An analyzer should be connected to an operating

HP-IB only with POWER ON.

Similar HP-IB disruption may result from pressing @ when the HP-IB is active.

Thus, a local lockout is recommended during HP 8566B automatic operation.

After analyzer power-on, wait 5 seconds before addressing it.

Shift Function Codes

Programming a shift function requires a code sequence similar to the manual procedure for activating a shift function; that is, press (,,,,, , then press the key with the function’s code (the front panel blue character).

For example, to select the video averaging shift function, blue code G, execute

(-)1_jTF:“[JT’ 71.H; “t:.:::jG; ”

HP-16 Data Command = acllvates shift activates wdeo averaglng

About half of the shift key function codes require ASCII lower case letters or symbols. Spaces are not allowed between the shift command, “KS” and the shift function, in this case “G”.

P r o g r a m m i n g 7

Data Entry Via HP-IB

A data entry through the HP-IB must meet the same requirements as a front panel DATA entry. It must have a number (value) and a message that terminates the entry, signaling the analyzer to assign the function value.

The number code within the quote field must be a string of (ASCII) decimal numbers plus an optional decimal point. It may be preceded by a minus or plus sign. If the decimal is not included in the entry, the decimal point is assumed to be at the end of the number. Either fixed or floating point notation may be used to make number entries. For example, the entries “123E6”, “12.3e6” and “12300000” each enters the same number. Exercise caution when using the “E” exponent format, since several marker command mnemonics also begin with E.

The number of significant digits accepted and stored by the analyzer is dependent upon which function is active.

For example, an entry of 11 significant digits for center frequency can be stored in the analyzer’s center frequency register.

If no number is entered, a “1” is assumed.

Terminating the Data Entry

The units code is the most common data entry terminator. It sets the value units and enters the function value.

Frequency

HZ kHz

MHz

GHz

Code

HZ

KZ

MZ

GZ

Power dBm

- dBm dB

UNIT CODES

Code

DM

- D M

D B

Voltage mV

PV

Code

M V

UV

Time set msec pet

Code

SC

MS

US

Other than the units codes, some ASCII codes can be used to terminate a data entry.

Symbol ck

LF

ETX

ASCII Codes Which Terminate a Numeric Data Entry

Name comma carriage return line feed semi-colon end of text

Decimal Equivalent

(ASCII)

44

13

10

5 9

3

8 P r o g r a m m i n g

These non-unit code terminators originate in the controller’s language.

A terminated entry without a units code defaults to the fundamental units for the function activated. The default units of power depend upon the amplitude readout units selected.

Default Units

Frequency

Power

Voltage

Time

HZ dBm, dBmV dBpV or dB volts seconds

Front-Panel Data Entry During Remote Control

Data may also be entered from the front panel when the analyzer is in remote control. This is done by following the analyzer command with the secondary keyword, El? The syntax diagrams show which comands can be followed by EI? EP pauses program operation until data is entered from the front panel and terminated with one of the units keys listed in the Units Code table. Program operation then resumes. EP is especially useful when it is part of a programming routine that is stored in a soft key.

Custom Soft key Functions

The spectrum analyzer has soft keys that can be loaded into up to 16K bytes of memory, with or without a controller. These soft keys remain in nonvolatile memory for the life of the internal battery, which lasts for one year.

The functions of the soft keys are defined with the KEYDEF command. The original contents of a soft key are erased when the key is defined a second time with the KEYDEF command, or when the DISPOSE command is executed.

The soft keys can be executed four ways. To execute a soft key remotely, execute the KEYEXC command, or define the soft key as part of a user-defined function. Then, whenever the function name is encountered, the soft key is executed. (See FUNCDEF command.) Soft keys can also be nested inside another soft key. Thus, executing one key actually can cause the execution of several keys.

To manually execute a soft key from the front panel, press m , the key number, and then press

0

.

P r o g r a m m i n g 9

FUNCTIONAL INDEX

FREQUENCY CONTROL

CF cs

*FA

*FB

FOFFSET

FS

KSQ

KSV

KS1

SP ss

Specifies center frequency

Couples step size

Specifies start frequency

Specifies stop frequency

Specifies frequency offset

Specifies full frequency span as defined by instrument

Unlocks frequency band

Specifies frequency offset

Locks frequency band

Specifies frequency span

Specifies center frequency step size

INSTRUMENT STATE CONTROL

IP

KST

KSU

E$

LF

RC

RCLS

SAVES sv

USTATE

Sets instrument parameters to preset values

Performs fast present 2 - 22 GHz

Performs external mixer preset

Locks save registers

Unlocks save registers

Presets 0 - 2.5 GHz

Recalls previously saved state

Recalls previously saved state

Saves current state of the analyzer in the specified register

Saves current state of analyzer in specified register

Configures or returns configuration of user-defined states:

ONEOS, ONSWP, TRMATH, VARDEF, FUNCDEF

TRDEF

AT

AUNITS

*CA

E4 l

KSA

KSB

KSC

KSD

KSI

KSW

KSX

KSY

KSZ

W

KSw

KS,

LG

LN

MKRL

ML

RL

ROFFSET

AMPLITUDE CONTROL

Specifies input attenuation

Specifies amplitude units for input, output and display

Couples input attenuation

Moves active marker to reference level

Selects dBm as amplitude units

Selects dBmV as amplitude units

Selects dBuV as amplitude units

Selects voltage as amplitude units

Extends reference level range

Performs amplitude error correction routine

Incorporates correction data in amplitude readouts

Does not incorporate correction data in amplitude readouts

Specifies reference level offset

Decouples IF gain and input attenuation

Displays correction data

Sets mixer level

Selects log scale

Selects linear scale

Moves active marker to reference level

Specifies mixer level

Specifies reference level

Specifies reference level offset

BANDWIDTH CONTROL

*CR

‘CV

RB

Couples resolution bandwidth

Couples video bandwidth

Specifies resolution bandwidth

Programming 1 1

\ 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

VB

VBO

Specifies video bandwidth

Specifies coupling ratio of video bandwidth and resolution bandwidth

SWEEP AND TRIGGER CONTROL

‘CONTS

*CT

KS1

KSu

KSx

KSY

ST

SNGLS

*!3

s2

TM

TS

*Tl

T2

T3

T4

Selects continuous sweep mode

Couples sweep time

Continues sweep from marker

Stops sweep at active marker

Sets external trigger (eliminates auto-refresh)

Sets video trigger (eliminates auto-refresh)

Specifies sweep time

Selects single sweep mode

Selects continuous sweep mode

Selects single sweep mode

Selects trigger mode: free run, video, line, external

Takes a sweep

Sets trigger mode to free run

Sets trigger mode to line

Sets trigger mode to external

Sets trigger mode to video

MARKER CONTROL

El

E2

E3

E4

KSK

KSL

KSM

KSN

KS0

KSu

KS{ 92)

MA

Moves active marker to maximum signal detected

Moves marker frequency into center frequency

Moves marker or delta frequency into step size

Moves active marker to reference level

Moves active marker to next highest peak

Turns off average noise level marker

Returns average value at marker, normalized to I Hz bandwidth

Moves active marker to minimum value detected

Moves marker delta frequency into span

Stops sweep at active marker

Enters DL, TH, M2, M3 in display units

Returns marker amplitude

Returns marker frequency

Specifies amplitude of active marker

MF

MKA

MKACT

MKCF

MKCONT

MKD

MKF

MKMIN

MKN

MKNOISE

Specifies active marker: I, 2, 3, or 4

Enters marker frequency into center frequency

Continues sweep from marker

Moves delta marker to specified frequency

Specifies frequency of active marker

Moves active marker to minimum signal detected

Moves active marker to specified frequency or center screen

Returns average value at marker, normalized to I Hz band-

MKOFF

MKP

MKPAUSE

MKPK width

Turns all markers, or the active marker off

Specifies marker position horizontally, in display units

Pauses sweep at marker for duration of specified delay time

(in seconds)

Moves active marker to maximum signal detected, or to adjacent signal peaks

Specifies minimum excursion for peak identification. Preset *MKPX

MKREAD

MKRL

MKSP

MKSS value is 6 dB

Specifies marker readout mode

Moves active marker to reference level

Moves marker delta frequency into span

Moves marker frequency to center frequency step size

MKSTOP

MKTRACE

Stops sweep at active marker

Moves active marker to corresponding position on another specified trace

MKTRACK Turns marker signal track on or off

MKTYPE

*MT0

MT1

*Ml

MM3

M4

Sets marker type

Turns off marker signal track

Turns on marker signal track

Turns off active marker

Turns on active marker and moves it to center screen

Turns on delta marker

Turns on marker zoom

COUPLING CONTROL

‘CA

*CR

* c s

*CT

* c v

*VBO

Couples input attenuation

Couples resolution bandwidth

Couples step size

Couples sweep time

Couples video bandwidth

Specifies coupling ratio of video bandwidth and resolution bandwidth

PRESELECTOR CONTROL

FPKA

KSJ

KS/#

KS/

KS=

PP

Performs fast preselector peak and returns measured value of active marker

Allows manual control of DAC

Turns off YTX self-heating correction

Allows manual peaking of preselector

Selects factory preselector setting

Peaks preselector

EXTERNAL MIXING COMMANDS

CNVLOSS

EXTMXR

FULBAND

HNLOCK

HNUNLK

I DSTAT

KSQ

KSt

KSU

KSv

NSTART

NSTOP

SIGDEL

SIGID

Selects the reference level offset to amplitude calibrate the display for a mixer with a given conversion loss. Default units are dB.

Performs an external mixing preset. Start frequency 18

GHz; Stop frequency 26.5 GHz.

Sets the start and stop frequencies for full waveguide bands.

Locks to the specified harmonic number to prevent multiharmonic sweeps and to prevent tuning past the 2 to 6.2

GHz L.O. tuning range.

Turns off the harmonic lock (see HNLOCK) allowing tuning over the entire analyzer input range.

Returns the completion status of the signal identifier.

Query response : 1 signal found

0 no signal found

-1 signal found but cannot be reached on locked harmonic

Turns off the harmonic lock (see HNLOCK) allowing tuning over the entire analyzer input range.

Locks to the specified harmonic number to prevent multi-harmonic sweeps and to prevent tuning past the

2 GHz to 6.2 GHz L.O. tuning range.

Performs an external mixer preset. Start frequency 18

GHz; Stop frequency 26.5 GHz.

Identifies signals for the external mixing frequency bands.

Specifies the start harmonic for signal identification.

Specifies the stop harmonic for signal identification.

Specifies the maximum amplitude difference allowed between a signal and its image for the pair to be recognized by the signal identification routine.

Default units are dB.

Identifies signals for external mixing frequency bands.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 3

1 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

DISPLAY CONTROL

*ANNOT

AUNITS

DL

DLE

*GRAT

W

*KSh

KSm

*KSn

KSo

* KSp

*LG

*$

TH

THE

*TQ

TRGRPH

Turns annotation on or off. Preset condition is on.

Specifies amplitude units for input, output, and display

Specifies display line level in dBm

Turns display line on and off

Turns graticule on or off. Preset condition is on.

Turns off CRT beam

Turns on CRT beam

Turns off graticule

Turns on graticule

Turns off annotation

Turns on annotation

Selects log scale

Selects linear scale

Turns off display line

Specifies display threshold value

Turns threshold on or off

Turns off threshold

Dimensions and graphs a trace

*DA

DD

DR

DSPLY

DT

DW

*Dl

D2

D3

*EM

GR

*HD

IB

KSE

KS{ 39)

KS{ 125)

KS{ 127)

READING AND WRITING

DISPLAY MEMORY

Z

PA

*PD

PR

PS

PU

SW

TEXT

Specifies display address

Writes to display (binary) and advances address by 1

Reads display and advances address by 1

Displays the value of a variable on the analyzer screen

Defines a character for label termination

Writes to display and advances address by 1

Sets display to normal size

Sets display to full CRT size

Sets display to expanded size

Erases trace C memory

Graphs specified y values on CRT

Holds or disables data entry and blanks active function CRT readout

Inputs trace B in binary units

Sets title mode

Writes to display memory in fast binary

Writes to display memory in binary

Prepares analyzer to accept binary display write commands

Writes specified characters on CRT

Returns lower left and upper right vertices of display window

Draws vectors to specified x and y positions

Turns on beam to view vector

Draws vector from last absolute position

Skips to next display page

Turns off beam, blanking vector

Skips to next control instruction

Writes text string to screen at current pen location

TRACE PROCESSING

*Al

A2

A3

A4

Bl

82

83

*B4

BLANK

Clear-writes trace A

Max holds trace A

Stores and views trace A

Stores and blanks trace A

Clear-writes trace B

Max holds trace B

Stores and views trace B

Stores and blanks trace B

Stores and blanks specified trace register

CLRW

KSj

KSk

KS{ 39)

KS{ 123)

KS{ 125)

KS{ 126)

MOV

MXMH

TA

TB

TRDSP

VIEW

Clear-writes specified trace register

Stores and views trace C

Stores and blanks trace C

Writes to display memory in fast binary

Reads display in binary units

Writes to display memory in binary units

Outputs every nth value of trace

Moves source to the destination

Max holds the specified trace register

Outputs trace A

Outputs trace B

Turns specified trace on or off, but continues taking information

Views specified trace register

TRACE MATH

AMB

AMBPL

APB

AXB

BL

BML

BTC

BXC

*cl c2

Ex

KSG

* KSH

KSc

KSi

KSI

TRMATH

VAVG

A - B i n t o A

(A - B) + DL into A

A + B into A

Exchanges A and B

B - DLintoB

B - DL into B

B into C

Exchanges B and C

A - B o f f

A - B i n t o A

Exchanges A and B

Turns on video averaging

Turns off video averaging

A + BintoA

Exchanges B and C

B into C

Executes trace math or user-operator commands at end of sweep

Turns video averaging on or off

OTHER TRACE FUNCTIONS

AUNITS

COMPRESS

CONCAT

DET

FFT l

KSa

KSb

Et

MEAN

ONEOS

ONSWP

PDA

PDF

PEAKS

PWRBW

RMS

SMOOTH

STDEV

SUM

SUMSQR

TRDEF

TRGRPH

Specifies amplitude units for input, output, and display

Compresses trace source to fit trace destination

Concatenates operands and sends new trace to destination

Specifies input detector type

Performs a forward fast fourier transform

Selects normal detection

Selects position peak detection

Selects negative peak detection

Selects sample detection

Returns trace mean

Executes specified command(s) at end of sweep

Executes specified command(s) at start of sweep

Returns probability density of amplitude

Returns probability density of frequency

Returns number of peak signals

Returns bandwidth of specified percent of total power

Returns RMS value of trace in display units

Smooths trace over specified number of points

Returns standard deviation of trace amplitude in display units

Returns sum of trace element amplitudes in display units

Squares trace element amplitudes and returns their sum

Defines user-defined trace

Dimensions and graphs a trace

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 5

16 Programming

TRPRST

TRSTAT

TWNDOW

VARIANCE

Sets trace operations to preset values

Returns current trace operations

Formats trace information for fast fourier analysis (FFT)

Returns amplitude variance of trace

USER-DEFINED COMMANDS

*DISPOSE

FUNCDEF

KEYDEF

KEYEXC

MEM

ONEOS

ONSWP

TRDEF

TRMATH

USTATE

*VARDEF

Frees memory previously allocated by userdefined functions. Instrument preset disposes ONEOS, ONSWP, and

TRMATH functions.

Assigns specified program to function label

Assigns function label or command list to softkey number (See FUNCDEF)

Executes specified softkey

Returns amount of allocatable memory available for user-defined commands

Executes specified command(s) at end of sweep

Executes specified command(s) at start of sweep

Defines userdefined trace name and length

Executes specified trace math or user-operator commands at end of sweep

Configures or returns configuration of user-defined state: ONEOS, ONSWP, TRMATH, VARDEF, FUNC-

DEF, TRDEF

Defines variable name and assigns real value to it. Preset reassigns initial value to variable identifier.

PROGRAM FLOW CONTROL

IF

THEN

ELSE

ENDIF

REPEAT

UNTIL

Compares two specified operands. If condition is true, executes commands until next ELSE or ENDIF statements are countered

No-operation function

Delimits alternate condition of IF command

Delimits end of IF command

Delimits the top of the REPEAT UNTIL looping construct

Compares two specified operands. If condition is true, commands are executed following this command. If condition is false operands are executed following the previous REPEAT command.

MATH FUNCTIONS

ADD

AVG

CONCAT

CTA

CTM

DIV

EXP

LOG

MIN

MOV

MPY

MXM

SQR

SUB

XCH

Operand I + operand 2 into destination

Operand is averaged into destination

Concatenates two operands and sends new trace to destination

Converts operand values from display units to vertical measurement units

Converts operand values from vertical measurement units to display units

Operand I / operand 2 into destination

Operand is divided by specified scaling factor before being raised as a power of IO

LOG of operand is taken and multiplied by specified scaling factor

Minimum between operands is stored in destination

Source is moved to destination

Operand 1 x operand 2 into destination

Maximum between operands is stored in destination

Square root of operand is stored in destination

Operand I - operand 2 into destination

Contents of the two destinations are exchanged

Operations on specific traces (A, B, and C) can be found in the Trace Math section.

INFORMATION AND SERVICE

DIAGNOSTICS COMMANDS

BRD

BWR

ERR

ID

KSF

KSJ

KSQ

KSR

KS1

W

KSr

KS1

KSu

KSw

KS=

KS#

KS/

MBRD

MBWR

MRD

MRDB

MWR

MWRB

REV

RQS

Reads data word at analyzet’s internal input/output bus

Writes data word to analyzer’s internal input/output bus

Returns results of processor test

Returns the HP model number of analyzer used (HP 85668 or HP 8568B)

Shifts YTO by intermediate frequency

Allows manual control of DAC

Unlocks frequency band

Turns frequency diagnostics on

Recovers last instrument state at power on

De-couples IFgain and input attenuation

Sets service request I02

Locks frequency band

Stops sweep at active marker

Displays correction data

Selects factory preselector setting

Turns off YTX self-heating correction

Selects manual preselector peak

Reads specified number of bytes starting at specified address and returns to controller

Writes specified block data field into analyzer’s memory starting at specified address

Reads two-byte word starting at specified analyzer memory address and returns word to controller

Reads 8-bit byte contained in specified address and returns byte to controller

Writes two-byte word to specified analyzer memory address

Writes one-byte message to specified analyzer memory address

Returns analyzer revision number

Returns decimal weighting of status byte bits which are enabled during service request

OUTPUT FORMAT CONTROL

DR

DSPLY

EE

KSJ

KSP

KSS

KS(91)

KS(94)

KS{ 123)

KS{ 126)

I;nln

*MDS

MDU

MF

OA

:i

01

0 2

*03

0 4

TA

Reads display and increments address

Displays value of variable on analyzer screen

Enables front panel number entry

Allows manual control of DAC

Sets HP-IB address

Sets fast HP-IB

Returns amplitude error

Returns code for harmonic number in binary

Reads display in binary units

Returns every nth value of trace

Provides lower left x-y recorder output voltage at rear panel

Returns marker amplitude

Specifies measurement data size to byte or word. Preset condition is word.

Returns values of CRT baseline and reference level

Returns marker frequency

Returns active function

Returns learn string

Returns display annotation

Selects output format as integers (ASCII) representing display units or display memory instruction words

Selects output format as two 8-bit bytes

Selects output format as real numbers (ASCII) in Hz, volts, dBm, or seconds

Selects output format as one 8-bit byte

Outputs trace A

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 7

18 Programming

TB

*TDF

U R

Outputs trace B

Selects trace data output format as 01,02,03,04, A-block data field, or l-block data field. Preset format is 03.

Provides upper right x-y recorder output voltage at rear panel

SYNCHRONIZATION

DONE Sends message to controller after preceding commands are executed

Takes a sweep TS

SERVICE REQUEST

KSr

KS(43)

ROS

Rl

R2

*R3

R4

SRQ

SRQ

102

102

104

110

I20

140 lxx

Allows service request 102

Allows service request 140 and 102

Returns decimal weighting of status byte bits which are enabled during service request

Resets service request I40

Allows service request 140 and 104

Allows service request I40 and I IO

Allows service request 140 and 102

Sets service request is operand bits are allowed by RQS

C O M M A N D

R 4

. KS{431

R2

R1

ROS all

B I T

2

1

4

I

I

5

6

D E F I N I T I O N

U”I,S key pressed frequency hmlt exceeded end of sweep hardware broken command complete input buffer empty sllcgal command universal HP-18 servtce

PLOTTER OUTPUT

LL

PLOT

P l x

Ply

P2x

P2Y

U R

Provides lower left x-y recorder output voltage at rear panel

Plots CRT Scaling points, PI and P2 must be specified and must be compatible with plotter.

Represents first x-axis scaling point to be specified in PLOT command

Represents first y-axis scaling point to be specified in PLOT command

Represents second x-axis scaling point to be specified in

PLOT command

Represents second y-axis scaling point to be specified in

PLOT command

Provides upper right x-y recorder output voltage at rear panel

MEMORY INFORMATION

*EM

KSz

=I

MEM

Erases trace C memory

Sets display storage address

Writes to display storage

Returns amount of allocatable memory available for userdefined commands, in bytes

OPERATOR ENTRY

EE

EK

EP

*HD

KS

Enables front panel data number entry

Enables DATA knob

Enables manual entry into specified command

Holds or disables data entry and blanks active function CRT readout

Shifts front panel keys

PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

All the commands in this section are immediately executed.

Command syntax is represented pictorially. All characters enclosed by a rounded envelope must be entered exactly as shown.

Words enclosed by a rectangular box are names of items also used in the command statement. These items are described in the table below, and are also described in the tables below the syntax diagrams for each command.

Statement elements are connected by lines. Each line can be followed in only one direction, as indicated by the arrow at the end of the line. Any combination of statement elements that can be generated by following the lines in the proper direction is syntactically correct. An element is optional if there is a path around it. Optional items usually have default values. The table or text following the diagram specifies the default value that is used when an optional item is not included in a statement.

In the diagrams, narrow ovals surround command names. Circles and wide ovals surround secondary keywords, or special numbers and characters.

A-Block Data Field

Average Count

Average Length

Carriage Return

Character

Command List

Data Bytes

Display Address

END

ETX

Command Statement Elements Enclosed in Rectangular Boxes

Absolute block data field consisting of

#,

A,

Length, and

Command List.

Integer representing counter value.

Default value is current counter value.

Integer representing maximum number of sweeps executed for computing average.

Asserts carriage return. (ASCII code 13.)

Represents text displayed on screen. (ASCII codes 32 through 126.)

Alphanumeric character comprising any spectrum analyzer command. (ASCII characters 0 through 255.)

&bit bytes representing command list.

Integer signifying 1 of 1008 elements (display units) of trace A, B, or C.

Trace A comprises addresses PI through 1023.

Trace B comprises addresses 1024 through 2047.

Trace C comprises addresses 3072 through 4095.

Ends program.

Marks end of text. (ASCII code 3.)

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 9

Function Label

I-Block Data Field

Key Number

Length

Line Feed

Local

Marker Number

Measurement-Variable

Identifier

Number of Points

PlX and PlY

P2X and P2Y

Real

String Delimiter

Terminator

Trace Element

Trace Label

Trace Length

User-Defined

Identifier

User-defined label declared in FUNCDEF statement.

Alpha character of 2 to 12 characters: AA through ZZ and “-” (ASCII character

95). Recommend “-”

Indefinite block data field consisting of

#,

I

Command List, and END.

Integer (0 to 999) representing number of user-defined key declared in KEYDEF statement.

Two 8bit bytes specifying length of command list in

A-Block Data Field, in 8-bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB.

Asserts line feed. (ASCII code 10.)

Returns spectrum analyzer to local control. Controller dependent.

Integer (1,2, 3, or 4) specifying 1 of 4 markers.

Alpha characters representing instrument identifiers, such as CF or MA.

Integer representing number of points for running average in SMOOTH command.

Integer representing plotter-dependent values that specify lower-left plotter dimension.

Integer representing plotter-dependent values that specify upper-right plotter dimension.

The range of real numbers is - 1.797 693 134 862 315 E + 308 through

-2.225 073 858 507 202 E-308, 0, and +2.225 073 858 507 202 E-308 through + 1.797 693 134 862 315E + 308.

!“$%&‘/: = @ \ respectively).

- (ASCII characters 33, 39, 47, 58, 64, 92, and 126,

Character defined with DT command that marks end of text. (ASCII codes e, - 255).

Any element (point) of trace A, B, or C, or a user-defined trace.

User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Alpha character of 2 to 12 characters: AA through ZZ and “-” (ASCII character

95). Recommend “-” as second character.

Integer determining number of elements (display units or points) in user-defined trace array, declared in TRDEF statement.

Range is 1 to 1008. Default is 1001.

User-defined label declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character of 2 to 12 characters: AA through ZZ and “-” (ASCII character

95). Recommend “-” as second character.

2 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

Variable Identifier

X Position

Y Position

User-Defined Identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character of 2 to 12 characters: AA through ZZ and “-” (ASCII character

95). Recommend “-” as second character.

or

Measurement-Variable Identifier

Alpha characters representing instrument identifiers:

AT, FB, KS/, MA, RL, VB, CF KSv, MF, SP DA, KSZ, OA, ST DL, RB, TH,

FA, KSP LG

Trace Element

Integer value, in display units, that shifts trace position to right of specified

Display Address.

(See TRGRPH .)

Integer value, in display units, that shifts trace position above specified

Display

Address. (See

TRGRPH.)

Alphanumeric character comprising any spectrum analyzer command.

Programming

2 1

NEG

NH

NL

NR

NRM

OA

OFF

MS

MV

MZ

NE

Kz

LE

LINE

LT

GZ

HI

HZ

IST

EP

EQ

EXT

FFT

FIXED

FREE

FRQ

GE

GT

ALL

AMP

AVG

B

DB

DBM

DBMV

DBUV

DELTA

DM

DN

2 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

Secondary Keywords Enclosed in Circles all amplitude average detection

8-bit byte decibel (unit) absolute decibel milliwatt (unit) decibel millivolt decibel microvolt delta absolute decibel milliwatt (unit) decreases the parameter one step size pauses program operation for data entry from front panel equal external fast fourier transform (MKREAD command only) fixed free run frequency greater than or equal greater than gigahertz (unit) highest hertz inverse sweep time kilohertz (unit) less than or equal line, as in power line less than millisecond (unit) millivolts (unit) megahertz (unit) not equal to negative peak detection next highest next left next right normal Rosenfell detection output active. Returns the value of the associated parameter.

turn function off

TRC

UP u v u s

V

VID

W

?

ON

PER

PK-PIT

PK-AVG

POS

PSN

SC

SMP

SWT

TRA

TRB turn function on period peak-to-peak average detection peak minus average detection positive peak detection position seconds (unit) sample detection sweep time trace A trace B trace C increases the parameter one step size microvolts (unit) microseconds (unit) volts (unit) video

2-byte word returns a query response containing the value or state of the associated parameter

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 3

A D D

Add r DESTINATION 7 r OPERAND 1 7 r OPERAND 2 7

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

or

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier, such as

CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA

Real

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2-12 characters required.

AA-ZZ and _

2-12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The ADD command adds the operands, point by point, and sends the sum to the destination.

operand 1 + operand 2 + destination

The operands and destination may be different lengths. The trace operands (TRA, TRB, TRC, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length. A variable identifier or numeric data field is 1 element long. When operands differ in length, the last element of the shorter operand is repeated for the addition process. When the operands are longer than the destination, they are truncated to fit.

2 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

ADD

The following program demonstrates the ADD command.

10 0UTPUT718;“SNGLS;"

20 OTJTPUT7l8;“VARDEFCOUNT,0:VARDEFSCORE,0;"

30 OUTPUT 718;“FUNCDEF C-LOP,"""

40 OUTPUT718;“REPEATTS;"

50 OUTPUT7l8;“ADDCOUNT,COUNT,1;"

60 OUTPUT 718;"UNTIL COUNT,EQ,3;"""

70 OUTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

80 OUTPUT718;“C,LOp;"

90 OUTPTJT718;“ADDSCORE,SCORE,1;"

100 OUTPUT718;“UNTILSCORE,EQ,4;"

The operands and results of trace math are truncated if they are not within certain limits. If operating on traces A,

B, or C, results must be within 1023. If operating on user-defined traces, results must be within 32,767.

Programming

2 5

A-B-‘A

(W

The AMB command subtracts trace B from trace A, point by point, and sends the difference to trace A

A - B - > A

The functions of the command AMB, the command C2, and front panel 11 key are identical.

See Cl and C2. Also refer to Chapter 5 in Section I.

OUTPUT 718;“AMB;”

2 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

AMBPL

A-B + display line -+A

The AMBPL command subtracts trace B from trace A, point by point, adds the display line value to the difference, and sends the result to trace A, as demonstrated in the program below.

A - B + display line + A

10 OUTPUT 718;“IP;SNGLS;TS;A3;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“RL -5ODM;TS;B3;”

30 OUTPUT 718;“DL -70;”

40 OUTPUT 718; “AMBPL;”

50 LOCAL 718

6 0

E N D

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 7

ANNOT

Annotation

ANNOT

The ANNOT command turns the annotation on or off.

OUTPUT 718;“ANNOT ON;”

When queried (?), ANNOT returns the annotation state: on or off. The state is followed by carriage-return/linefeed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identity state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

(See KSo and KSp.)

2 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

APB

A+B-+A

WC)

The APB command adds trace A and trace B, point by point, and sends the result to trace A. Thus, APB can restore the original trace after an A-minus-B function (AMB) is executed.

A+B+A

To successfully add all trace elements, place trace A in VIEW or BLANK display mode before executing APB. The sample program below has both traces in STORE mode.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

8 0

7 0

8 0

OUTPUT @Sa;“IP;LF;”

OUTPUT @Sa;“CFlOOMZ;SP2MZ;”

OUTPUT @Sa; “A3;”

OUTPUT @Sa;“Bl;CFlOOMZ;”

OUTPUT @Sa;“B3;”

OUTPUT @Sa;“APB;”

E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Presets the instrument.

Sets trace A to 100 MHz center frequency with 2 MHz frequency span.

Views trace A.

Selects trace B and sets center frequency to 200 MHz.

Views trace B .

Combines the amplitude of trace B with trace A and displays this combination as trace A.

The functions of the APB and KSc commands are identical.

Programming

2 9

AT

Attenuation

AT real

The AT command specifies the RF input attenuation from B to 70 dB, in 10 dB steps.

The input attenuator is coupled to the reference level. This coupling keeps the mixer input level at or below a threshold, when a continuous wave signal is displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen with its peak at the reference level. Instrument preset (IP) sets the threshold value to - 10 dBm. (See KS, and ML.)

The AT command allows less than the threshold value at the mixer input. Executing CA (couple attenuator) resets the attenuation value so that a continuous wave signal displayed at the reference level yields - 10 dBm (or the specified threshold value) at the mixer input.

When the attenuation is changed with the AT command, the reference level does not change. Likewise, when the reference level is changed with the RL command, the input attenuation changes to maintain a constant signal level on screen.

The following program lines illustrate proper syntax:

10 OUTPUT718;“AT60;"

20 OUTPUT718;“ATUP;"

Line 10:

Line 20:

Sets attenuation to 60 dB.

Sets attenuation to 70 dB.

When queried (OA or ?), AT returns the attenuation value as a real number, followed by a carriage-return/linefeed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Refer to Chapter 8 in Section I.

3 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

AUNITS

Amplitude Units

AUNIT

The AUNITS command sets the amplitude readouts (reference level, marker, display line, and threshold) to the specified units. (See KSA, KSB, KSC, and KSD.)

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 1

AVG

Average

AVG r DESTINATION 7 ,-- OPERAND 7 i d e n t i f i e r v a r i a b l e -) i d e n t i f i e r n u m e r i c -c data field

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

AVERAGE COUNT

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier, such as

CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA

Real

Selects counter value. Default is current counter value.

Range Restriction

AA-Z2 and _

2-12 characters required.

AA-Z2 and _

2-12 characters required.

The AVG command averages the operand and the destination according to the following algorithm.

Average = (average count - 1) . (destination/average count)

+ (l/ (average count) + OPERAND)

3 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

The average counter may be set to 1 with the CLAVG command.

10 0UTPUT718;“SNGLS;A1;TS;RL;-50;B1;TS;"

20 ForI=lTOlOO

30 OUTFWT718;“AVGTRB,TRA,1ElO"

4 0 NEx!rI

5 0 E N D

(Continued)

AVG

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 3

AXB

Exchange A and B

(W

The AXB command exchanges trace A and B, point by point.

The functions of the AXB and EX commands are identical. (Refer to Chapter 5 in Section I.)

OUTPUT 718;“AXB;"

Only trace information in display addresses 1 through 1001 and 1025 through 2025 is exchanged.

3 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

A l

Clear-Write A

The Al command enables the clear-write mode, which continously displays any signals present at the spectrum analyzer input.

OUTPUT 718;"Al;"

The Al command initially clears trace A, setting all trace A elements to a zero amplitude level. The sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and trace A is continuously updated as the sweep progresses.

V I D E O _

DETECTOA

ANALOQ

TO

DISPLAY

MEMORY

DIQITAL e A D D R E S S E S - ”

CONVERTER ;;;;E/ l - 1 0 0 1 REFRESH D’SPLAY

In addition, subsequent sweeps send new amplitude information to display memory addresses 1 through 1001.

Al also writes instruction word 1040* into address 8. Therefore, any information stored in memory address B is always lost whenever Al is executed.

If you have used address fJ for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save the contents of address P, before eaxecuting Al. For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the Al command and front panel

@ key are identical. (See CLRW and Bl.)

’ 1040 is a machine instruction word that causes the analyzer to set address 1 through 1023 to zero, and draw trace A.

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 5

A3

View A

The A3 command displays trace A and stops the sweep. Thus, trace A is not updated.

When A3 is executed, the contents of trace are stored in display memory addresses 1 through 1001. A3 writes instruction word 1040’ into address PI. Therefore, any information stored in memory address 0 is always lost whenever A3 is executed.

If you have used address PI for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing

A3.

d

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the A3 command and front panel [ key are identical. (See B3, VIEW, and TBSTAT)

OUTPUT;“A3;" l

1040 is a machine instruction word that causes the analyzer to set addresses 1 through 1023 to zero, and draws trace A.

Programming 37

A4

Blank A

The A4 command blanks trace A and stops the sweep; the trace is not updated.

When A4 is executed, the contents of trace A are stored in display memory addresses 1 through 1001. A4 writes instruction word 1072’ into address 0. Therefore, any information stored in address PI is lost when A4 is executed.

If you have used address f3 for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing

A4.

e

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the A4 command and front panel @ key are identical. (See BLANK, B4, and TRSTAT)

OUTPUT 718;“A4;" l

1072 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 1 through 1023 to zero, and then skips to the next page of memory.

3 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

BL

B-Display Line +B

@ML)

The BL command subtracts the display line from trace B and sends the difference to trace B.

B - display line ---t B

The functions of the BL and BML commands, and the front panel m key are identical. (Refer to Chapter 7 in

Section I.)

The following program demonstrates the BL command.

10 0UTPUT718;“P;A4;S2;"

20 OIJ'I??UT718;“DL-85DM;"

30 OUTPUT718;“Bl;TS;BL;"

4 0

E N D

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 9

BLANK

Blank

BLANK

The BLANK command blanks trace A, B, or C and stops the sweep; the trace is not updated.

Trace A and C are discussed below. For detailed information about trace B, see B4 in this section.

l

.

V I D E O _

DETECTOR

ANALOG

TO

DIBITAI. -o-

C O N V E R T E H WHITE/

STORE

DISPLAY

MEMORY

ADDRESSES l - 1 0 0 1

OR

1 0 2 5 - 2 0 2 5

30724073

TO

- w - c l - CRT

DISPLAY

HEFEkOESH

When BLANK TRA is executed, the contents of trace A are stored in display memory addresses 1 through 1023.

Address 0 is reserved for the instruction word 1072’. Similarly, when BLANK TRB is executed, trace C contents are stored in addresses 3073 through 4095. Again, address 3072 is reserved for instruction word 1072’. Therefore, any information stored in address P, is lost when BLANK TRA is executed. Likewise, the contents of address

3072 are lost when BLANK TRC is executed.

If you have used address !il or 3072 for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save their contents before executing BLANK.

OUTPUT 718; “BLANK TRA;”

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. (See A4, B4, KSk, and TRSTAT) l

1072 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 1 through 1023 (BLANK TRA) or 3073 through 4095 (BLANK TRC) to zero, and then skips to the next page memory.

40 Programming

BML

B-display line *B

The BML command subtracts the display line from trace B, point by point, and sends the difference to trace B.

BML - display + B

The functions of the BML and BL commands, and the front panel m key are identical. (Refer to Chapter 5 in

Section I.)

The following program demonstrates the BML command.

10 0UTF'UT718;“IP;A4$2;"

20 OUTF'UT718;“DL-85DM;"

30 OU'I!PTJT718;“B1;TS;BML;"

4 0 E N D

P r o g r a m m i n g 4 1

BRD

Bus Read

ANALYZER

INTERNAL

I / O B U S

/-ADDRESS T

BAD

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer internal

I/O bus address.

Range Restriction

The BRD command reads a two-byte word at the internal input/output bus of the spectrum analyzer, at the indicated address. BRD is a service diagnostic function only.

4 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

B-I-C

Transfer B to C

Wl)

The BTC command transfers trace B to trace C.

Note that trace C is not a swept, active function. Therefore, transfer trace information to trace C as follows:

1.

Select single sweep mode (S2).

2.

Select desired analyzer settings.

3.

Take one complete sweep (TS) .

4. Transfer data

This procedure ensures that the current settings of the analyzer are reflected in the transferred data.

10 OUTPUT 718;“IP;TS;SNGLS;AB;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“Bl;CF BOMZ;TS;B4;”

30 OUTPUT 718;“BTC;KSj”

31 LOCAL 718

40 E N D

When transferring trace data from one trace to another, only the trace information from 1001 display memory addresses is transferred out of the total 1024 available display memory addresses. Information in address 1024 and addresses 2026 through 2047 is not transferred. (Addresses 2026 through 2047 are usually used for custom graphics.)

The functions of the BTC and KS1 commands are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 4 3

BWR

Bus Write Word

ANALYZER

INTERNAL

I/O BUS

/-ADDRESS 7 /-MESSAGE 3\

BWR

Item

INTEGER

INTEGER

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer internal

I/O bus address.

ASCII decimal number representing two-byte word.

Range Restriction

The BWR command writes a two-byte word to the spectrum analyzer internal input/output bus, at the indicated address. BWR is a service diagnostic command.

4 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

BXC

Exchange B and C

(KSi)

The BXC command exchanges traces C and B, point by point.

Note that trace C is not a swept, active function. Therefore, exchange traces C and B as follows:

1.

Select single sweep mode (SNGLS) .

2.

Select desired analyzer settings.

3.

Take one complete sweep (TS) .

4. Exchange data.

This procedure ensures that the current settings of the analyzer are reflected in the transferred data.

When transferring data from one trace to another, only amplitude information is exchanged, located in display memory addresses 1025 through 2025 and 2049 through 3049.

The functions of the BXC and KSi commands are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 4 5

Bl

Clear-Write Bl

The Bl command enables the clear-write mode, which continuously displays any signals present at the spectrum analyzer input.

O U T P U T 718;“Bl;”

The Bl command initially clears trace B, setting all trace B elements to a zero amplitude level. The sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and trace B is continuously updated as the sweep progresses.

V I D E O _

DETECTOR t

ANALOG

TO

DISPLAY

MEMORY

D I G I T A L B A D D R E S S E S e CT&

C O N V E R T E R ;;A;:/ 1 0 2 5 - 2 0 2 5 REFRESH D’SPLAY

In addition, subsequent sweeps send new amplitude information to display memory addresses 1025 through

2025. Bl writes the instruction word 1048’ to address 1024. Therefore, any information stored in memory address 1024 is always lost when Bl is executed.

If you have used address 1024 for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing

Bl.

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the Bl command and front panel @ key are identical. (See CLRW and Al .) l

1048 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 1025 through 2047 to zero, and draws trace B dimly.

4 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

B3

View B

(--=--pQ

The B3 command displays trace B and stops the sweep. Thus, the trace is not updated.

OUTF’UT 718;“B3;”

When B3 is executed, the contents of trace B are stored in display memory addresses 1025 through 2025. B3 writes the instruction word 1048’ to address 1024. Therefore, any information stored in address 1024 is lost when

B3 is executed.

If you have used address 1024 for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing

B3.

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the B3 command and front panel m key are identical. (See VIEW, A3, KSj, and TRSTAT.) l

1048 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 1025 through 2047 to zero, and draws trace B dimly.

4 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

B4

Blank

The B4 command blanks trace B and stops the sweep; the trace is not updated.

When I34 is executed, the contents of trace B are stored in display memory addresses 1025 through 2025. B4 writes the instruction word 1072 *

B4 is executed.

used or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing

B4.

k

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the B4 command and front panel m key are identical. (See BLANK, A4, KSk, and TRSTAT.)

OUTPUT 718; “B4;” l

1072 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 1025 through 2047, and then skips to the next page of memory.

P r o g r a m m i n g 4 9

CA

Couple Attenuation

During normal operation, the spectrum analyzer is coupled to the reference level. This coupling keeps the mixer input level at or below a threshold, when a continuous wave signal is displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen so that its peak is at the reference level.

The CA command sets the threshold to - 10 dBm (or a value specified by KS or ML). The counterpart to the CA command, the AT command, allows levels less than the threshold value at the mixer input.

OUTPUT 718;“CA;" d

The functions of the CA command and the front panel [,,,, key are identical.

5 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

SP T

G Z real

-Di

CF

Center Frequency

The CF command specifies the value of the center frequency, performing the same function as the front panel

(xii-) key. (Refer to Chapter 3 in Section I.)

When queried (OA or ?), CF returns the center frequency value as a real number, followed by carriage-return/linefeed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identity state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

The following program returns a center frequency value of 350 MHz. The program displays the center frequency on the controller screen,

1 OUTPTJT718;“IP;LF;01;"

10 OUTPU'l'718;"CF2OOMZ;"

20 0UTPUT718;“CFUP;"

30 OTJTPTJT718;"CF?;"

40 ENTER718;N

50 PRINTN

60 E N D

P r o g r a m m i n g 5 1

CLRAVG

Clear Average

The CLRAVG command sets the average counter to 1. The average counter is active during execution of the AVG command.

OTJTPU’l’ 718; “CLRAVG;”

5 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

CLRW

Clear/Write

The CLRW command enables the clear-write mode, which continuously displays any signals present at the spectrum analyzer input.

The CLRW command operates on either trace A or trace B. Trace A is discussed below. For detailed information about the clear-write mode and trace B. see Bl in this section.

The CLRW command initially clears trace A, setting all trace A elements to a zero amplitude level. The sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and trace A is continuously updated as the sweep progresses.

V I D E O _

DETECTOR

ANALOG DISPLAY

MEMORY

DlG?TAL - A D D R E S S E S e

T O

CRT

CONVEHTEH ;;;;;/ l - 1 0 0 1 HEFHESH D’SPLAY

10 2 50p2 0 2 5

In addition, subsequent sweeps send new amplitude information to display memory addresses 1 through 1023.

Address p! is reserved for the instruction word, 1040’. Therefore, any information stored in memory address 0 is always lost when CLRW is executed.

If you have used address P, for a graphics program or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing

CLRW

OUTPUT 718; “CLRW TRA;”

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. The functions of the CLRW command and front panel @ are identical. (See Bl and Al.) l instruction word that

CNVLOSS

Conversion Loss integer

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Selects reference level offset to compensate for conversion loss.

Range Restriction

O-60

The CNVLOSS command offsets the reference level. The reference level is calibrated when the analyzer is in external mixing mode by compensating for the conversion loss of an external mixer with the CNVLOSS offset.

If a harmonic of the analyzer LO is not locked before the CNVLOSS command is executed, the message “NOT

HARMONIC LOCKED” is displayed on the CRT and the CNVLOSS command is ignored.

The analyzer stores the value of the offset entered with the CNVLOSS command. One offset value is stored for each of the external mixing bands. The offset value remains as long as the band is locked. The offset value is erased whenever the band is unlocked. (See HNUNLK or KSQ.)

5 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

COMPRESS

, - D E S T I N A T I O N 7 t r a c e

I abe I r SOURCE 7

COMPRESSION

,r ALGORITHM 7

COMPRESS

Compress

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

The COMPRESS command compresses the source trace to fit the destination trace, according to the compression algorithm, and ratio of source and destination trace sizes.

The source trace must be longer than the destination trace. The ratio of source trace length to destination trace length, in display units, equals K.

source trace length / destination trace length = K number of points in interval = K

COMPRESS divides the source trace into intervals, and computes a compressed value for each interval. The compressed values become the amplitude values for all of the points in the destination trace. For example, if the source trace is 1000 points long, and the destination trace is 100 points long, K equals 10. COMPRESS divides the source trace into 100 intervals of 10 points each, and computes a compressed value for each interval. The 10 points are operated on by the compression algorithm, and the compressed value for the first interval becomes the amplitude of the first point in the destination trace. The 99 remaining compressed values determine the amplitude of the last 99 points of the destination trace.

P r o g r a m m i n g 5 5

COMPRESS (Continued)

The compression algorithms determine how the compressed values are computed.

Specifying AVG (average) computes the average value of the points in the interval as the compressed value.

Specifying POS (positive) selects the highest point in the interval as the compressed value.

Specifying NEG (negative) selects the lowest point in the interval as the compressed value.

Specifying NRM (normal) computes the compressed value of the interval using the Rosenfell algorithm, which chooses between negative and positive peak values.

Specifying PK-PIT (peak-pit) computes the greatest peak-to-peak deviation within the interval as the compressed value.

Specifying PK-AVG (peak average) selects the difference of the peak and average value of the interval as the compressed value.

Specifying SMP (sample) selects the last point in the interval as the compressed value.

The program below compresses a full sweep to one-fifth its size. The result is moved to trace A for display.

14 OUTPUT 71a;“DISPOSE ALL;IP;Al;EM;S2;TS;”

21 OUTPUT 71a;“TFLDEF NEWA,200;”

22 OUTPUT 7 la; “FUNCDEF C-P, ! ”

24 OUTPUT 718;“S2;TS;”

26 OUTP UT 71a;“COMPRESS NEWSI,TRA,AVG;”

27 OUTPUT 71a;“MOV TRA,NEW>;”

28 OUTPUT 7la;y

31 oufrmr 7la;“c,p;”

35 E N D

5 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

CONCAT

/ - D E S T I N A T I O N 7 r OPERAND 17 r OPERAND 2 7

CONCAT

Concatenate

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-Zz and _

2- 12 characters required.

The CONCAT command concatenates the operands and sends the new trace array to the destination.

The size of the destination varies from 1 to 1008 elements. Traces A, B, and C each contain 1001 elements. If necessary, use the COMPRESS command to reduce the length of the operands. Otherwise, the concatenated arrays may not fit in the destination, and trace information is lost.

10 OTJ’ITUT 71S;“IP$32;Bl;TS;B3;RL -3ODM;TS;A3;”

20 !

30 OUTPUT 716;“!FRDEF xXx,500;”

40 OUTPUT 71S;“COMPFlJ%SS xxX,TRA,AVG;”

50 !

60 OUTPUT 71S;“EX;”

70 OUTPUT 71S;“TRDEF 222,500;” a0 OUTPUT 718;9zoMpREss ZZZ,TRA,AVG;”

90 !

100 OUTPUT 71B;“B3;”

110 OTJTPUT 718; “CONCAT TRB,XXX,ZZZ;”

120 !

130 E N D

I

P r o g r a m m i n g 5 7

CON-S

Continuous Sweep

61)

The CONTS command sets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the analyzer continues to sweep (sweep times L 20 ms) at a uniform rate from the start frequency to the stop frequency, unless new data entries are made from the front panel or via HP-IB. If the trigger and data entry conditions are met, the sweep is continuous.

The sweep light indicates that a sweep is in progress. The light is out between sweeps, during data entry, and for sweep times 110 ms.

OUTPUT riamoms;**

The functions of the CONTS and Sl commands, and front panel m key are identical.

5 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

CR

Couple Resolution Bandwidth

The CR command couples the resolution bandwidth with the video bandwidth and sweep time. The counterpart to the CR command, the RB command, breaks coupling. Use CR to reestablish coupling after RB has been executed.

A

The functions of the CR command and the front panel key (,,,, are identical

P r o g r a m m i n g 5 9

cs

Couple Step Size

The CS command couples the center frequency step size to the span width, so that step size equals 10 percent of the span width, or one major graticule division. The counterpart to the CS command, the SS command, breaks coupling. Use CS to reestablish coupling after SS has been executed.

E

The functions of the CS command and the front panel (,,,, key are identical.

6 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

CT

Couple Sweep Time

The CT command couples the sweep time with the resolution and video bandwidths. The counterpart to the CT command, the ST command, breaks coupling. Use CT to reestablish coupling after ST has been executed.

OUTPUT 718;“CT;"

C

The functions of the CT command and the front panel m key are identical.

Programming 6 1

CTA

Convert to Absolute Units

CTA

/- DESTINATION -x r OPEHAND 7

Item

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier representing amplitude value, such as MKA.

Real

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC

DATA FIELD

The CTA command converts the operand values from display units to the current absolute amplitude units.

6 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

CTM

,- DESTINATION 7 r OPERAND 7

C-I-M

Convert to Display Units

Item

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier representing amplitude value, such as MKA.

Real NUMERIC

DATA FIELD

The CTM command converts the operand values to vertical display units.

OUTPUT 718;“VAFLDEFXXX,l; CTMXXX,lB; DSPL xXx,13.5;”

Range Restriction

AA-Z2 and _

2- 12 characters required.

P r o g r a m m i n g 6 3

cv

Couple Video Bandwidth

The CV command couples the video bandwidth with the resolution bandwidth and sweep time. The counterpart to the CV command, the VB command, breaks coupling. Use CV to reestablish coupling after VB has been executed.

OUTPUT 718; “Cv;”

B

The functions of the CV command and the front panel (,,,, key are identical.

6 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

C l

A-B off

The Cl command turns off the A-minus-B mode.

OUTF’UT 718;“Cl;”

The functions of the Cl command and the front panel (,,I] key, located above the 0 key, are identical. (Refer to Chapter 5 in Section I. Also see AMB and CZ.)

P r o g r a m m i n g 6 5

c 2

A-B-A

(AMB)

The C2 command subtracts trace B from trace A, point by point, and sends the difference to trace A.

A-B-A

OUTF’UT 718; “C2;”

The A-minus-B mode is turned off with the Cl command. The function of C2 is identical with that of the command AMB, and the front panel (, key. (Refer to Chapter 5 in Section I.)

6 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

DA

Display Address

,-DISPLAY MEMORY 7

ADDRESS

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents analyzer display memory address.

Range Restriction p, - 4095

The DA command selects a specified display memory address to be the initial current (in-use) register. The display address register can then be accessed and advanced one address at a time with the DW, DD, and DR commands.

Refer to Appendix B for additional information on the DA command.

A typical use of the DA command is shown in the sample program below.

10 OUTPUT 718;“01;DA;1024;"

20 FORI=lTOS

30 OUTPUT718;“DA;OA;"

40 ENTER718;A

50 OUTPUT 718;“DR;"

60 ENTER718;W

70 OUTPUT718;A,W

80 NEXT1

90 END

Line 10:

Line 20430:

Line 30:

Line 50:

Addresses the analyzer, formats the output in decimal display units, and selects the fist address to be read.

Reads and prints five successive display program addresses and their contents. The address is automatically advanced one address for each DR execution.

Activates the output of each display address.

Activates the output of each current display address.

Each display address contains twelve bits of information.

J

P r o g r a m m i n g 6 7

DD

Display Write Binary

DD i n t e g e r

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents 16-bit binary byte that is transmitted as two &bit bytes.

Range Restriction

0 4095

The DD command writes two &bit bytes into the current or specified (with DA command) display memory address, and advances the address selection to the next higher address. If the DD command is followed by more than one pair of bytes, DD loads the pairs into consecutive display addresses. The display address is always advanced after a number is loaded into an address. (Each display address contains twelve bits.)

The bytes represent data or a display instruction.

Use the DD command in conjunction with the DR and DA commands to draw on the spectrum analyzer CRT The functions of the DD and DW commands are identical, except that the controller must send instructions or data in binary form instead of decimal form. This difference is illustrated in the program below. The program tells the analyzer, in four different ways, to dim trace A. The number 1048 is an instruction word that means “dim trace.”

10 OUTPUT718;“Al;S2;TS;"

20 OUTPUT718;“DA0;DW1048;"

30 PAUSE

40 OTJTPUT718;“Al;S2;TS;"

50 OTJTPUT718USING“#,K,W";“DA0;DD";1048

60 PAUSE

70 OUTPUT718;"Al;S2;TS;"

80 OUTPUT718USING“#,K,B,B";“DA1;DD",4,24

90 PAUSE

100 0UTPUT718;“A1$32;TS;"

110 A$=CHR$(4)&CHR$(24)

120 OUTPUT718USING “#,K”;“DAPIDD”,A$

130 E N D

Lines 10,4O, 70, 100:

Line 20:

Line 50:

Line 80:

Line 110:

Line 120:

Sweeps trace and displays trace A once.

Transmits instruction word 1048, in decimal form, to display address 0.

Suppresses carriage-return/line-feed (#) , transmits instruction word 1048 as one word

(W for word, or 16 bits).

Suppresses carriage-return/line-feed (#), transmits instruction word 1048 as two &bit bytes (B,B for byte,byte).

Declares A4 equal to CHR$(4) plus CHR$(24).

Transmits instruction word 1048, as A$.

I

6 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

DD

Refer to Appendix B for additional information about instruction words and display programming. The Consolidated Coding table in Appendix B is especially useful.

P r o g r a m m i n g 6 9

DET

Input Detector

The DET command selects the kind of spectrum analyzer input detection: normal, sample, positive peak, or negative peak.

Normal (NRM) enables the Rosenfell detection algorithm that selectively chooses between positive and negative peak values. The IP command (instrument preset) also activates normal detection.

Sample (SMP) displays the instantaneous signal value detected at the analog-to-digital converter output. Video averaging and a noise-level marker, when active, also activate sample detection. (See MKNOISE, VAVG, or KSe.)

Positive peak detection (POS) displays the maximum signal value detected during the conversion period.

Negative peak detection (NEG) displays the minimum signal value detected during the conversion period. The program line below selects the negative peak detection.

OUTPUT718;“DETNEG;"

When queried (?), DET returns the detection type to the controller (NRM, SMP NEG, or POS) followed by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The line feed asserts the end-or-identify state (EOI) .

7 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

DISPOSE

7 OPERAND --\ f u n c t i o n

I abel

DISPOSE

Dispose

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

FUNCTION

IDENTIFIER

KEY NUMBER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined

VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier, such as

Trace element, such as TRA [ 101

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in FUNCDEF statement.

Integer representing number of

KEYDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA -ZZ and _

2-12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2-12 characters required.

2-

and _

0-999

The DISPOSE command clears any operand listed above. DISPOSE ALL clears all operands. The program line below disposes all command lists declared with a TRMATH command.

OUTPUT 7 18; “DISPOSE TRMATH; ”

Programming

71

DISPOSE (Continued)

If the analyzer remains locked up- that is, it does not respond to remote commands but does respond to front panel commands - and interface clear (shift reset) does not free up the analyzer, then execute the following lines:

Send 7; LISTEN CMD 12

Clear 718

This forces DISPOSE ALL.

7 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

D I V r DEST I NAT ION

I r OPERAND 17 /- OPERAND 27

DIV

Divide

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

’ VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in

VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier, such as

CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA [lo]

Real

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2-12 characters required.

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC

DATA FIELD

The DIV command divides operand 1 by operand 2, point by point, and sends the difference to the destination.

operand 1/ operand 2 + destination

The operands and destination may be of different length. The trace operands (TRA, TRB, TRC, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length. A variable identifier or numeric data field is 1 element long. When operands are of different lengths, the last element of the shorter operand is repeated for operations with the remaining elements of the longer element. When the operands are longer than the destination, they are truncated to fit.

Programming 73

DIV (Continued)

The operands and results of trace math are truncated if they are not within certain limits. If operating on traces A,

B, or C, results must be within 1023. If operating on user-defined traces, results must be within 32,767.

7 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

DL

Display Line

DL

Item

VARIABLE

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurementvariable identifier, such as

CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA [ 101

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2-12 characters required.

The DL command defines a display line level and displays it on the CRT. The level is in dBm and can be used in arithmetic functions, such as DIV or MXM.

The functions of the DL command and the front panel reference level a key are identical. The display line also can be turned on or off by the DLE and L(a commands.

The following program lines compare a display line level of - 10 dBm to the largest signal detected. If the display line level is greater than the signal level, the display line is lowered.

10 OUlTUT718;“IP;DL-1ODM;TS;MKPK;MAOA;"

20 ENTER718;N

30 OUTPUT718;“IFDL,GT,NTHENDLDNENDIF;"

40 0uTPuT718;50

50 END

P r o g r a m m i n g 7 5

DL (Continued)

When queried (? or OA), DL returns the display line level as a real number, folowed by carriage-return/line-feed

(ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed. (See DLE.)

7 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

DLE

Display Line Enable

DLE

OFF

1

:

The DLE command enables or disables the display line.

The function of this command is similar to that of the DL and LI2) commands, and the display line mm and ‘m keys on the front panel.

When queried (?), DLE returns the display line state, ON or OFF followed by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The line feed asserts the end-or-identify state (EOI) .

10 OUTPUT718;“IP;DLE ?;"

20 ENTEiR718;AJb

30 PRINT718;Adb

Since IP deactivates the display line, the query in the above program returns “OFF” to the controller.

P r o g r a m m i n g 7 7

DONE

Done command l i s t DONE

Item

COMMAND LIST

Description/Default

Any spectrum analyzer commands from this Remote section

Range Restriction

The DONE command is a synchronizing function. When DONE follows a command list, it sends the controller a 1 after the command list is executed. The TS command may also be a synchronizing function. If TS precedes the command list, list execution begins after the sweep is completed.

7 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

DR

Display Read

The DR command sends the contents of the current display address to the controller. Thus, the controller “reads” the contents of the display memory address. Use the DA command to specify the display memory address when executing DR for the fist time. After DR is executed, the display address is automatically advanced to the next higher address. Thus, the DA command is only needed to specify the first address, because subsequent DR commands read consecutive addresses.

10 OTJTPTJ!t'718;“DA501DR"

20 ENTER718;A

30 OUTPUT718;“DA1525DR;"

40 ENTER718;B

50 OUTPUT718;“DR"

60 ENTER718;C

Line 10:

Line 30: Reads contents of address 1525.

Reads contents of address 1526.

Lines 20,40, and 60: Assigns address contents to variables A, B, and C.

P r o g r a m m i n g 7 9

DSPLY

Display

FIELD r-WIDTH--\

DECIMAL r- PLACES I

DSPLY

I

Item

INTEGER

INTEGER

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Specifies number of digits decimal point.

Specifies number of digits to

Alpha character. User-defined statement.

Measurementvariable identifier, such as

CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA [ 101

Range Restriction

0 to 9

AA-22 and _

2-12 characters required.

The DSPLY command displays the value of a variable anywhere on the spectrum analyzer display.

Field width specifies the number of digits displayed, including sign and decimal point. Places to the right of the decimal point are limited by decimal places. For example, the number 123.45 has a field of 7, and 2 decimal places.

Use the DA, PU, PD, and PA commands to position the variable on the screen.

80 Programming

D-l-

Define Terminator

Item

TERMINATOR

Description/Default

Marks end of text.

Range Restriction

ASCII codes 0 - 255

In the sample program below, the @ symbol is defined as a terminator by the DT command immediately preceding it. In line 30, separates the command string “RL -5ODM” from the title string “CAL OUT 2ND HAR-

MONIC.” Without the @ symbol, “RL -5ODM” would be written on the analyzer’s CRT as part of the title instead of

10 OUTPTJT 718;“DT@”

20 OTJTPUT 718; “CF BOOM!Z”

30 OUTFVT 718;“KSE CAL OUT 2ND HARMONIC@RL -5ODM”

40 END

Programming 8 1

DW

Display Write

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Integers representing display memory values or instruction words.

Range Restriction

0 - 4095

The DW command sends a decimal number from the controller to the current or specified (with the DA command) display memory address, and advances the address selection to the next higher address. If the DW command is followed by more than one number, they are all loaded into consecutive display addresses. The display address is always advanced by one after a number is loaded into an address. (Each display address contains 12 bits. See DA.)

The decimal number represents data, or is an ASCII representation of a display instruction.

Use the DW command in conjunction with the DR and DA commands to draw on the spectrum analyzer CRT when the 03 or 01 output format is active. Refer to Appendix B for additional information about display memory instructions and display programming. The Consolidated Coding table and Data Word Summary in Appendix B are especially useful.

The program line below contains an instruction word, 1026, followed by data, 500 and 600. The DW command writes the numbers 1026, 500, and 600 into display addresses 1024, 1025, and 1026, respectively. The DA command specifies 1024 as the first address.

OUTPUT 718;“DA 1024; DW 1026,500,600;”

The instruction word (1026) causes the analyzer to draw a vector from the current position to the X-Y coordinates

500,600. (See Chapter 4 in Section I for a description of display unit coordinates.)

8 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

D 1

Display Size Normal

D2

Display Size Full CRT

D3

Display Size Expand

Display size commands Dl, D2, and D3 set the display size for CRT graphics. BEX is a fourth display size that can only be accessed by a display control instruction: graph, label, or vector mode. 256 (big expand) must be added to the control word, i.e., graph (1024 + 256). Once a code is selected, it remains in effect until changed.

Positions on the CRT display are referenced in display units as x, some horizontal position, and y, some vertical position. The coordinates (x,y) represent distance from the lower left-hand corner of the graticule (O,O), which is also the origin. The upper right-hand corner is the (1000, 1000) point.

B

C R T BEZEL

Dl

D 2

D3 bex AA

AA

A

A

AA B C D

@,O)

(120,73) l

(1023,1023)

(1000,1000)

(1005,957)

(1023,1023)

(785,978)

(81,491 (689,689) (676,645) (690,658)

Display size 4 cannot be accessed by the command code D4

(O,O) t

(671,671) (686,686)

*No writing outside boundary marked by AA, D

E

(500,500)

(562,515)

(379,347)

(336,336)

P r o g r a m m i n g 8 3

Dl , D2, D3

(Continued)

Display size 4 can only be accessed by a display control instruction such as graph, label, or vector mode. Big expand (256) must be added to the word selected (i.e., label is 1025 + 256).

A display program word can be a value from P, to 4095. The value is stored as a 12-bit binary word. The bits define the type of word. Graphic representations used are defined as follows:

Most Stgnrflcanl Btt

(MSB) bit 11 10

Least Slgnlflcant Bit

(LSB)

1 0

Decimal total 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

0 1 0 x x x x x x x 1 0 1026+

4 2 1 decimal 2048 1024 512 value

256 128 64 32 16 8 where x IS either a 1 (true) or a 0 (false)

Changing the display size and beam intensity are controlled by setting various bits along with the control instructions and data words. These functions are called auxiliary functions to the instruction.

clear x position (clx) : big expand (hex) : expand and shift (exs) : dim (dim): bright (brt) : auxiliary functions

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 ~l~0~x~x~x~s~x~x~e~x~x display size big expand

(bex) l

, + 256 expand and shift (exs) , + 64 beam intensity dim

(dim), + 8 bright

(brt), + 128 clear x position

(clx), + 16

Resets the axis display position to the far left (0, y).

Amplifies the x and y CRT beam deflection by a 1.49 factor.

Amplifies the x and y CRT beam deflection by a 1.13 factor (expand) and shifts the (0,O) reference point to the lower left of the CRT screen.

Sets the CRT beam intensity below the normal level.

Sets the CRT beam intensity to the maximum level.

I

Abbreviations within the parentheses are useful as a shorthand notation for writing display programs. They are not programming codes.

8 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

Dl , D2, D3

I

The display size commands combine the size instructions as follows:

Display

Size

Consolidated

Coding

Instructions

Dl

D2

D3 big expand none exs bex and exs bex

Ratio to Dl

1.00

1.13

1 . 6 8

1.49

Origin

Shifted no yes

9s no

The display size determines the position and number of rows and columns for characters on the CRT display. This can be an important consideration when labeling graph lines or points.

Dl Display Size

T

1024

UNITS

32

CHARACTER

LINES

1024 UNITS

64 CHARACTER SPACES

D2 Display Size

1024

UNITS

32

CHARACl ‘ER

LINES

1024 UNITS

64 CHARACTER SPACES -I

P r o g r a m m i n g 8 5

Dl, D2, D3 (Continued)

Display memory is set up to contain 64 character spaces per line with respect to display size 1. When using the third and fourth display sizes, a label can only be a maximum of 44 characters. The remaining 20 characters of the label will be stored in display memory, but will not show up on the CRT display due to the expansion of D3 and bex. At character space 65, an automatic carriage-return and line-feed will occur, at which point labeling will continue to be written on the CRT display.

The automatic carriage-return and line-feed occur only when character space 65 is reached. Thus, in the third and fourth display sizes, the characters from the 44th character space through the 64th character space will not appear on the CRT display Therefore, labeling with display size 3 and bex needs appropriate placement of characters because of the limited number of character spaces for these display sizes.

D3 Display Size

Big Expand (bex)

-

1024

UNITS r

8 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

21

CHARACTER

LINES

-L

1024 UNITS

42 CHARACTER SPACES

(Continued)

Dl , D2, D3

OUTPUT 718; “D2;”

The above program line selects display size 2 for the CRT display of the analyzer.

32

I

30 Ascender Limit

T

Character Boundary except for p, 11, hand 00.

Base Line

6, Descender Limit

0,

/’

R aference

6 12

Distance from References are in Display Units

16

Single Character Space

A single character space (see above) has an absolute outside limit of 16 (x) by 32 (y) units in any display size. A character position is referenced from the lower left corner of each character space. The actual “character boundary” is designated by the ascender and descender limits.

From the center of the character space, x may be changed as many as + 7 units and y by as many as + 15 units before the text begins at the next x and y character. If a plot absolute statement calls a position anywhere in the character space, the character will be placed within the “character boundary.” If two characters are labeled into the same character space, they will be superimposed over one another.

Example :

To begin labeling text 6 characters up from the bottom and 24 characters from the left (in any display size), the plot absolute vector values are calculated for the center of the character location as follows: x = (character spaces) (16) - 8

= (24) (16) - 8 = 376 y = (character spaces) (32) - 16

= (6) (32) - 16 = 176

“PA 376,176 LB <text>”

P r o g r a m m i n g 8 7

Dl , D2, D3 (Continued)

The first character of text will be positioned as shown:

304-

176-

‘9” -

;

7

8

4

3

2

1

1

Lower Left Display

I I I I I I I I III I l l l I l l l l l I

5 10

I

152

15

$

312

I I I

Character Spaces

376 Units at Center

8 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

EE

Enable Entry

The EE command sends values entered by the operator on the analyzer DATA keyboard to the controller. Generally, the sequence of programmed events is as follows:

1.

A program loop prevents the controller from using the entered value until the operator signals that the entry is complete.

2.

The operator makes a DATA entry, which is stored in the analyzer internal data register.

3.

The operator signals completion of the entry.

4.

The controller reads the value of the entry and continues to the next program step.

Depending on the type of DATA entry required, one of two different methods is used. The first method does not require the use of service requests and is used only for entering positive single digits, the second is for entering positive integers from PI to [ 18( 12) - 11.

Method 1:

Testing for a non-zero entry.

1 0 OUTPUT 718;“EE;"

20 REPEAT

30

40

OUTPUT 718;"OA;"

ENTER718;N

50 UNTILN>@

60 P R I N T E R I S

70 PRINTN

80 E N D

Line 10: Allows data to be entered with the analyzer DATA keys and presets the entry to @ (default value).

The OA command transfers this value to the analyzer.

Lines 20 to 50: Forms a program loop that is exited when a single digit entry between 1 and 9 is made.

Line 20: Reads the current value of the DATA keys into the variable N.

Lines 60 to 70: Prints the entered number on a printer whose address in 701.

P r o g r a m m i n g 8 9

EE (Continued)

Using this program, the outputs printed by pressing particular DATA keys are as follows:

(There is no response to pressing DATA [0] .)

Method

2: Testing when an entry has been completed, and then exiting the program loop with a service request.

10 OUTPUT718;“R1;R4;EE;"

20 REPEAT

30 A=SPOLL(718)

40 UNTILBIT(A,1)>0

50 OUTPUT718;“OA;"

60 ENTER718;N

70 P R I N T E R I S

80 PRINTN

90 END

Line 10: Contains an EE command preceded by two service-request format commands. The Rl command clears the service request modes of the analyzer. The R4 command calls for a service request if a units key is pressed to signify the completion of an entry.

Line 30: Reads the serial poll byte and sets it equal to variable A. The first bit of this byte denotes the status of the service request.

Line 40: Forms the conditional statement of the program loop (lines 20-40). The BIT statement compares the first bit of variable A with 0. If the first bit of variable A is 0, indicating the units key has not been pressed, the program continues at line 30. If it is 1, indicating a units key has been pressed, the program continues at line 50.

Line 50: Transfers the value of the active function to the controller. In this case, the active function contains the DATA keys entry

Line 60: Takes the DATA keys entry and sets it equal to the variable N.

Lines 70 to 80: Prints the value of N on a printer whose address is 701.

90 Programming

(Continued)

EE

Some DATA entries and the corresponding printed outputs, as executed by this program, are shown in the following table.

DATA Entry output

Programming 91

EK

Enable Knob

The EK command allows data entry with the front panel data knob when the analyzer is under remote control.

The front panel ENABLED indicator lights, indicating the data knob is functional, but other front panel functions remain inoperative.

The following program requests the operator to position a marker on a signal that needs further analysis, while the program is paused.

10 OUTPUT 718:“MB;EK;”

20 PRINT “USE DATA KNOB TO PLACE MARKER ON SIGNAL. PRESS CONTINUE”

30 PAUSE

40 ! Analysis program here

50 END

The program above is continued by pressing the El key on the controller keyboard

Be sure to pause program operation after executing EK. This gives the operator time to turn the data knob.

92 Programming

r OPERAND 1 > ,- OPERAND 2 7

IF THEN

ELSE

ENDIF

THEN command

I ist

ELSE command

1 ist

END I F

Item

COMMAND LIST

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alphanumeric character. Any spectrum analyzer command from this section

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA( lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF commands form a decision and looping construct. They compare operand 1 to operand 2. If the condition is true, the command list is executed. Otherwise, commands following ELSE or ENDIF are executed.

The IF command must be delimited with the ENDIF command.

Programming 93

IF THEN

ELSE ENDIF (Continued)

The following program uses the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command to place a marker on the largest signal that is greater than the threshold level.

10 OUTPUT 718;“IP;LF;TH-35DM;"

20 OUTPUT718;“TS;MKPKHI;MA;"

30 OUTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,TH"

40 0UTPUT718;“THENCF20MZ;"

50 OUTPUT7l8;“ELSECF100MZ;TS;M.KPKHI;"

60 OUTPUT718;“ENDIF;"

70 E N D

The program below does not incorporate the ELSE branch of the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command. The program lowers any signal positioned about (off) the analyzer screen.

10 OUTPUT718;“S2;TS;E1;"

20 OTJTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,RLTHEN"

30 OUTPUT718;“REPEATRLUP;TS;El;"

40 OUTPUT718;“UNTILMA,LE,RL"

50 OUTPUT 718;“ENDIF Sl;" " "

60 E N D

94 Programming

EM

Erase Trace C Memory

The EM command clears display memory addresses 3072 through 4095, which contain instruction words and amplitude information for trace C. The EM command loads the instruction word 1044 into addresses 3072 through 4095, and then establishes address 3072 as the current (in-use) address, placing this address in the display address register. (See Appendix A for more information about trace C.)

The EM command is often incorporated in a routine that blanks the spectrum analyzer screen in preparation for the display of custom graphics. Execute the following program line to blank the analyzer screen;

OUTF’UT 718; “EM;BLANK TRA;BLANK TRB; GRAT OFF; KSo; DLE OFF;”

The line above clears trace C memory, and blanks the graticule, characters, display line, and traces A and B.

Though the display can be blanked with the KSg command, which turns off the CRT beam, the above program line is advantageous. It clears the display faster than KSg. In addition, the contents of traces A and B are saved, the instrument state is not altered, and the beginning of trace C memory, address 3072, is established as the current address.

To reinstate the analyzer display, execute the following program line:

OUTF’UT 718;“EM;CLRW TRA;CLRW TRB; GRAT ON; KSp;DLE ON;”

Programming 95

IF THEN ELSE

ENDIF rOPEAAND 1 \ w n u m e r i c W

CL(LTbi

/ - O P E R A N D 2 7

U . n,ume,r.i

9 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

IF THEN ELSE

ENDIF

Item

COMMAND LIST

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alphanumeric character. Any spectrum analyzer command from this section.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF commands form a decision and looping construct. They compare operand 1 to operand 2. If the condition is true, the command list is executed. Otherwise, commands following ELSE or ENDIF are executed.

The IF command must be delimited with the ENDIF command.

P r o g r a m m i n g 9 7

IF THEN ELSE

ENDIF (Continued)

The following program uses the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command to place a marker on the largest signal that is greater than the threshold level.

10 OUTPTJT718;“IP;LF;TH-38DM;"

20 OUTPUT718;“TS;MKPKHI;MA;"

30 OUTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,TH"

40 OUTPUT718;“THENCF20MZ;"

80 OUTPUT718;“ELSECF100MZ;TS;MKPKHI;"

80 OUTPUT718;“ENDIF;"

70 E N D

The program below does not incorporate the ELSE branch of the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command. The program lowers any signal positioned above (off) the analyzer screen.

10 OUTPUT718;“S2;TS;E1;"

20 OUTPUT 718;“IfMA,GT,RLTHEN"

30 0UTPUT718;"REPEATRLUP,TS;E1;"

40 OUTPUT7l8;“UNTILMA,LE,RL"

50 OUTPUT718;“ENDIFS1;"""

80 E N D

9 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

The EX command exchanges traces A and B, point by point.

OUTPUT 718;“EX;"

The functions of the AXB and EX commands are identical. (Refer to Chapter 5 in Section I.)

EX

Exchange A and B

WW

P r o g r a m m i n g 9 9

EXP

Exponential

EXP rDESTINATION T r OPERAND ?

SCALING

/- FACTOR 7

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA( lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA- 22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA--and-

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The EXP command processes the operand as follows: l@porand/rcalmg factor _ destination

The operand and scaling factor are shown in the syntax chart above.

100 Programming

External Mixing Mode

MW

The EXTMXR command presets the external mixing mode, setting the frequency range from 18.0 GHz to 26.5

GHz. The frequency range is derived from the sixth harmonic of the analyzer local oscillator (LO).

The preset conditions are as follows:

Specifies the fifth LO harmonic as the start harmonic for the signal identification routine. (See NSTART)

Specifies forty-second harmonic as the stop harmonic for the signal identification routine. (See NSTOI?)

Specifies 10 dB as the maximum amplitude difference between a signal and its image. (See SIGDEL.)

On execution of EXTMXR, the active function readout displays the following:

FULLBAND

6(k)

The 6 represents the current LO harmonic. The K represents the frequency band to which the analyzer is tuned.

If a harmonic lock is in effect (KSt or HNLOCK), an 7.” is displayed above the graticule next to the harmonic number. The conversion loss offset value is annotated to the left of the graticule.

Changing the frequency range with the start and stop frequencies automatically changes the harmonic used for tuning.

The functions of the EXTMXR and KSU commands, and m $ keys are identical. See NSTART NSTOR

SIGDEL, HNLOCK, and CNVLOSS.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 OUTPUT @Sa; “Ip, ”

30 OUTPUT @Sa;“FA&P)GZ;”

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“S2;TS;”

50 OUTPUT Q Sa; “HNLOCK; ”

60 OUTPUT @Sa;“Sl;”

70 OUTPUT @Sa;“FA8.0GZ;FB12.5GZ;”

80 E N D

Programming 101

EXTMXR

(Continued)

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Presets the instrument.

Sets a start frequency of 6.0 GHz which automatically selects the second harmonic.

Sets the analyzer to single sweep mode and takes one complete sweep of the current display.

Locks the second harmonic of the local oscillator.

Resets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode.

Sets the frequency range of the second harmonic.

The functions of the HNLOCK and KSt commands are identical.

IO2 Programming

The El command positions the marker at the signal peak. See MKPK

OUTPUT 718;“El;"

E l

Peak Search

Programming 103

E2

Marker to Center Frequency

(MKCF)

The E2 command centers the active marker on the analyzer screen, moving the marker to the center frequency.

OUTF'UT 718; “E2;"

The functions of the E2 and MKCF commands, and the front panel @ key are identical.

104 Programming

E3

Delta Marker Step Size

(MKSS)

(--G---)-Q

The E3 command establishes the center frequency step size as the frequency difference between the delta and active markers. (See M3 or MKD.)

OUTPUT 718;“E3;"

The functions of the MKSS and E3 commands are identical.

Programming 105

E4

Marker to Reference Level

(MKRL)

The E4 command moves the active marker to the reference level.

OUTPTJT 718;“E4;"

The functions of the E4 and MKRL commands, and the front panel @ key are identical.

106 Programming

real

FA

Start Frequency

The FA command specifies the start frequency value. The function is identical with that of the front panel key The program line below illustrates command syntax.

OTJTPUT718;“FA88MZ;"

When queried (? or OA), FA returns the start frequency value, a real number, followed by carriage-return/linefeed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Programming 107

FB

Stop Frequency

The FB command specifies the stop frequency value. The function is identical with that of the front panel key The program below illustrates command syntax.

OUTPUT 718;"FB 88MZ;"

When queried (? or OA), FB returns the stop frequency value, a real number, followed by carriage-return/linefeed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

108 Programming

FFT

?DESTINATION -\ rSOURCE 7 rWIND0W-x

FFT

Fast Fourier Transform

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

For window, TRACE LABEL is also defined by TWNDOW

Range Restriction

AA-Z2 and _

2- 12 characters required.

Trace length must be 1008.

The FFT command performs a forward fast fourier transform on a trace array. The results of the transform contain logged magnitude components only.

The FFT algorithm assumes the source trace array is one period of an infinitely long string of concatenated, duplicate arrays. Thus, in order to avoid discontinuities when the source trace is concatenated, the beginning and end elements of the source trace array must gradually diminish to the same amplitude value. If the endpoints of the original trace array were of different amplitudes, the discontinuities in the resulting array series would introduce false frequency components into the fourier transform. This is illustrated in the following figure.

Programming 109

FFT (Continued)

ORIGINAL

SAMPLED l

. .

WAVEFORM

ANALYSIS

I N T E R V A L . l

.

=SWEEPTIME

SAMPLED

ANALYTIC . l l

WAVEFORM em.

The TWNDOW command allows the source trace array to be modified so the amplitude of the trace endpoints gradually diminish to zero.

The TWNDOW command formats trace arrays with one of three built-in “window” algorithms: HANNING, UNI-

FORM, and FLATTOI? Each simulates a series of equally spaced filters (see figure below). The detected, spectral line traces the top of the passband while moving from NAf to (N + 1)Af.

110 Programming

(Continued)

FFT

The amplitude and frequency uncertainty of the FFT display depends on the choice of the window, and the analyzer sweeptime. Amplitude uncertainty is maximum when the spectral component falls midway between the filter shapes. Passbands that are flatter in shape, like the FLATTOP filter, contribute less amplitude uncertainty, but frequency resolution and sensitivity are compromised (see TWNDOW)

Of the three algorithms, the FLATTOP has the least amplitude uncertainty and greatest frequency uncertainty.

Worst-case accuracy is - 0.1 dB. Use this passband when transforming periodic signals.

The UNIFORM algorithm has the least frequency uncertainty and greatest amplitude uncertainty. Worst-case amplitude uncertainty is 3.9 dB and its 3 dB resolution bandwidth is 60% of the HANNING bandwidth. The

UNIFORM algorithm contains no time domain window weighting. Use it for transforming noise signals or transients that fully decay within one sweeptime period.

The HANNING algorithm is a traditional passband window found in most real time analyzers. It offers a compromise between the FLATTOP and UNIFORM shapes. Its amplitude uncertainty is - 1.5 dB, and its 3 dB bandwidth is 40% of the FLATTOP bandwidth.

The FFT results are displayed on the spectrum analyzer in logarithmic scale. For the X dimension, the frequency at the left side of the graph is 0 Hz, and at the right side is Fmax. Fmax can be calculated using a few simple equations and the sweeptime of the analyzer.

The sweeptime divided by the number of trace array elements containing amplitude information (in this case,

1000) is equal to the sampling period. The inverse of the sampling period is the sampling rate. The sampling rate divided by two yields Fmax. For example, let the sweeptime of the analyzer be 20 msec. 20 msec divided by 1000 equals 20 psec, the value of the sampling period. The sampling rate is l/20 psec. Fmax equals l/20 pet divided by 2, or 25 kHz.

The fourier transforms of the window functions are shown in the following figure. Use these graphs to estimate resolution and amplitude uncertainty of a fourier transform display. Each horizontal division of the graphs equals l/sweeptime or Fmax/500 (which can be calculated from the previous equations), and represents two trace array elements.

Programming 1 1 1

FFT (Continued)

In d

E ii

0

-10

- 2 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 7 0

-60

-90

- 1 0 0

-110

- 1 2 0

- 1 9 0

- 1 4 0

-150

-180 ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’

’ i

<A;-

500

HANNING FILTER WINDOW i v)

E

:

0

- 1 0

- 2 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

-80.

-70.

-60

-80.

.lOO

I

1

I

UNIFORM FILTER WINDOW m tii

U-J ii

- 5 0

-80

- 7 0

-60

- 8 0

- 1 0 0

- 1 1 0

- 1 2 0

- 1 3 0

-140”““““““““““““““‘~

$A!-

500

FLAT TOP FILTER WINDOW

1 1 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

FFT

In summary, keep the following in mind when executing FFT:

Perform fourier transforms on trace A, B, or C, or user-defined traces containing 1008 elements only. (FFT automatically creates a 1008 point array from trace A, B, or C.)

FFT is designed to be used in transforming zero span information into the frequency domain. Performing FFT on a frequency sweep will result in inaccurate FFT data.

Define a trace window with the TWNDOW command before performing an FFT on a trace.

It is possible to get numbers outside the boundaries of the screen (0 - 1023) after executing an FFT. If the destination trace is trace A, then the results are automatically clipped. For traces B, C, and user-defined traces, the results are not automatically clipped. When using these traces, avoid writing in locations outside the boundaries of the screen.

To get an FFT frequency readout on the FFT trace, use the Marker Read command (MKREAD Fm,,) .

The following is an example of an FFT program.

10 OUTPUT 718; “TFLDEF W-INDOW, 1008;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“TWNDOW WeINDOW,HANNING;”

21

30 OUTPUT 718;“FFT TFLB,TRA,W-INDOW,”

31

40 E N D

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30:

A trace array of 1008 points is defined as W-INDOW.

The trace array is formatted according to the HANNING algorithm.

An FFT is performed on trace A and the results are stored in trace B.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 1 3

FOFFSET

Frequency Offset integer

I Item

I

I

INTEGER

Description/Default

Default is hertz.

Range Restrictions

The FOFFSET command selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts, such as center frequency. Relative values, like span, and delta marker, are not offset.

After execution, the FOFFSET command displays the frequency offset in the active function readout. The offset value is always displayed beneath the CRT graticule line, as long as the offset is in effect.

The following program returns an offset value of 100 MHz to the controller and prints it on the controller screen.

10 OUTPUT7l8;“FOFFSET100MZ;FOFFSET?;"

20 ENTER718;N

30 PRINTN

40 END

When queried (?), FOFFSET returns the offset value as a real number, followed by carriage-return/line-feed

(ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with the line feed.

I

I

I

114 Programming

FORMAT STATEMENTS

01,02,03,04

The spectrum analyzer outputs must be formatted appropriately for the controller and measurement requirements.

The spectrum analyzer transmits decimal or binary values, via the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB), to a controller or other HP-IB device, such as a printer. The decimal and binary values represent trace information or instructions.

The format characteristics are summarized in the table below.

Analyzer Output

Sends trace information only as a decimal value in Hz, dB, dBm, volts, or seconds.

Sends trace amplitude and position information, or instruction word as decimal values ranging from P, to

4095:

P, to 1023 represent positive, unblanked amplitudes in display units.

1024 to 2047 are instruction words (analyzer machine language).

2048 to 3071 represent positive, blanked amplitudes in display units.

3072 to 4095 represent negative, blanked amplitudes in display units,

Sends trace amplitude and position information, or instruction word as binary values in two &bit bytes, sending the most significant bit first. The four most significant bits are zeroes.

Sends trace amplitude information only as binary value in one 8-bit byte, composed from the 02 output bytes: o o o o x x x x x x x x x x x 0 2

1 1 ////// x x x x x x x x 0 4

Output Example of Marker

Format Amplitude. Marker is at - 10 dBm

Command reference level.

03 - 10.00

01

02

04 o o o o x x x x

1001 x x x x x x x x

(31 (231) values 0 to 4095 x x x x x x x x

(250) values (a to 255 (full scale)

Programming 115

FORMATSTATEMENTS

(Continued)

03 Format

The 03 format transmits trace amplitude information only, in measurement units: Hz, dBm,dB, volts, or seconds.

The 03 format cannot transmit instruction words.

A carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10) always follows any data output. The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Instrument preset (IP) automatically selects the 03 format.

01 Format

The 01 format transmits trace amplitude information as decimal values in display units. (See Chapter 4 in Section

I for a description of display units.)

Trace amplitude values can be positive and unblanked, positive and blanked, or negative and blanked. Positive, unblanked values (0 to 1023) cover the visible amplitude range on the spectrum analyzer CRT

Negative trace values (3072 to 4095) usually result from trace arithmetic, and are not displayed because they are off (below) the screen. Negative values are represented by the 12-bit two’s complement of the negative number, that is, 4096 - lnegative value/. For example, a - 300 value is an output of 3796.

4096 - I-3001 = 3796

Positive, blanked values (2048 to 3071) are those responses immediately ahead of the updated, sweeping trace.

These values form the blank-ahead marker, and represent the amplitude responses of the previous sweep, plus

2048. Thus, they are off (above) the screen. (See Appendix B.)

The 01 format also transmits instruction words as decimal values. See the Instruction and Data Word Summary in

Appendix B

A carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10) always follows any data output in the 01 format. The end-oridentify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

02 Format

The 02 format transmits trace information or instruction words as two 8-bit binary numbers. The most significant bit is sent first. The four most significant bits are always zeroes.

Most Significant Byte o o o o x x x x

Least Significant Byte x x x x x x x x

Refer to the Consolidated Coding table in Appendix B for instruction word information.

Note that the 02 format sends the same kind of information that the 01 format sends, except that 02 transmits the information in binary numbers instead of decimal numbers. Also, the end of transmission is not marked by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10) in the 02 format.

116 Programming

(Continued)

FORMATSTATEMENTS

04 Format

The 04 format transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number. The binary number is one 8-bit byte composed from the bytes established with the 02 format.

o o o o x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 2

11 ////// x x x x x x x x 0 4

The 04 output is the fastest way to transmit trace date from the spectrum analyzer to the HP-IB bus. However, sign information is lost. Keep this in mind when transmitting delta marker information (MKD). The end of data transmission is not marked by a carriage-return/line-feed.

Format Statements and the HP-IB Bus

The table below shows a transmission sequence on the HP-IB bus for each of the four formats. Each format is transmitting the amplitude of a marker positioned at the - 10 dBm reference line.

Format

BVte

Byte

Byte

Byte

Byte

Byte

Carriage Return

Line Feed

(EOI asserted)

0 3

NUM (-)

NUM (1)

NUM (8)

NUM ( )

NUM (8)

NUM (8)

13

10

01

NUM (“1”)

NUM (“@“,

NUM (“!d”)

NUM (“1”)

13

10

0 2

(3)

(231)

0 4

(250)

Though the spectrum analyzer transmits either binary or digital information on the HP-IB bus, a decimal number is always returned to the controller display. This is illustrated in the program below, which reads the instruction word

1040 at display address 8, the fist memory location of trace A. The program reads the instruction word, using each of the formats, and the DR command.

1 ASSIGN @Sa TO 7 18

2 PRINTER IS 701

4 OUTPUT @Sa;“Al;SB;TS;”

10 OUTPUT @Sa;“DA 0 01 DR”

20 ENTER @Sa;Drl

30 OUTPUT @a; “ DA 0 02 DR”

40 ENTER @Sa USING “# W”:Dr2

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 1 7

FORMATSTATEMENTS

(Continued)

5 0 OUTPUT @Sa; “ DA 0 03 DR ”

6 0 E N T E R @Sa;Dr3

7 0 OUTPUT @Sa; “ DA 0 04 DR”

8 0 ENTER @Sa USING “#,B”;Dr4

9 0 P R I N T Drl,DrB,Dr3,Dr4

100 END

Running the program above produces the following responses on the controller display. Note that all the responses are decimal numbers. Also note that the 03 and 04 formats do not return the correct data. (As mentioned above,

03 and 04 do not transmit instruction words.)

01 FORMAT response: 1040

02 FORMAT response: 1040

03 FORMAT response : - 200.8

04 FORMAT response: 4

Controller Formats

The format of the controller must be compatible with the output format of the analyzer.

Analyzer

Format

0 2

0 4

0 1

0 3

Requirements free field

Controller Format

Example Statement and Analyzer Response

ENTER 718; PK-AMPLITUDE

Response: 1001 field size dependent on output, use free field format

ENTER 718; PK-AMPLITUDE

Response: - 10.0

binary, read twice for each value ENTER 7 18 USING “#, W”

Response: 1001 binary, read once for each value ENTER 718 USING “#,B”

Response: 250

NOTE

The 0 in 01,02,03, and 04 is the letter 0 and not the number zero.

1 1 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

FPKA

Fast Preselector Peak

The FPKA command automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to yield the greatest signal level at the active marker. The FPKA command peaks the preselector faster than the preselector-peak command, PI?

Although this command can be executed in all frequency spans, it performs best when the instrument is in zero span. Use the standard preselector peak for all other frequency spans.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 1 9

FS

Full Span

The FS command selects the full frequency span of 0 - 2.5 GHz.

OUTPUT 718; “FS; ”

The functions of the commands FS and LF; and the front-panel m function, are identical.

1 2 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

FULBAND

Full Band (External)

FULBAND

I

Item

I

INTEGER

Description/Default

Specifies waveguide band.

Range Restriction

6to 17

Band

6

(K)

7 (A)

8

(Q)

9 U)

10 W)

11 (El

12 w

13 F)

14 0)

15 G)

16

WI

17

(J)

Frequency Range

18.0- 26.5 GHz

2 6 . 5 - 4 0 . 0

33.0- 50.0

40.0- 60.0

50.0- 75.0

60.0- 90.0

75.0- 110.0

90.0- 140.0

llO.O- 170.0

140.0- 220.0

170.0- 260.0

220.0- 325.0

Mixing Harmonic

6+

8+ lO+ lO+

14+

16+

18+

24+

30+

36+

44+

54+

The FULBAND command sets the start and stop frequencies for the analyzer external mixing bands. In the table above, the start and stop frequencies for each band are shown in the Frequency Range column. On execution of the FULBAND command, a harmonic lock (HNLOCK) is automatically executed. (See HNLOCK.)

I

I

Programming 12 1

FUNCDEF

Function Define

FUNCDEF iunct ion

I abet

,p STRING DATA F I ELD -\ string del imi ter command

I ist

,p A-BLOCK DATA FIELD -\ iength

,p I-BLOCK DATA FIELD ‘-\

I

Item

COMMAND LIST

LENGTH

STRING

DELIMITER

Description/Default

Any spectrum analyzer commands from this

Remote section.

Two &bit bytes specifying length of command list, in 8-bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB

Must match. Marks beginning and end of command list.

Range Restriction

Command list length is limited to 2015 characters, including carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF).

!“$%&‘/: = @\S

2

The FUNCDEF command defines a program routine as a function label. After FUNCDEF is executed, the command list is executed whenever the function label is encountered.

Once the function label is defined, it can be loaded into a softkey which can be executed remotely, or locally from the front panel.

When queried (?) , FUNCDEF returns the command list in an A-block data format.

(See KEYDEF and KEYEXC.)

J

1

122 Programming

CR

Graph integer

Item

I

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents display memory Y-axis values.

Range Restriction

PI- 4095

The GR command, in the trace modes of operation only, plots HP-IB inputs as graphs on the analyzer CRT It is also used with auxiliary function codes to modify the appearance on the CRT of stored trace data (highlighting a portion of the trace, for example). Following the GR command, HP-IB inputs in y (amplitude) display units are entered on the CRT, starting at the far left side of the display For each y display unit added to the trace, the x

(horizontal) coordinate is automatically advanced one display unit to the right.

Execution of the GR command tells the analyzer to start plotting a graph at the amplitude point indicated by the next y (amplitude) coordinate received from the HP-IB input. This first amplitude point, yl, appears at the left of the display; successive points are then plotted, and the lines connecting them are drawn from left to right within the display area limits. (The display area size is established with display size command Dl, D2, or D3, or the bex programming instruction .)

A sample program using the GR command is shown below.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718;FORMAT ON

20 OUTPUT @SA;“IP;LF;FA200KZ;FB5MZ;S2;GR”

30 FORN=lTO400

40 OUTPUT @Sa;400- (3.5/4)*N

50 N E X T N

60 FOR N = 401 TO 1000

70 OUTPUT @%a;300

80 N E X T N

90 OUTPUT @Sa;“KSi;TS;KSk;B3$2;TS;”

100 OUTPUT @Sa;“HD;EM;KSo;DT@;”

110 FORN=ltollSTEP2

120 OUTPUT @Sa;“DB;PU;PA 50”;(90*N)- 2O;“LB”;(lO*N)- lo;“@”

130 N E X T N

140 OUTPUT @Sa;“B4”

150 OUTPUT @Sa USING “K,B,B,K “;“DB;PU;PA 0,600 LBdB”; 10,13;OUT OF SPEC@”

160 OUTPUT @Sa;“D3;PA 100,500 LB RADIATED INTERFERENCE, 2OOkHz- SMHz@”

170 E N D

1

Line 20:

Lines 30 to 80:

Line 90:

Line 200:

Lines 110 to 160:

Initiates the graph mode. The IP insures that the graphing starts at the beginning of trace

C.

Writes test limit values into the trace C memory.

Sends graph data to trace B memory and enables A- B- >A.

Clears the active function readout (HD), prepares trace C for input (EM), clears the display annotation (KSo) , and sets the label terminator to @.

Labels the graticule.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 2 3

GRAT

Graticule

GRAT

The GRAT command turns the graticule on and off.

0UTPUT718;"GRAT;"

When queried (?) , GRAT returns the graticule state: ON or OFF

(See also KSn and KSm.)

124 Programming

HD

Hold Data Entry

(-X->-c;)

The HD command disables data entry via the front panel DATA keyboard and blanks the active function readout.

OUTPUT 718; “HD; ”

Programming 125

HNLOCK

Harmonic Lock

(KW

HNLOCK integer

I

Item

I

INTEGER

Description/Default

Real number representing an LO harmonic.

Range Restriction

1 - 6 4

The HNLOCK command prevents the analyzer from tuning with other than the specified LO harmonic. This command also restricts the tuning range of the LO to 6.2 GHz.

If the harmonic specified with the HNLOCK command is not compatible with the current START and STOP frequency settings, these settings are automatically changed. When this happens, the CENTER FREQUENCY setting is retained, if possible (i.e., the START and STOP frequencies are set closer together). If the CENTER

FREQUENCY setting can not be retained, another external mixing band is selected that is compatible with the specified harmonic. The HNLOCK command can not be used to switch between the internal and external mixer bands.

If no harmonic number is specified with the HNLOCK command, the analyzer tunes with the current harmonic.

When executing a harmonic lock, use the following method to ensure the desired harmonic is selected:

1. Select desired harmonic by setting a start frequency within the desired band. (See Tuning Curves in Appendix

F for frequency range of each harmonic.)

2. Set analyzer to single sweep mode. Single sweep ensures the desired harmonic is selected when executing a bank lock.

3. Execute KSt to lock the desired harmonic.

4. Set analyzer to continuous sweep mode.

5. Reset desired start and stop frequencies.

Remember, before you can change the frequency range to another harmonic, you must unlock the band with the

KSQ (harmonic unlock) command.

KSR (Diagnostics On) can be activated, at any time, to display the local oscillator harmonic number in the upper left corner of the CRT display.

I

I

1 2 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

HNLOCK

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 OTJTPUT @Sa; “Yp,”

30 OUTPUT @Sa;“FAG.P)GZ;”

40 OUTPUT @Sa; “S2;TS;”

50 OUTPTJT @Sa; “HNLOCK;”

60 OUTPUT @Sa;“Sl;”

70 OU’ITUT @Sa;“FAS.PIGZ;FB12.5GZ;”

80 END

Presets the instrument.

Sets a start frequency of 6.0 GHz which automatically selects the second harmonic.

Sets the analyzer to single sweep mode and takes one complete sweep of the current display.

Locks the second harmonic of the local oscillator.

Resets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode.

Sets the frequency range of the second harmonic.

The functions of the HNLOCK and KSt commands are identical.

Programming 127

HNUNLK

Harmonic Bank Unlock

WQ)

The HNUNLK command removes the harmonic lock established with the HNLOCK command, thus allowing the analyzer to tune over the whole input frequency range.

The functions of the HNUNLK and KSQ commands are identical.

128 Programming

IB

Input B

The IB command transmits the contents of an array, located in the controller to trace B memory. Use IB with the

02 format, which formats data in two &bit bytes.

The IB command cannot be executed when it is followed by a carriage-return/line-feed. Two examples of terminating the IB command are shown below:

OUTPUT 718;“IB;“;

OUTPUT 718 USING “#, k”;“IB;”

The program below demonstrates the use of IB.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718;FORMAT ON

20 ASSIGN @@a-bin TO 718;FORMAT OFF

30 INTEGER BZOO( 1: 1001)

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“CF200MZ Bl;A4;RB30KZ;SP2MZ;S2;TS;”

50 OUTPUT @Sa; “02TB”

60 ENTER @Sa_bin;B200( *)

70 OUTPUT @Sa;“CFlOOMZ;RB30KZ;SPlMZ;TS;”

80 PAUSE

90 OUTPUT @Sa;“IB”;

100 OUTPUT @Sa_bin;B200( *)

110 E N D

Line 30:

Line 40:

Declares, dimensions, and reserves memory for array BZOO.

Blanks trace A and sets the analyzer to 200 MHz center frequency. Selects single sweep mode, and sweeps trace B.

Lines 50 and

6 0 : Stores trace B (in binary) in controller array.

Line 70:

Line 90:

Line 100:

Sets analyzer to 100 MHz center frequency. Sweeps trace B with new data.

Prepares analyzer to receive previous trace B data.

Sends trace B data to analyzer.

Programming 129

ID

Identify

The ID command returns the instrument identity to the controller: HP 8568B or HP 8566B.

OUTPUT 718;“ID;"

130 Programming

IDSTAT

Signal Identifier Status

IDSTAT

The IDSTAT command returns a 1,8, or - 1, representing the completion status of the signal identifier routine, to the controller.

The 1 means the signal was found, indicating signal identification routine identifies signal and moves signal to center screen. The pI means signal was not found, analyzer recalled register 7. The - 1 means the signal was found, indicating signal identification routine found signal but did not move signal to center screen because of a harmonic lock (see HNLOCK) .

10 OUTPUT 718;“IDSTAT?;”

20 ENTER 718;N

30 PRINT N

4 0 E N D

See SIGID or KSv.

Programming 131

IF

THENELSEENDIF

rOPERAND 1 -\ v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r n u m e r i c d a t a f i e l d rOPERAND 2 I v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r n u m e r i c d a t a f i e l d

THEN command

I i s t command

I i s t

Item

COMMAND LIST

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alphanumeric character. Any spectrum analyzer command from this section.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

Z- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF commands form a decision and looping construct. They compare operand 1 to operand 2. If the condition is true, the command list is executed. Otherwise, commands following ELSE or ENDIF are executed.

The IF command must be delimited with the ENDIF command.

1 3 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

IF

THENELSEENDIF

The following program uses the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command to place a marker on the largest signal that is greater than the threshold level.

10 OTJTPUT718;“IP;LF;TH-35DM;"

20 OUTPTJT718;“TS;MKPKHI;MA;"

30 OUTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,TH"

40 0TJTPUT718;“THENCF20MZ;"

50 OUTPUT7l8;“ELSECF100MZ;TS;MKPKHI;"

60 OUTPUT718;“ENDIF;"

70 E N D

The program below does not incorporate the ELSE branch of the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command. The program lowers any signal positioned above (off) the analyzer screen.

10 OUTPUT718;“S2;TS;E1;"

20 OUTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,RLTHEiN"

30 0UTPUT718;“REPEATRLUP,TS;E1;"

40 OUTPUT718;“UNTILMA,LE,RL"

50 OUTPUT718;“ENDIFS1;"""

60 E N D

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 3 3

IP

Instrument Preset

CLRW A (Al)

BLANK B (B4)

CR

CA c s

CT c v

AMB OFF (Cl)

FA

FB

HD

AUNITS DBM (KSA)

VAVG OFF (KSH)

DET NRM (KSa)

MKNOISE OFF (KSL)

DET NRM (KSa)

GRAT ON (KSn)

KSP

LG

MKTRACK OFF (MT@

MKOFF (Ml)

CONTS (Sl)

THE OFF (TO)

TM FREE (Tl)

TDF P (03)

DA

Dl

PD

R3

MKPZ 6dB

MDS W

DISPOSE ONEOS

DISPOSE ONSWP

DISPOSE TRMATH

MKPAUSE OFF

The instrument preset command, IP executes the following commands:

Clears and writes trace A.

Blanks trace B .

Couples resolution bandwidth.

Couples input attenuation.

Couples step size.

Couples sweep time.

Couples video bandwidth.

Turns off A-B mode.

Sets start frequency

Sets top frequency.

Hold

Selects dBm amplitude units.

Turns off video averaging.

Selects normal detection mode.

Turns off noise markers.

Selects normal detection mode.

Turns on graticule .

Turns on characters.

Selects lOdB/DIV log scale.

Turns off marker tracking.

Turns off markers.

Selects continuous sweep mode.

Turns off threshold.

Selects free run trigger.

Selects 03 output format.

Selects 3072 as the current address.

Selects normal display size.

Puts pen down at current address.

Allows SRQ 110.

Selects data size of one word, which is two 8-bit bytes.

Erases command list associated with the end of the sweep. (See ONEOS.)

Erases command list associated with the beginning of the sweep. (See ONSWF?!)

Erases command list associated with the end of the sweep. (See TRMATH.)

Turns off marker pause mode.

In addition, IP re-assigns user-defined variables to their initial values, specified by the VARDEF command.

134 Programming

(Continued) IP

Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the analyzer, and is a good starting point for many measurement processes, especially when followed by the TS command. (When IP is executed remotely, the analyzer does not necessarily execute a complete sweep.)

OTJTF’UT 718; “1P;TS;”

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 3 5

KEYDEF

Key Define

KEYDEF f u n c t i o n l a b e l

I

Item

KEY NUMBER

FUNCTION LABEL

Description/Default

Integer

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

FUNCDEF statement.

Range Restriction

0 through 999

AA---and-

2- 12 characters required.

The KEYDEF command associates a numbered key with a programming routine, which can be executed remotely or from the front panel.

The program below stores a routine in key 999. The program, contained in lines 20 through 70, increases the reference level until the signal peak is below the reference level. The routine is assigned a name with the FUNC-

DEF command, and then assigned to key 999. Note that the program is delimited with single’ quotation marks.

1 0 OUTPUT 718;“FUNCDEF ROUTINE,” ” ”

20 OTJTPTJT 718;“52; T&El;”

30 OUTPUT 718;“IF MA&IT&L THEN”

40 OUTPUT 718;“REPEAT RL UP;TS;El;”

50 OUTPUT 718;“UNTIL MA,LE,RL”

60 OUTPUT 718;“ENDIF Sl;” ” ”

70 OUTPUT 718;“KEYDEF 999,ROUTINE;”

80 END

I

Line 10:

Lines 20 through 70:

Line 70:

Assign ROUTINE as the name of the routine in lines 20 - 70.

Execute a peak search. If the marker amplitude is greater than the reference level, increase the reference level until it is greater than the marker amplitude.

Store the routine in the analyzer, and assign it to key 999.

To execute key 999 remotely, use the KEYEXC command:

OUTPUT 718; “XEYEXC 999”

1 3 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

KEYDEF

To execute key 999 from the front panel, press these front panel keys:

~@@(g@

Once a key is defined, the routine is saved, even when the analyzer loses power or is preset. Use the DISPOSE command to clear a user-defined key

When queried, KEYDEF returns the command list in a A-block data format. (See DISPOSE, KEYEXC, and

FUNCDEE) l

When quotation marks are nested, use two quotes (“‘I) for the inner marks, and one quote (“) for the outer mark, as shown in lines 10 and 60.

Programming 137

KEYEXC

Key Execute

Item Description/Default Range Restriction

I

KEY NUMBER INTEGER. User-defined key number delcared in KEYDEF statement.

0 to 999

The KEYEXC command executes the specified defined key. The program below executes key 2, which contains a programming routine called M-AIN. The routine consists of several user-defined functions, declared with the

FUNCDEF command, which sweep the analyzer over different frequency ranges.

1 OUTPTJT718;“FUNCDEFM_AIN, “ “PRESET;TS;FIRST;TS;SECOND;TS;THIRD;TS;"""

10 0lJTPUT718;“FUNCDEFPRESET,"“IP;LF;S2;"""

20 OUTPUT718;“FUNCDEFFlRST,"“FA100MZ;FB3OOMZ;"""

30 OUTPUT7l8;“FTJNCDEFSECOND,"“FA5OOMZ;FB7OOMZ;"""

40 OUTPTJT7l8;“FUNCDEFTHIRD,"“FA800MZ;FBlOOOMZ;"""

50 OUTPUT718;“KEYDEF 2,M-AIN;”

50 E N D

138 Programming

KSA

Amplitude in dBm

The KSA command sets the amplitude readouts (reference level, marker, display line, and threshold) to dBm units.

OUTPUT 718;“KSA;"

A

The KSA command is identical to manual operation of the front panel (,,,, (,,,, keys, (See AUNITS.)

Programming 139

KSB

Amplitude in dBmV

The KSB command sets the amplitude readouts (reference level, marker, display line, and threshold) to dBmV units.

OUTPUT 718;“KSB;"

B

The KSB command is identical to manual operation of the front panel m m keys. (See AUNITS.)

1 4 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSC

Amplitude in dBuV

The KSC command sets the amplitude readouts (reference level, marker, display line, and threshold) to dBuV units.

OUTPUT 718; “KSC;”

The KSC command is identical to manual operation of the front panel [,,,, h keys. (See AUNITS.)

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 4 1

KSD

Amplitude in volts

The KSD command sets the amplitude readouts (reference level, marker, display line, and threshold) to V units.

OUTPUT 718;‘KSD;”

D

The KSD command is identical to manual operation of the front panel (,,,, a keys. (See AUNITS.)

1 4 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSE

Title Mode

KSE

Item

Character

REAL

Terminator

Carriage Return

Line Feed etx

Description/Default

Represents text displayed on screen.

Represents text displayed on screen.

Character defined in OT command that terminates text.

Terminates text.

Terminates text.

Terminates text. (End-of-text)

Range Restriction

ASCII codes 32 through 126.

ASCII codes 0 through 255

ASCII code 13

ASCII code 10

The KSE command activates the title mode. This function writes a message in the top CRT display line.

Any character on the controller keyboard can be written. The full width of the display is available for writing a maximum of 58 characters. However, the marker readout may interfere with the last sixteen characters of the title.

The message must be terminated. Terminate the message with one of the following:

A terminator defined with the DT command.

Carriage-return (ASCII 13).

Line-feed (ASCII 10).

End-of-text command (controller dependent).

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 4 3

KSE (Continued)

To erase the message, execute instrument preset (IP) or recall an instrument state with the RCLS or RC command.

The message can also be erased by executing a KSE command that does not contain a message, as in the program below.

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Instrument preset.

Activates the title mode and writes “Adjust Antenna” in the top CRT display line.

Pauses program until CONTINUE is pressed on the HP series 200 controller.

Prints a blank message on the screen; thus blanking the “Adjust Antenna” message.

The HP series 200 computers execute a carriage-return/line-feed whenever the ENTER key is pressed. Thus, lines 20 and 40 of the program above terminate the message this way The same program is shown below, but the

KSE command message is terminated with a terminator defined by the DT command.

10 OUTPUT 718;“DTQ;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“KSEAdjust Antenna@;”

30 PAUSE

40 OUTPUT 718; “KSE”

50 END

Line 20 can also be terminated with a carriage-return this way:

20 OUTPUT 718; “KSEAdjust Antenna”;CHR$(l3)

E

The functions of the KSE command and the m m keys are identical.

1 4 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSF

Shift YTO

The KSF command is a diagnostic aid used for servicing the spectrum analyzer.

The KSF command removes the IF offset from the YIG-tuned oscillator so that the start frequency can be tuned directly from the front panel.

F

The functions of the KSF command and the m [:‘;1 keys are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 4 5

KSG

Video Averaging On

KSG

The KSG command enables video averaging. During video averaging, two traces are displayed simultaneously.

Trace C contains signal responses as seen at the input detector. Trace A or B contains the same responses digitally averaged. The digital reduces the noise floor level, but does not affect the sweep time, bandwidth, or any other analog characteristics of the analyzer.

Before executing KSG, select trace A or B as the active trace (CLRW) and blank the remaining trace.

The active function readout indicates the number of sweeps averaged; the default is 100 unless otherwise specified. Increasing the number of sweeps averaged increases the amount of averaging.

Use KSG to view low level signals without slowing the sweep time. Video averaging can lower the noise floor more than a 1 Hz video bandwidth can, if a large number of sweeps is specified for averaging. Video average may also be used to monitor instrument state changes (such as changing bandwidths or center frequencies) while maintaining a low noise level. (See Chapter 11 in Section I. Also see KSH and VAVG .)

OUTPUT 718;“KSG;"

G

The functions of the KSG command and the @ m keys are identical.

1 4 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSH

Video Averaging off

The KSH command disables $e video averaging function of the analyzer. The KSH command is identical with manual operation of the ( , . I , fz-& keys.

OTJTPUT 718;“KSH;”

(See KSG and VAVG .)

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 4 7

KSI

Reference Level Range (Extended)

The KS1 command extends the analyzer reference level range to maximum limits of - 139.9 dBm and + 60 dBm. The functions of the KS1 command and the m l&, keys are identical.

The lower limit of the reference level depends on resolution bandwidth and scale selection, log or linear. When the reference level is set at minimum, the level may change if either resolution bandwidth or scale selection is changed.

The table below shows the relationship between the scale and/or the resolution bandwidth, and the reference level range.

The extended reference level range is disabled with an instrument preset (II?)

Scale log log linear linear

Resolution

Bandwidth

11 kHz

13 kHz

IikHz

13 kHz

Minimum reference level with extended reference level

10 dB attenuation 0 dB attenuation

- 129.9 dBm

- 109.9 dBm

- 109.9 dBm

- 89.9 dBm

- 139.9 dBm

- 119.9 dBm

- 119.9 dBm

- 99.9 dBm

1 4 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSJ

DAC Control

KSJ

Item

Carriage Return

Line Feed etx

Description/Default

Sets all DACs to the specified value.

Sets all DACs to the specified value.

Asserts end of text.

Range Restriction

ASCII code 13

ASCII code 10

The KSJ command is a diagnostic aid used for servicing the spectrum analyzer.

The KSJ command allows the DACs on the Al6 Scan Generator and the A19 Digital-Analog Converter to be manually controlled from the front panel.

J

The functions of the KSJ command and the (,,,, m keys are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 4 9

KSK

Marker to Next Peak

If an active marker is on screen, KSK moves the marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.

See MKPK.

The functions of the KSK command and the (snln b keys are identical.

1 5 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSL

Marker Noise Off

The KSL command disables the noise level function which displays the RMS noise level at the marker. (See

MKNOISE or KSM.)

KSL does not blank the marker. Use MKOFF or Ml to blank the marker. (Because MKOFF and M2 remove the marker from the screen, they also disable the noise level mode.)

10 OIJTRJT718;“MKF50MZ;"

20 OUTPUT718;“KSM;"

30 OUTPUT718;“KSL;"

40 OUTPUT 718;“Ml;"

50 END

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30:

Positions marker at 50 MHz.

Selects noise level mode.

Turns off noise level mode.

Line 40: Blanks marker.

L

The functions of the KSL command and [,,,, a keys are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 5 1

KSM

Marker Noise On

KSM

The KSM command displays the RMS noise level at the marker. The RMS value is normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth.

The KSM command averages the amplitude of 32 elements about the location of the marker, in the frequency or time scale. The average value is converted to the current reference level unit (dBm, dBmV dBuV, or volts).

The noise level function measures accurately to within 10 dB of the analyzer’s own internal noise level. The readout resolution is + - 0.1 dB.

OUTPUT 718;“KSM;”

M

The functions of the KSM command and the [,,,, IIM*lll keys are identical. See also MKNOISE and KSO.

1 5 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

The KSN command moves the active marker to the minimum value detected. (See also MKMIN.)

OUTPUT 718; “KSN; ”

The functions of the KSN and MKN commands are identical. See MKPK.

N

The functions of the KSN command and the a m keys are identical.

Marker Minimum

(MKMIN)

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 5 3

KS0

Marker Span

(MKSP)

The KS0 command operates only when the delta marker is on. (See MKD or M3.) When the delta marker is on, and KS0 is executed, the delta marker and active marker specifies start frequency, and the right marker specifies stop frequency If delta marker is off, there is no operation.

OUTPUT 718;“KSO;”

The functions of the MKSP and KS0 command are identical.

0

The functions of the KS0 command and the m m keys are identical.

1 5 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

KSP

HP-IB Address

Item

Integer

Description/Default Range Restriction

Id thru 30

The KSP command enables the user to display or change the current read/write HP-IB address of the analyzer.

keys.

OUTPUT 718;“KSP 15HZ;”

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 5 5

KSQ

Band Unlock

The KSQ command unlocks the analyzer from a specific band (harmonic number). The functions of the KSQ command and the front panel m Q

@sJ keys are identical.

Either one of the full span keys, @ or m, will also unlock a preselected band.

OUTPUT 718; “KSQ;”

The functions of the KSQ and HNUNLK commands are identical.

156 Programming

KSR

Diagnostics On

The KSR command is a diagnostic aid used for servicing the spectrum analyzer.

The KSR command displays specific internal frequency control parameters in the upper left corner of the CRT display. These parameters are the programmed values determined by the Controller Assembly, A15.

The following is a sample of what might appear when KSR is executed.

Line -1:

Line 2:

Line 3:

(1) 400

(2) P)BpI

(3) 1 25 13

(4) lSg.769 231

( 5 ) 15kwBer m!J

(6) 168.816 Bldp,

Line 4:

Line 5:

Line 6:

Displays the YIG-tuned oscillator (YTO) start frequency in GHz.

Displays the 2@/3pI loops frequency.

Displays the band number, M phase-lock-loop divide number, and N phase-lock-loop divide number.

Displays the M/N loop frequency.

Displays the phase-lock-loop 2 (PLL2) voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) frequency.

Displays the phase-lock-loop 3 (PLL3) voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) frequency.

NOTE

In line 6, an asterisk (*) appears in front of the VCO frequency when the span width is greater than the LO harmonic number times 100 kHz, or the span width is less than or equal to the LO harmonic number times 5 MHz.

The asterisk indicates that the VCO frequency is not used to determine the 2121/3121 loop frequency

R

The functions of the KSR command and the @ [:::;Ll keys are identical.

Programming 157

KSS

Fast HP-IB Remote Operation

The KSS command enables fast HP-IB operation that allows the analyzer to operate faster than normal under remote operation.

Fast HP-IB operation (KSS) remains in effect until deactivated by one of the following commands: IP LF, KSU,

RCLS, or a local message (e.g. LOCAL 718).

For further information on the KSS command, refer to Appendix E.

S

The functions of the KSS command and the @ @ keys are identical.

158 Programming

KS-I-

Fast Preset 2-22 GHz

The KST command enables a fast preset (2-22 GHz), similar to an instrument preset (IP) ypt that the internal bus check is not performed. The functions of the KST command and the front panel m keys are identical.

For additional information on fast operation, refer to Appendix E.

Programming 159

KSU

Fast Preset External Mixer

The KSU command presets the external mixer mode by setting the frequency range to 18.0-26.5 GHz. This frequency range is derived from the 6th harmonic of the analyzer local oscillator. The functions of the KSU command and the front panel m U4 keys are identical.

0

‘When KSU is executed, the analyzer does a fast preset (similar to KST) and readies the analyzer for external mixing by locking the frequency range to the 6th harmonic. The current harmonic number is displayed above the graticule, and the current conversion loss is displayed to the left of the graticule.

If a harmonic lock (such as KSt) is in effect, an “I.” is also displayed following the current harmonic number.

Changing the frequency range with start and stop frequencies automatically changes the local oscillator frequency to the corresponding harmonic.

OTJTFVT 718;“KSU;"

160 Programming

reai i

KSV

Frequency Offset

The KSV command selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts, such as center frequency Relative values, like span and delta marker, are not offset.

After execution, the KSV command displays the frequency offset in the active function readout. The offset value is always displayed beneath the CRT graticule line, as long as the offset is in effect.

10 OTJTPUT718;“KSV100MZ;"

2 0 ENTER718;N

30 PRINTN

4 0 E N D

When queried(?), KSV returns the offset value as a real number, followed by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify (EOI) is asserted with the line feed.

V

The functions of the KSV command and the [,,,, [=I keys are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 1 6 1

KSW

Error Correction Routine

The KSW command executes a built-in error correction routine. This routine takes approximately 30 seconds to run and when completed, the instrument returns to its previous state. The functions of the KSW command and the front panel @ W keys are identical.

CEI

The error correction routine measures and records the amplitude and frequency error factors with reference to the

100 MHz calibration output (CAL OUT) signal, the 1 MHz resolution bandwidth, the 10 dB input attenuator, and the step gains. The “CORR’D” message to the left of the graticule indicates the routine has been run and the display has been corrected.

Use the error correction routine to ensure data has been corrected to the most recent calibration.

Before executing KSW, recall registers 8 and 9, follow the calibration procedure described in the introduction in

Section I.

10 OTJTPUT 718;“RCLS 8;”

20 PAUSE

30 OUTPUT 718; “RCLS 9;”

40 PAUSE

50 OUTPTJT 718; “KSW,”

When the routine is completed, the error correction data can be displayed on the CRT with the KSw (display correction data) command. (See KSw.)

Accuracy of an amplitude measurement can be improved by taking advantage of the correction data stored in the analyzer by the KSW command. For additional information on improving the amplitude accuracy, see the KS91 command.

162 Programming

KSX

Correction Factors On

KSX

The KSX command automatically incorporates the error correction factors into measurements taken by the analyzer. The CRT readout values are automatically offset by the error correction value. The functions of the KSX command and the front panel [,,I, @ keys are identical.

The error correction factors are generated by an error correction routine. Use the KSW command to run the routine. (To view the correction factors, execute KSW.)

For additional information on amplitude accuracy, see KS91, KSW, KSw, and KSY

OUTF'UT 718; “KSX;”

Programming 163

KSY

Correction Factors Off

The KSY command prevents the error correction factors from being used in measurements taken by the analyzer.

The functions of the KSY command and the front panel m ’ 0

OUTPUT 718;“KSY;" keys are identical.

5 KSW, KSw, and KSX.

164 Programming

Reference Level Offset

(ROFFSET)

Item

REAL

Description/Default

Default value for units is dBm (DM)

Range Restriction

+-3OOdB

The KSZ command offsets all amplitude readyts on the CRT display without affecting the trace. The functions of the KSZ command and the front panel (,,,,

[-Tq keys are identical.

Once activated, the KSZ command displays the amplitude offset in the active function block. And, as long as the offset is in effect while doing other functions, the offset is displayed to the left of the graticule.

OD’I’PUT 718;“KSZ - 12DM;”

The functions of the KSZ and ROFFSET commands are identical.

Programming 165

KSa

Normal Detection

The KSa command selects normal input detection for displaying trace information. This enables a detection algorithm called the Rosenfell detection, which selectively chooses between positive and negative peak values.

The choice depends on the type of video signal present.

OTJTPUT 718; “KSa; ”

166 Programming

KSb

Positive-Peak Detection

The KSb command selects positive-peak input detection for displaying trace information. During this mode, the trace elements are updated only when the detected signal level is greater than the previous signal level. (See DET.)

OUTPUT 718; “KSb;” b

The KSb function and the front-panel m Ial function are identical.

Programming 167

KSc

A+B+A

(APB)

The KSc command adds trace A to trace B, point by point, and sends the result to trace A. Thus, KSc can restore the original trace after an A - minus - B function (AMB) is executed.

A + B - > A

To successfully add all trace elements, place trace A in VIEW or BLANK display mode before executing KSc.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 OUTPUT @Sa;“IP,LF;”

30 OUTPUT @Sa;“CFlOOMZ;SP2MZ;”

40 OUTPUT @Sa; “A4; ”

50 OUTPUT @Sa;“Bl;CF2OOMZ;”

60 OUTPUT @a; 24; ”

70 OUTPUT @Sa;“A3;B3;”

80 OUTPUT @Sa; “KSc; ”

90 E N D

Line 20: Presets the instrument.

Line 30: Sets trace A to 100 MHz center frequency with 2 MHz frequency span.

Line 40: Blanks trace A.

Line 50: Selects trace B and sets center frequency to

200 MHz.

Line 60: Blanks trace B.

Line

70: Views trace A and trace B.

Line 80: Combines the amplitude of trace B with trace A and displays this combination as trace A.

The functions of the KSc and APB commands are identical.

The KSc function and the front-panel (,*,, b are identical.

168 Programming

KSd

Negative-Peak Detection

The KSd command selects negative-peak input detection for displaying trace information. During this mode, the trace elements are updated only when the detected signal level is less than the previous signal level. (See DET)

The functions of the KSd command and the I,-] b keys are identical.

Programming 169

KSC?

Sample Detection

The KSe command selects the sample detection modeefor displaying trace information. The KSe command is identical with manual operation of the front panel m I-] keys.

In sample mode, the instantaneous signal value of the final analog-to-digital conversion for the sample period is stored in trace memory. As sweep time increases, many analog-to-digital conversions occur in each period, but only the final signal value is stored and displayed.

Sample detection mode is automatically selected for video averaging and noise level measurements.

OUTF'UT 718;“KSe;"

The above program line selects the sample detection mode of the analyzer.

170 Programming

KSf

Protect Instrument State During Power Loss

Use the KSf command to recall any instrument configuration in the event of power loss.

If KSf is the last command executed, and the analyzer loses power, the instrument state at the time of power loss is restored when power returns.

If any spectrum analyzer command is executed, or any front panel key is pressed after KSf is executed, the analyzer configuration can not be regained if power is lost.

The functions of the KSf command and the m b keys are identical.

Programming 17 1

CRT Beam Off

The KSg command turns off the CRT beam power supply to avoid unnecessary wear of the CRT in cases where the arlyzer is in unattended operation. The KSg command is identical with manual operation of the front panel

@@jjj keys.

The KSg command does not affect HP-IB input/output of instrument function values or trace information.

OUTPUT 718;“KSg;”

The above program line turns the CRT beam power supply off.

172 Programming

KSh

CRT Beam On

The KSh command turns the CRT beam on and is activated automatically with an instrument preset. The KSh command is identical with manual operating of the front panel [,.lrr h

Iz] keys.

OUTPUT 718;“KSh;"

The above program line activates the CRT beam power supply of the analyzer.

Programming 173

KSi

Exchange B and C

WW

The KSi command exchanges traces C and B, point by point.

Note trace C is not a swept, active function. Therefore, exchange traces C and B as follows:

1. Select single sweep mode (SNGLS) .

2. Select desired analyzer settings.

3. Take one complete sweep (TS) .

4. Exchange data.

This procedure ensures that the current settings of the analyzer are reflected in the transferred data.

When transferring data from one trace to another, only amplitude information is exchanged, located in display memory addresses 1025 through 2025 and 2049 through 3049.

The functions of the KSi and BXC commands are identical.

i

The functions of the KSi command and the m m keys are identical.

174 Programming

KSj

View Trace C

The KSj command displays trace C. Amplitude information for trace C is contained in display memory addresses

3073 through 4073. The KSj command displays this trace information on the analyzer display.

KSj also sends the instruction word, 1048 l

, to address 3072. Therefore, any information stored in address 3072 is lost when KSj is executed. If you have used address 3072 for a graphics program or a label, you may wish to save its contents before executing KSj.

Trace C is not a swept, active trace, as are traces A and B. Send data to trace C with these commands:

BTC or KS1 transfers trace B amplitude information to trace C.

BXC or KSi exchanges trace B and trace C amplitude information.

DW or KS125 sends trace information to trace C.

Transfer trace amplitude information as follows:

1. Select single sweep mode (SNGLS or S2).

2. Select desired analyzer settings.

3. Sweep analyzer (TS) .

4. Transfer data.

The program below demonstrates KSj .

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20

OUTPUT @Sa;"IP;LF;"

30 OUTPTJT @Sa; “A4;52; "

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“B1;CF2OOMZ;SP2MZ;TS;"

50 OUTPUT @Sa“KSi;"

60 OUTFWT asa; “B4;"

70 OUTPUT QSa;“KSj;"

50 E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Presets the instrument.

Stores and blanks trace A. Selects single sweep mode (S2).

Selects trace B. Sets the analyzer to 200 MHz center frequency with a 2 MHz frequency span.

Takes one complete sweep of trace B at the current settings (TS) .

Programming 175

KSj (Continued)

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Exchanges trace B and trace C. Trace C (containing no trace data) now appears on the display as trace B. The asterisk (‘) in the top right corner of the analyzer does not agree with the current display.

Stores and blanks trace B (containing no trace data and an asterisk in the top right corner).

Views trace C .

Commands BTC, KSl, BXC, and KSi manipulate trace amplitude information in display memory addresses

3074 through 4073. They do not manipulate data in the remaining display addresses that are allocated to trace C: addresses 4073 through 4095, and 3072. These addresses are available, in addition to address 3073 and 4074, for custom graphics programming or labels. (See Appendix B.) j

The functions of the KSj command and (,,,,, [-I keys are identical. (See VIEW and BLANK.) l

1048 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 3073 through 4073 to zero and draws the trace dimly.

176 Programming

KSk

Blank Trace C

The KSk command blanks trace C. Amplitude information for trace C is contained in display memory addresses

3073 through 4073. The KSk command blanks trace C but does not alter the information stored in these addresses.

KSk also sends the instruction word, 1044*, to address 3072. Therefore, any information stored in address 3072 is lost when KSk is executed. If you have used address 3072 for a graphics program, or label, you may wish to save its contents before executing KSk.

k

The functions of the KSk command and 11-1 11-11 keys are identical. (See KSj, VIEW and BLANK.) l

1044 is a machine instruction word that sets addresses 3073 through 4073 to zero and skips to the next page memory.

Programming 177

KSI

Transfer B to C

W-C)

The KS1 command transfers trace B to trace C.

Note trace C is not a swept, active function. Therefore, transfer trace information to trace C as follows:

1. Select single sweep mode (S2).

2. Select desired analyzer settings.

3. Take one complete sweep (TS) .

4. Transfer data.

This procedure ensures that the current settings of the analyzer are reflected in the transferred data.

10 0UTPUT718;“IP;LF;TS;SNGLS;A3;"

20 OUTPUT718;“B1;CF20MZ;TS;B4;"

30 OUTPTJT718;“KSl;KSj"

31 LOCAL718

40 E N D

When transferring trace data from one trace to another, only the trace information from 1001 display memory addresses is transferred out of the total 1024 available display memory addresses. Information in address 1024 and addresses 2026 through 2047 is not transferred. (Addresses 2026 through 2047 are usually used for custom graphics.)

The functions of the KS1 and BTC commands are identical.

1

The functions of the KSI command and the m [I-,DIl keys are identical.

178 Programming

KSm

Graticule Off

The KSm command blanks the graticule on the analyzer display. The KSm command is identical with manual operation of the front panel m b keys.

See also GRAT.

Programming 179

KSn

Graticule On

The KSn command turns on the graticule of the analyzer display. The KSn command is identical with manual operation of the front panel I,nml b keys.

OUTPUT 718;“KSn;"

See GRAT and KSm .

I80 Programming

KSo

Characters Off

The KSo command blanks the annotation on the analyzer display. The functions of the KSo command and the front panel [,.,,, & keys are identical.

OUTPUT 718; “KSo;”

See ANNOT and KSp.

Programming 18 1

W

Characters On

The KSp command turns on all annotation on the analyzer display. The functions of the KSp command and the front panel (,., p keys are identical.

OUTPUT 718;“KSp;”

See KSo and ANNOT.

182 Programming

Step Gain Off

The KSq command is a diagnostic aid used for servicing the spectrum analyzer.

The KSq command uncouples the step gain amplifiers (from attenuator changes) of the IF section (A4A5 Step

Gain and A4A8 Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter).

The functions of the KSq command and the (,.,, & key are identical.

Programming 183

KSr

Service Request 102

The KSr command sends service request 102 to the controller, notifying the controller that the operator has requested service. See Appendix D.

fLlN

The functions of the KSr command and the (,,I, [ keys are identical.

184 Programming

KSt

Harmonic Lock

(HNLOCK)

The KSt command (harmonic lock) limits the tuning range of the analyzer to a specific harmonic of the local oscillator as selected by start and stop frequencies. The functions of the KSt command and the front panel (,.,

I-1 keys are identical.

When executing a harmonic lock, use the following method to ensure the desired harmonic is selected:

1. Select desired harmonic by setting a start frequency within the desired band. (See Tuning Curves in Appendix

F for frequency range of each harmonic.)

2. Set analyzer to single sweep mode. Single sweep ensures the desired harmonic is selected when executing a bank lock.

3. Execute KSt to lock the desired harmonic.

4. Set analyzer to continuous sweep mode.

5. Reset desired start and stop frequencies.

Remember, before you can change the frequency range to another harmonic, you must unlock the band with the

KSQ (harmonic unlock) command.

KSR (Diagnostics On) can be activated, at any time, to display the local oscillator harmonic number in the upper left comer of the CRT display

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 OTJTTTJT @Sa; “Zp; ”

30 OUTPUT @Sa;“FA8.0GZ;”

40 OUTPlJT @Sa;“S2;TS;”

80 OTJTPUT @Sa; “KSt; ”

80 OTJTPUT @Sa:“Sl;”

70 OUTPUT @Sa;“FA8.0GZ;FB12.8GZ;”

80 E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Presets the instrument.

Sets a start frequency of 6.0 GHz which automatically selects the second harmonic.

Sets the analyzer to single sweep mode and takes one complete sweep of the current display

Locks the second harmonic of the local oscillator.

Resets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode.

Sets the frequency range of the second harmonic.

Programming 185

KSu

Marker Stop

(X--

The KSu command stops the sweep at the active marker. (See also MKSTOF?)

The functions of the KSu command and the @ b keys are identical.

186 Programming

KSv

External Marker Signal Identifier

The KSv command enables a signal identifier routine that use the active marker to automatically identify the signal under observation in the external mixing mode.

OUTPUT 718;“KSv;”

If a marker is present on screen when KSv is executed, KSv determines the frequency and mixing harmonic of the signal at the marker. If a marker is not on screen, KSv fit places a marker at the highest peak on screen, and then determines the frequency and mixing harmonic of that signal. If no identification can be made, the original state, prior to executing the KSv command, is automatically restored. If this should occur, change the harmonics and amplitude delta values used by the signal identification routine, and then reexecute KSv. (See SIGDEL, NSTART and NSTOI?)

If a harmonic lock (KSt) is in effect when the KSv command is executed, the lock is restored when the identification process is finished.

The functions of the SIGID and KSv commands are identical.

The functions of the KSv command and the [,,,, & keys are identical.

Programming 187

KSw

View Correction Data

The KSw command displays the correction data of the error correction routine of the analyzer. KSW executes the correction routine. (See KSW.) The functions of the KSw command and the front panel i w identical.

Correction data can also be transferred to the controller by executing the KSw (display correction routine) command. The correction data is transferred in sequence as a series of 43 strings using the following program:

10 DIMA$(1:43)[80]

20 0lJTPUT718;“KSw;"

30 FORN=lTO43

40 ENTER718;A$[N]

80 N E X T N

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30 to 50:

Dimensions string array storage (in the controller memory) for correction data.

Sends correction data to controller.

Sequentially stores correction data in array.

The content of each string is the error in dB or Hz for a specific control setting relative to a set of standard settings determined at the factory. Strings 6 through 29 contain the amplitude and frequency errors displayed on CRT lines

6 through 17. Data in strings 1 through 5 correspond to CRT lines 1 through 5, and data in strings 30 through 43 correspond to lines 18 through 31. The errors listed should be within the specification listed on the Error Correction Routine Table.

For additional information on the error correction routine, see Error Correction Routine in Chapter 11 of Section I.

188 Programming

Error Correction Table

Parameter

LOG and LIN scale, BW <lOO kHz

LOG 10 dB/

L O G 5dB/

L O G 2dB/

LOG 1 dB/

RES BW = 3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

LOG and LIN scale, BW 2 100 kHz

Step Gains = A20

A10

SG20-2

SG20- 1

SGlO

LG20

LGlO

RF ATTENUATOR = 20 dB

20 dB

30 dB

40 dB

50 dB

60 dB

70 dB

* t t

1 i

Specification

+ 1 dB typical k (0.5 dB - 1 dB reading)

+ 0.5 dB

&ldB’

*

*0.5dB’

*ldB’

+ 1 dB typical f 0.6 dB

+ l.OdB

-+ 1.0 dB typical

+ 0.2 dB typical l

Specifications for ail Resolution Bandwidths are referenced to the 1 MHz

Resolution Bandwidth. The frequency error terms are for error correction only.

(Continued)

KSw

Programming 189

KSx

External Trigger

The KSx command activates the normal external trigger mode, but eliminates the automatic refresh for sweeptimes less than 20 msec. (The T3 and TM commands do not inhibit the automatic refresh.) The functions of the

KSx command and the front panel m $ keys are identical.

When the KSx command is executed, the RF input signal is displayed only when the external trigger signal exceeds the threshold of the trigger level.

OUTPUT 718; “KSx;”

190 Programming

KSY

Video Trigger

The KSy command activates the normal video trigger mode, but eliminates the automatic refresh for sweeptimes less than 20 msc. (The T4 and TM commands do not inhibit the automatic refresh.) The functions of the KSy command and the front panel (,., ’

E3

Trigger keys are identical.

When the KSy command is executed, the RF input signal is displayed only when the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the input signal, exceeds the threshold of the trigger level.

OTJTPUT 718;“KSy;"

Programming 19 1

KSz

Storage Address

The KSz command displays the specified display memory address of the analyzer from 0 to 4095. If an address is not specified, the analyzer displays the current address. The functions of the KSz command and the front panel keys are identical.

El zo

(D1

The KSz command has the same function as the DA command.

OUTF’UT 718; “K&y ”

For additional information on the KSz command, see DA.

192 Programming

KS,

Mixer Level

(ML)

KS,

The KS, command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the reference level.

The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. When KS, is activated, the effective mixer level can be set from - 10 dBm * to - 70 dBm in 10 dB steps. Instrument preset (IP) selects -

10 dBm.

The program line below sets the mixer level to - 40 dBm

OUTPUT 718;“KS, - 40DM;”

As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically changes to limit the maximum signal at the mixer input to - 40 dBm for signals less than or equal to the reference level.

The functions of the KS, and ML commands, and the (,., ($ keys are identical. See also AT l

In the extended reference level range, the effective mixer level can be set to 0 dBm.

Programming 193

KS=

Automatic Preselector Tracking

Use the KS= command to reinstate automatic preselector tracking after KS/ has been executed. Normally, the center of the preselector filter automatically tracks signal responses in the four frequency bands of the 2 to 22 GHz range.

The KS/ command allows manual adjustment of the preselector tracking. The PP command automatically optimizes preselector tracking at any one frequency.

OUTPUT 718; “KS = ;”

The functions of the KS = command and the (,,lrrl & keys are identical.

(See KS/ and PI?)

194 Programming

w

Lock Registers

The KS( command secures the contents of registers one through six. When the registers are secured, the SV and

SAVE commands cannot save more instrument states in the registers, but instead write “SAVE LOCK” on the analyzer display. To save an instrument state in a locked register, first execute KS) to unlock the registers.

The recall function of the analyzer is not affected by this function.

OUTPUT 718;“KS(;"

(

The functions of the KS( command and the (,.,,, [,,, keys are identical.

The KS( command also protects the contents of any user-defined softkeys when the analyzer is under manual operation. During manual operation, softkeys are loaded by pressing the 2 information erases the original contents of the softkey. If KS( has been execu ed, pressing softkey. Thus, existing softkey contents cannot be altered. Execute KS) to unsecure the softkey’s:

Programming 195

Unlock Registers

The KS) command unlocks the registers where instrument states are stored with SV and SAVE commands. The functions of the KS) command and the front panel (,.,, )

(,,,, keys are identical.

When the registers are unlocked, new instrument states can be saved in registers one through six. Each time new states are stored, the original register contents are erased.

The recall function of the analyzer is not affected by this function.

OUTF’UT 718; “KS);”

The KS) command also unlocks user-defined softkeys, which are locked during manual operation only, by the KS( command.

See KS(.

196 Programming

KSI

The KS1 command writes the instruction word or data value into the specified display memory address. The functions of the KS1 command, the front panel [,,,) 1 keys, and the DW command are all identical.

0 iI3

The sample program lines below demonstrate how to format the KS1 command.

10 OUTPTJT 718;“KSI;"

20 OU'TPTJT718;"KS";CHR$(124)

30 OUTPUT718 USING“K,B";“KS",124

For additional information on display write, refer to the DW command.

Programming 197

KS#

The KS# command turns off the YIG#tuned mixed (YTX) self-heating correction factor. The functions of the KS# keys are identical.

Normally, preselector tracking is controlled by the preselector digital-to-analog converter (DAC) , and the thermal correction factor determined by the microprocessor. When KS# is executed, the thermal correction factor is not applied to the preselector tracking. Therefore, a DAC value is the only condition affecting preselector tracking.

Executing an instrument preset (IP) is the only way to re-enable the YTX self-heating correction factor.

OUTPU'l'718;“KS#;"

198 Programming

K S /

Manual Preselector Tracking

Use the KS/ command to manually adjust the internal preselector tracking. Normally, preselector tracking is automatically adjusted. (See PP and KS = .) However, the KS/ function is useful for adjusting preselector tracking of unstable signals, such as drifting signals or pulse modulated signals.

To manually adjust tracking, execute KS/ and then use the spectrum analyzer data knob to peak the signal response at the marker position. If no marker is on screen, KS/ automatically places a marker at the signal with greatest amplitude.

When KS/ is executed, the active function readout displays a number, from B to 63, which corresponds to the preselector frequency Changing the active function readout by 1, shifts the preselector tuning by 1.13 MHz.

Once the preselector tracking is altered with the data knob, tracking is no longer automatically adjusted. Executing

KS = is the only way to re-enable automatic preselector tracking.

OTJTPTJT 718;“KW;"

/

The functions of the KSE command and the @ @ keys are identical.

(See KS = and Pl?)

Programming 199

KS39

Write to Display Memory

39

‘

ANALYZER

MEMORY r ADDAESS y/1 DATA I r TERMINATOR 7

KS

I Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents the analyer display memory address. Must be sent to analyzer as two 8-bit bytes.

Represents amplitude data. Each data value must be sent to analyzer as tow 8-bit bytes.

Range Restriction

1 to 4095

INTEGER 0 to 1022

Number of addresses between starting address and 4095.

KS39 is the general purpose command for writing data into the analyzer display memory. Any starting display address is allowed with KS39. Up to 4096 display memory values can be sent in one operation. Data send with

KS39 must be in 2-byte binary format, 02, and be terminated with a single binary byte value of 32. The number of bytes sent to the analyzer is limited by the number of addresses between the starting address and address 4095, the last display memory address. The display address must be sent to the analyzer in the 2-byte binary format.

KS123 and KS39 are often used together to read and write the contents of display memory The following program demonstrates this.

10 OPTION BASE 1

20 DIM M$(8)[ 10241

30 OWUT 718;“02;"

40 D a = 0

50 !

6 0 FORI=lTO8

70 OUTPUT 718;“DA”;Da;“;KS”;CHR$(123)

80

9 0

ENTER 718 USING “#,1024A”;M$(I)

Da=Da+512 loo NEXT1

110 I

120 OUTPUT 718;“;A3;B3;Ml;L0;KSm;KSo;”

130 OWUT 718;“EM;KSI;EM; EX;KSi;EM;”

140 PRINT “OBSERVE BLANK 8CREEN;PRESS CONTINUE”

150 PAUSE

160 !

170 OUTPUT 718 USING “#,K,B,W,“;“KS”;39;0

180 OUTPUT 718 USING “8(K),B”;M$( * );32

190 OUTPUT 718;“;Al;”

200 END

200 Programming

(Continued)

KS39

Lines 10 to 100:

Lines 120 to 150:

Line 170:

Line 180:

Line 190:

Sends the content of trace memory to the controller. Refer to the description of the KS123 mnemonic for a complete explanation of these lines.

Erases trace A, B, and C memories and blanks the annotation and graticule.

Sends the KS39 command and the display memory address to the analyzer. The USING part of the OUTPUT statement formats the controller to send the KS as a compact field, the 39 as a single binary byte, and the PI (display address) as a two byte binary word, the # sign suppresses the trailing CR/LF so it will not be send as part of the display memory data.

Sends the display memory data contained in array M$ to the analyzer and terminates the

KS39 command with a 32. The USING part of the OUTPUT statement formats the controller to end the contents of the array as eight strings and the 32 as a single binary byte.

Al sets trace A to the clear-write mode. HD clears the active function block of the display, which contained a display address.

The KS39 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single &bit byte.

Programming 201

KS43

Frequency Limit SRQ

43 l

K S

The KS43 command tells the analyzer to send the service request (SRQ) called “102” to the controller, if the analyzer current frequency band has been exceeded. In effect, KS43 lets the controller determine if the analyzer

(because of commands given by the controller which exceed the analyzer frequency band) has automatically readjusted the start or stop frequency to keep it in the current band, or changed bands.

When the controller gives a command that exceeds the frequency range of the current band, the analyzer status byte is set to 66, which is equivalent to an octal 102. The analyzer then notifies the controller that a service request is ready. It does this by setting the HP-IB SRQ line true. To determine which service request the analyzer is indicating, the controller must do a serial poll of the analyzer status byte.

Note that service request 140 (illegal command) is always allowed by the analyzer. If the analyzer receives an illegal command from the controller, it set its status byte to 96 (octal 140).

The following program demonstrates the KS43 command. Note that the 43 in KS43 must be sent to the analyzer as a single binary byte.

10 OWUT718;“IP;LF;"

20 OWUT718USING“K,B";“KS";43

30 OWUT718;“CF1OOMZ"

40 OWUT718;“FAlOMZ;FB3GZ"

50 ! NOTE “SRQ 102" message on analyzer’s CRT

60 E N D

The FB3GZ command exceeds the frequency range of the O-2.5 GHz band. This causes the analyzer to display the SRQ 102 message. Note that when this program is run, the analyzer automatically changes the stop frequency

(FB) to 2 GHz, instead of 3 GHz.

The KS43 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single 8-bit byte.

202 Programming

KS91

Read Amplitude Error

KS 91

KS91 sends an amplitude correction value to the controller. This correction value improves measurement accuracy when it is subtracted from the amplitude measured by the analyzer.

The analyzer compiles the KS91 correction value from calibration data stored in its memory by the KSW command, the error correction routine. When the KS91 command is executed, the correction value is compiled from those parts of the KSW data that apply to the present instrument state. Execute KSW before KS91 to ensure the correction value is based on recent KSW data. Execute KS91 immediately after making your amplitude measurement to ensure the correction value is based on the right instrument settings.

The KSX (Use Correction Data) command puts the analyzer into a “corrected” mode. In this mode the analyzer automatically corrects its measurements with the data collected by the KSW command. The KSX command makes amplitude corrections by adjusting the IF gain. Because of the inaccuracies inherent in changing the IF gain, the correction mode established by the KSX command is up to 0.4 dB less accurate than the external mathematical correction made with the KS91 correction value.

The following program gives a sample readout of the KS91 correction value.

10 OUTPUT 718;“KSW;”

2 0 !

30 !

Any amplitude measurement routine

4 0 I

50 OWTJT 718 USING “K,B”;“KS”;91

60 ENTER 718;E

70 PRINT “AMPLITUDE ERROR IS “;E;” dB”

8 0 E N D

The correction value stored in variable E improves the amplitude measurement accuracy when it is subtracted from the measured amplitude.

The KS91 command cannot be executed from the front panel l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single E&bit byte.

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 0 3

KS92

Write in Display Units

DL

TH

M2

M3

KS 02 l r DATA I integer

D M

Da

H Z

@

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents display line, threshold, active marker, or delta marker amplitude in display units.

Range Restriction

1 to 1022

The KS92 command tells the analyzer to receive the display line (DL), threshold line (TH), marker normal (M2), or delta marker (M3) position in display units. The program line below shows the KS92 syntax.

OWTJT 718 USING “K,B,K”;“DL KS”;92;“300HZ;”

The HZ keyword is this line functions as a terminator for the DL command. Without the HZ keyword, the DL command will not work. When used with KS92, the DL, TH, M2, and M3 commands must be terminated with one of the following keyword terminators: DM, DB, or HZ.

The KS92 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single 8-bit byte.

204

Programming

KS94

Read LO Harmonic Number

KS 84

4t

The KS94 command reads the analyzer current LO harmonic number. On execution of KS94, the analyzer sends a binary code to the controller, which represents the LO harmonic number. The decimal equivalent of this binary code represents the LO harmonic number such that B represents the 1st harmonic, 1 represents the 2nd harmonic, 2 represents the 3rd harmonic, and so forth.

The analyzer binary code is not followed by a terminator, Therefore, the controller must terminate its own ENTER command, which it uses to read the binary code. This is the function of the # sign in line 20 of the following program. This program reads the current LO harmonic number and prints it on the controller CRT

10 OWUT718USING“K,B";“KS";94

20 ENTER718USING“B,#";H

30 PRINTH

40 END

The KS94 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single 8-bit byte.

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 0 5

KS 123

Read Display Memory

123 t

KS

The KS123 command sends the contents of display memory to the controller. Thus, the controller “reads” display memory.

Starting at a designated address, KS123 sends 1001 of the 4096 analyzer display memory values to the controller. The analyzer output format and display memory address must be specified before executing KS123.

Follow the three steps listed below to send any section (up to 1001 addresses long) of display memory.

1. Specify the first display memory address of the section to be read.

2. Format a string or string array in the controller to store the exact number of values you need.

3. Terminate the KS123 command with a LOCAL 718 or an OUTPUT statement.

The KS123 command tells the analyzer to “wait” until 1001 memory values are read. If the controIIer does not read all 1001 memory values, the program must terminate this “wait” mode with step 3. The sample program below reads 10 memory values, starting at the center of trace A.

10 OPTIONBASE

20 INTEGERA(10)

30 !

40 OWUT718USING“K,B";“O1;DA500;KS";123

50 ENTER718;A(*)

60 OWUT 718;“;"

70 LOCAL718

80 !

90 FORI=ltolB

100 PRINT A(1)

110 NEXT1

120 E N D

If KS123 is used with DA1 or DA1025, it imitates the TA and TB commands; however, TA and TB are slightly faster and therefore preferable. The only efficient way to read the entire contents of trace C memory, however, is with KS123. This is done by executing a DA3073 before the KS123 command, and dimensioning enough controller memory for 1001 display values. To read individual values of trace data, use the DR command.

KS123 can also send all display memory contents (4096 values) to the controller. This is done with a program loop that advances the display address by one and executes subsequent KS123 commands. The program below is an example of this application.

206 Programming

(Continued)

KS 123

10 OPTIONBASE 1

2 0 DIM M$(B)[ 10241

3 0 O U T P U T 718;“02;”

4 0 Da=0

8 0 !

60 FORI=lTO8

7 0 OUTPUT 718;“DA”;Da;“;KS”;CHB$( 123)

8 0

90

ENTER 718 USING “#,1024A”;M$(I)

Da=Da+512

100 NEXT1

110 !

120 OUTPUT 718;“;A3;B3;Ml;LP);KSm;KSo;”

130 OUTPUT 718;“EM;KSi;EM; EX;KSi;EM;”

140 PRINT “OBSERVE BLANK SCBEEN;PBESS CONTINUE”

180 PAUSE

18C !

170 OUTPUT 718 USING “#,K,B,W,“;“KS”;39;0

180 OUTPUT 718 USING “8(K),B,K”;M$( *);32;“;”

190 OUTPUT 718;“Al ED”

2 0 0 E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Line 80:

Line 100:

Lines 120 to 150:

Line 170 to 190:

Dimensions enough memory in M$ to contain all 4096 values of display memory. (8192 bytes or 2 times 4096 .)

Sets the analyzer output format to 2-byte binary. The KS39 command used in line 170 requires this format.

Sets the display address variable, Da, equal to the first address.

Defines the program loop. Eight cycles are necessary. The total number of display memory values (4096) is not evenly divisible by 1001, which is the number of values read by

KS123. The next smallest number by which 4096 is evenly divisible is 512. 4096/512 =

8.

Sets the display address and executes KS123. The 123 must be sent as a single binary byte.

Enters the display memory data into the string array M$. (1024 or 2 times 512 bytes are entered.)

Continues the program at line 70. Line 70 readdresses the analyzer, clearing the “wait” mode. This “wait” mode is a result of using KS 123 to read less than 1001 display mem- ory values.

Erases trace A, B, and C memories and blanks the annotation and graticule.

Restores the analyzer display by writing the contents of M4 back into display memory.

The KS123 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single 8-bit byte.

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 0 7

KS125

Write to Display Memory

KS 125 it r DATA -\

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents amplitude data. Each trace data value must be sent as two &bit bytes. Up to

2002 bytes (1001 values) can be sent.

Range Restriction o- 1022

The KS125 command writes data, which is formatted in 2-byte binary, into the analyzer display memory The

KS125 syntax requires a specified starting address that immediately precedes KS125. Specify the address with the

DA command. Up to 1001 display memory values are written with each execution of KS125.

The following program first uses KS123 to send the contents of trace B memory to the controller array. The program then writes the contents of the array back to the analyzer trace B memory

10 OPTION BASE 1

20 INTEGER B-store( 1001)

3 0 !

4 0 OUTPUT 718;“A4;Bl;TS;B3;”

50 OUTPUT 718 USING “K,B,#“;“02;DA1024;KS”;123

60 ENTER 718 USING “W”;B-store( *)

7 0 !

8 0 OUTPUT 715;“;Sl;Al;Bl;”

90 LOCAL718

100 PRINT “CHANGE ANALYZER DISPLAYPRESS CONTINUE”

110 PAUSE

120 !

130 OUTPUT 718;“B3;”

140 OUTPUT 718; “DA 1024;”

150 OTJTPUT 718 USING “K,B,#“;“KS”;125

160 OTJTPUT 718 USING “W”;B-&or@ *)

170 OU’ITUT 718;“;”

180 END

I

Line 20:

Lines 40 to 60:

Lines 80 to 110:

Dimensions enough memory to store the contents of trace B memory. The INTEGER statement automatically dimensions 2 bytes for each element of string B-store (1001 elements).

Sweeps trace B and then sets it to the view mode. The analyzer is then set to the 2-byte binary display-units output format. Next, the contents of trace B are read by the controller and stored in string B-store.

Clears trace B, places the analyzer in the LOCAL mode, and tells the operator to change the analyzer display (trace B display) and continue the program.

208 Programming

(Continued)

KS1 25

Line 130:

Lines 40 to 150:

Line 160:

Places trace B in the view mode. This is necessary to prevent the analyzer from writing over the data placed back into trace B by KS125.

Sets the analyzer display address to 1024 with the DA command and sends the KS125 command to the analyzer. The “125” in KS125 is sent as a single binary byte.

Writes the integer string B-store, which contains the display memory values for the original trace B display, into the analyzer trace B memory, restoring the original trace B display.

The KS125 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single 8-bit byte.

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 0 9

KS126

Read Every Nth Value

KS 126 l

NTH

7 VALUE 7

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents every Nth value of trace A, B, or C display memory.

Range Restriction

PI- 1022

KS126 sends every Nth value in display memory to the controller. This is useful when more trace data than required are available. For example, when displaying noise data in zero span, a small number of points can be sampled and averaged without a significant loss of data. Another example is when the resolution bandwidth is wide enough relative to the spanwidth so that only minimum display resolution is required.

Before executing the KS126 command, the analyzer output format and starting display memory address must be specified. All trace memories must be in a store mode (VIEW or BLANK) when they are read by KS126. Immediately following the command, the variable N must be specified as follows:

N = point interval and is described by the formula N = lOOO/(M - 1).

M = the number of points to be read and is described by the formula M

= (1000/N) - 1.

The value of N must be an integer and must be sent to the analyzer as a single binary byte. The resulting value of M dimensions memory in the controller.

The following program is an example of reading 11 values of trace B with KS126.

10 OPTION BASE 1

2 0 INTEGER A( 11)

3 0

4 0

OUTPUT 718 USING “K,B,K”;“O1;DA1025;KS”;126;“100;”

FORI=lTOll

5 0

6 0

7 0

ENTER 718;A(I)

PRINT A(1)

NEXT1

8 0 E N D

The KS126 command cannot be executed from the front panel.

I l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single 8-bit byte

2 10 Programming

KS127

Write to Display Memory

KS 127 l r DATA 7 l o c a l command

Item

INTEGER

LOCAL COMMAND

Description/Default

Represents amplitude data.

Return spectrum analyzer to local control.

Controller dependent.

Range Restriction p! to 1022

The KS127 command sends data, formatted in 2-byte binary, to the analyzer display memory All of the display memory addresses can be written to with a single execution of KS127. The syntax of the KS127 command requires a specified starting address that immediately precedes KS127. Specify the starting address with the DA command.

If the controller is instructed to write to more addresses than there are between the specified starting address and the last address in display memory, 4095, then a “wrap around” occurs, and the remaining display memory values are sent to successive addresses starting at address p).

10 OPTION BASE 1

2 0

3 0 !

INTEGER B-&or@ 1001)

4 0

OUTPUT 718;“A4;Bl;TS;B3;”

50 OUTPUT 718 USING “K,B,#“;“02;DA 1024;KS”;123

60 ENTER 718 USING “VP”;B-store( *)

70 OUTPUT 718;“;Al;Bl;”

80 LOCAL 718

90 PRINT “CHANGE ANALYZER DISPLAYPRESS CONTINUE”

100 PAUSE

110 1

120 OUTPUT 718;“B3;”

130 OUTPUT 718;“DA 1024;”

140 OUTPUT 718 USING “K,B,#“;“KS”;l27

160 OUTPUT 718 USING “W,K”;B-store( *);“;‘I

16O LOCAL718

1 7 0 E N D

The KS127 command cannot be executed from the front panel. l

This is the decimal ASCII equivalent and is transmitted to the analyzer as a single &bit byte.

Programming 2 11

LB

Label

Item

CHARACTER

REAL

TERMINATOR

ETX

Description/Default

Represents text displayed on screen.

Represents text displayed on screen.

Terminates text. Character defined in DT command.

End of text.

Range Restriction

ASCII codes 32- 126

ASCII codes g- 255

ASCII code 3

The LB command writes text (label) on the CRT display with alphanumeric characters specified in the program.

The text characters are each specified by 8 bits in a 12-bit data word which immediately follows the LB command.

(The 4 most significant bits in the data word are set to 0.) The decimal equivalent of the binary number formed by the 12-bit data word corresponds to a particular one of the available alphanumeric characters. Decimal numbers PI through 255 and their corresponding characters are shown in the Character Set Table at the end of this command description.

Characters generated for the LB command are aligned on the CRT in the same manner as typeset characters on a printed page (that is, in rows and columns). This alignment is important when you are labeling graph lines or points.

The display size specified by the display size command (Dl, D2, D3), or the “big expand (hex)” instruction, determines the position of the text on the CRT, the number of rows and columns, and the size of the characters.

A typical use of the LB command is shown in the sample program below.

10 OTJTPUT 718;“Ip;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“A4;KSo;D3;”

30 OUTPUT 718;“DT@;”

40 OUTPUT 718;“PU PA 75,650 LB LABEL@;”

50 E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Blanks display and selects display size.

Establishes a character (@I) to terminate label text.

Positions start of label text, writes text, and terminates label mode.

212 Programming

(Continued)

LB

When using LB, the end of the text must be terminated. If the text is not terminated, instructions and other text following the actual label statement are displayed on the CRT The label mode can be terminated with an ASCII end-of-text code (decimal code 3), or with a character specified by the DT command. The label terminator command, DT suffixed with the character selected as the terminator (see line 30 above), must precede the label.

The terminator character itself must immediately follow the label.

The character codes listed below provide special label functions. Instructions for a particular function are normally given in the function’s decimal code.

Code

13

17

18

32

B

8

10

11

12

145

146

147 l

Function l l null back space (BS) line feed vertical tab (opposite of line feed) (VT) form feed (move beam to f&O) (FMFD) carriage return (CR) blink on (bkon) blink off (bkof) space (SP) skip to next higher block of 16 addresses (sk 16) skip to third higher block of 16 addresses (sk 16) skip to fifth higher block of 16 addresses (sk 64)

* Character codes can be used with both the label instruction code (1025 + ) and the LB command.

* l

Abbreviations within the parenthesis are shorthand notation for writing display programs. They are not programming codes.

A blink-on instruction causes the label statement to blink until a subsequent blink-off or end-of-text instruction in the program is executed.

For the skip-to-next-block instructions, the 4096 addresses in the display memory are hypothetically divided into

256 blocks of 16 addresses each. Execution of a skip instruction causes the program to skip to the fist address in the next higher block of 16 addresses (code 145)) to skip over the next two higher blocks to the fist address in the third higher block (code 146)) or to skip over four blocks to the first address in the fifth higher block (code 147).

For example, if the program is at any address from (b through 15 (the fist block of 16 addresses) and a skip-to-next-16-b&k is executed, the program skips to address 16 (the fist address in the second block of 16 addresses). Similarly, if the program is at address 84 in the sixth block of 16 addresses, and a skip-to-next-32-block is executed, the program skips over two blocks of 16 addresses to address 128 (the fist address in the ninth block).

Again, if the program is at address 84 in the sixth block, but the instruction this time is for a skip-to-next&l-block, the program skips over four blocks to address 160 in the eleventh block of 16 addresses.

Programming 2 13

LB

(Continued)

A sample program using the blink-on and blink-off codes is shown below.

20 ASSIGN @?Sa TO 718

30 OUTPUT @Sa; “IPi”

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“A4;KSo;D3;”

80 O UTPUT @Sa;“PU;PA 344,656;LB”;CHRS(17);“LABEL”;CHRJb(l8);CHR$(3);

60 E N D

For a binary format, line 50 can be written as follows:

50 OUTPUT @Sa USING “K,B,K,B,B “;“PU;PA 344,666;LB”;l7;“LABEL”;l8.3;

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Character Set

Presets the instrument.

Blank trace A and characters and selects display size 3.

Positions the beginning of the label, blinks the label, and terminates the label.

The character set for the label command is the same as the ASCII set. There are 86 additional characters available.

214 Programming

2s

26

23

2q

2-l

26

20

21

Ifl

19

22

23

30

31

12

13

10

II

0

3

6

7

16

17 iq

IS

4 s

2

3

(LF)

(VT)

(FMFI

(CR)

@UN

(EKOF:

&

/

?

-

/

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

.

II

8

9

>

-?

2

=

-

Chc

-

A

” r s

-Ia rI

8

Y

0

53 h

(Continued)

LB

COdl Cha a (NLLI bd

-

Chr

-

#

$

%

(

>

*

+

.

-

62

73

74

71

72

66

67

69

63

70

72

76

7-l

18

7 3

80

El

02

83

ES

86 a7

BE e3

30

31

‘32

33

-

Cha Cod

Chi

-

Cod

128

A

37 a

129

B

98

b

I30

C

39

C

I31

D

I00

d

132

E

101

e

I33

F

I02

f

134

G

I03

5.l

13s

H

I0q

h

I36

I

10s

I

137

J

I06

j

l3B

K

107

k

139

L

108

I

I90

M

I09

m

191

N

I I0

n

172

0

I 1 I

P

Ii2

0

Iq3

P

4

II3

q

IW

1%

R

I IL(

r

1%

S

I IS

s

Iq7

T

I16

t

1%

U

I I7

U

1’19

V

I I8

V

IS0 w

I13 w

ISI

X

I20

X

IS2

Y

I21 Y IS3

Z

I22 Z

ISi

ISS

II

123 c

IS6

\

‘2q

1

IS7

1

2s

>

158

-

Chr

-

5Kl6

5K32

5K6Y

-

I60

I61

I62

I63 l6’i

16s

I66

167

168

I69

I70

I71

I72

I73

174

17s

176

177

I78

I79

180

181

I82

I53

IWI

1%

186

187

‘Be

89 w

35

-

30

27 153 31

-

-

LABEL COMMAND CHARACTER SET

Cha n

0

L t-l

P

00

V

I I

1

L

Blank codes are either unassigned or character pieces. () indicates display machine language word. See Appendix

B.

Programming 2 15

2q3

2s0

221

722

ES3

224

22s

2’46

2w

2w

2L(2

2q3

2w

2%

238

233

290

2qI

23’4

235

236

237

229

230

231

232

233

22s

22E

227

228

19’

I35 l3E

13;

19;

13:

200

201

13E

195

202

203

20q

20s

213

220

221

222

21s

216

217

2IE

210

21 I

212

213

2111

206

207

208

203

223

LF

PresetO-25GHz

The LF command selects start/stop frequencies of $4 Hz and 2.5 GHz (in full span), a reference level of fiI dBm, and sets all the coupled functions to automatic. The functions of the LF command and the front panel FULL

SPAN a key are identical.

The Full Span 0 - 2.5 GHz function provides a convenient starting point for making measurements in the low band because it presets the analyzer functions to known states and values. (See II?)

OTJTPUT 718;“LF;"

The above program line enables the full 0 - 2.5 GHz span with coupled operation functions.

216 Programming

LG

Log Scale

LG integer

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default Range Restriction

1,2,5, 10

The LG command specifies the vertical graticule divisions as logarithmic units without changing the reference level.

The vertical scale may be specified as 1,2,5, or 10 dB per major division. If no value is specified, as shown below, the logarithmic scale is 10 dB per division.

OUTPUT 718;“LG;”

The functions of the LG command, and the front panel @ key are identical.

When queried (? or OA) , LG returns the current log scale as a real number, followed by a carriage-return/line-feed

(ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Programming 217

Lower Left

The LL command sends a voltage to the rear panel RECORDER OUTPUTS. The voltage level remains until a different command is executed. Use the LL command to calibrate the lower left dimension of a recorder. The LL command is illustrated in the sample program below.

10 OUTPUT 718;“LL;"

20 PRINT“ALIGNPLOTTERPENLOWERLEFTCORNEROFPAPER:PRESSCONTINUE."

30 END

Z

The functions of the LL command and front panel key are identical. (See Introduction in Section I.)

218 Programming

LN

Linear Scale

The LN command scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to input voltage, without changing the reference level. The bottom graticule line represents a signal level of zero volts.

The LN command selects V mV or UV as the vertical scale, depending on the vertical scale before LN is executed.

Units other than V/DIV MV/DIV or uV/DIV can be selected by changing the reference level after executing LN.

For example, to set the scale to 3 mV/DN, specify a reference level of 30 mV

OUTPUT 718; “LN; RL 3OmV;"

Note that voltage entries are rounded to the nearest 0.1 dB. Thus, 30 mV becomes 30.16 mV which equals -17.4

dBm.

LIN

The functions of the LN command and front panel 0 key are identical. (See also KSB, KSC, and KSD.)

Programming 2 19

LOG

Logarithm r DESTINATION 7 r OPERAND \

SCAL INB r FACTOR Y v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r n u m e r i c d a t a f i e l d -

I Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA-Z? and _

2- 12 characters required.

I

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The LOG command modifies the operand:

LOG operand 1 x scaling factor - destination

The operands and destination may be different lengths. The trace operands (TRA, TRB, TFK, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length; a variable identifier or numeric data field is one element long. When

2 2 0 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

LOG operands differ in length, the last element of the shorter operand is repeated for processing. When the operands are longer than the destination, they are truncated to fit.

OUTF'TJT718;“LOGTRC,!J!RA10;"

Programming 22 1

LB

Display Line Off

The LPI command disables the display line.

The functions of the Llzl command and the front panel, reference line (ORj key are identical. The display line also can be turned on or off by the DLE and DL commands.

OUTPUT 718;“L0;"

222 Programming

MA

Marker Amplitude Output

The MA command returns the amplitude level of the active marker to the controller, if the marker is on screen. If both the delta marker and active marker are on screen, MA returns the amplitude difference between the two markers. (See MKDELTA and M3.) The amplitude is also displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the analyzer display.

The output can be formatted in any of the four output formats. (Refer to FORMAT commands, 01,02, 03,04.)

However, do not use output format 04 for marker delta output, because sign information is lost.

A typical use of the MA command is shown in the sample program below.

10 ASSIGNCMaTO718

20 P R I N T E R I S

30 OlJTPUT@Sa;“FA80MZ;FB120MZ;"

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“M2;El;"

50 OUTPUT QSa;"MA;"

60 ENTER@Sa;A

70 PRINTA

80 E N D

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Selects start and stop frequencies.

Activates a normal marker and peak search.

Returns the amplitude to the controller.

Assigns the amplitude to variable A.

Prints the marker amplitude.

An ENTER command must follow each output command, or output data is lost. For example, the following program assigns only the marker amplitude to variable E and the marker frequency value is lost.

OUTPUT 718;"MF;IVIA;"

OUTPUT718;F,A

Programming 223

MBRD

Processor Memory Block Read

ANALYZER

MEMORY

- A D D R E S S -

NUMBER

OF

/ - - - BYTES-

MBRD

I

Item

INTEGER

INTEGER

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer memory address.

ASCII decimal number indicating number of bytes to read.

Real

Range Restriction

The MBRD command reads an indicated number of bytes, beginning at the specified microprocessor address, and returns the bytes to the controller.

I

224 Programming

MBWR

MBWR

Processor Memory Block Write

,p STRING DATA FIELD .-\

,- A-BLOCK DATA F I ELD --\

/- I-BLOCK DATA F I ELD -\

I

Item

STRING

DELIMITER

LENGTH

DATA BYTES

INTEGER

Description/Default

Mark beginning and end of command string.

End and beginning delimiter must be identical.

Two 8bit bytes specifying length of command list, in 8-bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB.

8-bit bytes of data representing command list.

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer memory address.

Range Restriction

!“$%&‘/: = @\-J

The MBWR command writes a block message to analyzer memory, starting at specified address.

Programming 225

MDS

Measurement Data Size c

W u

1

The MDS command formats binary measurement:

B selects a data size of one &bit byte.

W selects a data size of one word, which is two 8-bit bytes.

226 Programming

MDU

Measurement Data Units

MDU

The MDU command returns values for the CRT base line and reference level, in display units and measurement units.

For example, the program below returns the following to the controller:

0 1000 -110 -10

This means the vertical scale spans B to 1000 display units, or 100 dB, and the reference level is -10 dBm.

10 OUTPUT718;“Ip;O3;"

20 OUTPUT718;"RL-10DM;"

100 0uTPuT718;“MDu?;"

140 ENTER718;A,B,C,D

150 PRINTA,B,C,D

160 E N D

Programming 227

MEAN

Mean

MEAN trace l a b e l t-a

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-ZZand-

2- 12 characters required.

The MEAN command returns the mean value of the trace, in display units. Note that the value must be moved into a variable to be accessed.

OUTPTJT 718;“TRDEF TEXT; 1008; VARDEF DESTINATION,0;”

OUTPTJT 718;“MOV DESTINATION, MEAN TEST;”

228 Programming

MEM

Memory

MEM

The MEM command returns the amount of unused memory available for user-defined functions. These functions include TRDEF VARDEF FUNCDEF, ONSW, ONEOS, and TRMATH.

The MEM command returns the number of available bytes to the controller followed by a carriage-return/line-feed

(ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

10 OUTF’UT 718; “MEM?;”

20 ENTER 718;How-much-memory

30 PRINT How-much-memory

40 END

Programming 229

MF

Marker Frequency Output

The MF command returns the frequency level of the active marker to the controller, if the marker is on screen. If both the delta marker and active marker are on screen, MF returns the frequency difference between the two markers. (See MKDELTA and M3.)

The output can be formatted in any one of the four output formats. (Refer to FORMAT command, 01, 02, 03, and 04.) However, do not use output format 04 for marker delta output, because sign information is lost.

A typical use of the MF command is shown in the sample program below.

10 ASSIGN @Sa to 718

20 PRINTER IS 701

30 OUTPUT @Sa;“FA 80MZ;FB 12OMZ;”

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“M2;El;”

50 OUTPTJT @Sa; “MF;”

60 ENTER @Sa;A

70 PRINT A

80 E N D

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Selects start and stop frequencies.

Activates a normal marker and peak search.

Returns the frequency to the controller.

Assigns the frequency to variable A.

Prints the frequency amplitude.

An ENTER command must follow each output command, or output data is lost. For example, the following program assigns only the marker amplitude to variable FT and the marker frequency value is lost.

OUTPUT 718;“MF;MA;”

OTJTPU’I’ 718;F,A

230 Programming

r DESTINATION \ r OPERAND 1 y r OPERAND 2 7

MIN

Minimum t r a c e l a b e l

* v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r r n u m e r i c

-W d a t a f i e l d * t r a c e l a b e l

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRAIlO].

Real

Range Restriction

AA- 22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The MIN command compares operand 1 and operand 2, point by point, sending the lesser values of each comparison to the destination.

If one of the operands is a single value, it acts as a threshold, and all values equal to or less than the threshold pass to the destination.

OUTPUT 718;“MIN TRB,TRC,TFiB;”

Programming 23 1

MKA

Marker Amplitude

MKA

Item

REAL

Description/Default Range Restriction

Amplitude range of analyzer screen.

The MKA command specifies the amplitude of the active marker in dBm, when the active marker is the fixed or amplitude type. (Instrument preset (IP) selects an amplitude marker. See MKTYPE.)

When queried (?), MKA returns the marker amplitude, a real number, followed by a carriage-return/line-feed

(ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

OUTPUT 718; “MXCA -2ODM;”

232 Programming

MKACT

Marker Active

Item

MARKER NUMBER

Description/Default

Integer. Default is 1.

Range Restriction

1,2,3,4

The MKACT command establishes the active marker. There can be four different numbered markers, but only one marker can be active at any time.

A variety of commands listed in this remote section operate on the active marker. Most of them begin with the letters “MK.”

When MKACT is executed, the display readout indicates the active marker state.

OUTPUT 718;“MKACT3;"

When queried (?) , MKACT returns the number of the current active marker, followed by carriage-return/line-feed

(ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Programming 233

MKCF

Marker to Center Frequency

(W

The MKCF command centers the active marker on the analyzer screen, moving the marker to the center frequen-

CY.

OUTPUT 718; “MKCF;”

The functions of the MKCF and E2 commands, and the front panel (“2:-) key are identical.

234 Programming

MKCONT

Marker Continue

WW

The MKCONT command resumes the sweep after execution of a MKSTOP or KSu command. Execute MK-

CONT after MKSTOP or KSu .

The functions of the MKCONT and KSt commands are identical.

Programming 235

Marker Delta

(M3)

MKD

DELTA MARKER

/ FREOUENCY real

I Item

I

REAL

Description/Default

Selects delta marker frequency. Default units is

HZ.

Range Restriction

The MKD command computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and a special marker, called the delta or differential marker. These values are displayed in the display readout.

Differential value = active marker frequency - delta marker frequency

Differential value = active marker amplitude - deIta marker amplitude

If a delta marker is not on screen, MKD places one at the specified frequency, or at the right side of the CRT If an active marker is not on screen, MKD positions an active marker at center screen. (The active marker is the number

1 marker, unless otherwise specified with the MKACT command.)

0UTPUT718;“MKD 12OMZ;"

The MKD command function is identical with that of the M3 command, and similar to that of the front panel m key

236 Programming

I

(Continued)

MKD

When queried(?), MKD returns the frequency difference between the delta and active markers. The frequency difference is returned as a real number, followed by a carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Programming 237

MKF

Marker Frequency c

-0i

1

0,

L

I

Item

REAL

Description/Default

Represents marker frequency.

Range Restriction

Marker frequency limited to frequency range of spectrum analyzer display.

I

Default value for units is Hz.

The MKF command specifies the frequency value of the active marker.

OIJTTUT718;“MKF 1OOMZ;”

W h e n q u e r i e d (?), M K F r e t u r n s t h e a c t i v e m a r k e r f r e q u e n c y a s a r e a l n u m b e r f o l l o w e d b y a carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

238 Programming

The MKMIN command moves the active marker to the minimum value detected. (See also KSN.)

OUTPUT 718; “MKMIN;”

Marker Minimum

WW

Programming 239

MKN

Marker Normal

0’42)

( MKN >

MARKER

- F R E Q U E N C Y r e a l

Description/Default

Default value for units is Hz.

Range Restriction

The MKN command moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker is not declared with

MKACT, the active marker number is 1.

OTJTPUT 718;“MXN;”

The functions of the MKN and M2 commands are identical.

240 Programming

Marker Noise

W-W

MKNOI SE

The MKNOISE command displays the RMS noise level at the marker. The RMS value is normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth.

10 OTJTPUT 718;“Ip;O3;"

20 OUTPUT 718;“MKACT 1;"

30 OUTPUT718;“MKF3GZ;"

40 OTJTPUT7l8;“MKNOISEON;"

50 OTJTPUT7l8;"MXNOISE?;"

60 ENTER718;A$

70 PRINTA$

80 E N D

When queried (?), MKNOISE returns ON or OF followed by a carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10).

The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

The functions of the MKNOISE and KSM commands are identical.

Programming 241

MKOFF

Marker Off

MKOFF

The MKOFF command turns off either the active or all markers displayed on the CRT Up to four markers can be displayed at one time.

OTJTPTJT 718;"MKOFF;"

242 Programming

MKP

Marker Position

MKP item

INTEGER

Description/Default Range Restriction

1 to 1001

The MKP command specifies the marker position horizontally, in display units.

The program line below positions the marker at the first major graticule line

OUTPUT 7 18; “MKP 100;”

When queried (?) , MKP returns the active marker frequency as a real number followed by a carriage-return/linefeed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) state is asserted with line feed.

Programming 243

MKPAUSE

Marker Pause

DELAY rPERIOD-\

Item

REAL

Description/Default

Delay time in seconds.

Range Restriction

0 to 1000 seconds.

The MKPAUSE command pauses the sweep at the active marker for the duration of the delay period.

OUTPUT 718;“MKPAUSE 100;”

When queried (?), MKPAUSE returns the value of the delay period as a real number followed by a carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

To turn pause off, turn off markers.

244 Programming

The MKPK command positions on the active marker on signal peaks.

OUTPUT 718;“MXPK NR;"

Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK, positions the active marker at the highest signal detected.

If an active marker is onscreen, NH, NR, and NL move the marker accordingly:

Specifying NH moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.

Specifying NR moves the active marker to the next signal peak of higher frequency.

Specifying NL moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower frequency.

(See also KSK and El .)

MKPK

Marker Peak

Programming 245

MKPX

Marker Peak Excursion

The MKPX command specifies the minimum signal excursion for the analyzer internal signal-identification routine.

The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of less than 6 dB on either side is not identified.

If MKPK HI (peak search) were executed on such a signal, the analyzer would not place a marker at the signal peak.

OUTPUT 718;“MKPX 8dB;"

246 Programming

MKREAD

Marker Readout

MKREAD

The MKREAD command selects the type of active trace information displayed by the analyzer marker readout: marker frequency, period, sweep time, inverse sweep time, or fast fourier transform readout.

When queried (?) , MKREAD returns the marker readout type, followed by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes

13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed. The program prints “FFT” on the computer screen.

10 0UTPUT718;“MKREADFFT;"

20 OUTF'UT718;“MKREAD?;"

30 ENTER718;A$

40 PRINTAt

50 E N D

Programming 247

MKRL

Marker to Reference Level

(E4)

The MKRL command moves the active marker to the reference level.

OUTF'UT 718;‘WKRL;"

The functions of the MKRL and E4 commands, and the front panel @ key are identical.

248 Programming

MKSP

Marker Span

WW

The MKSP command operates only when the delta marker is on. (See MKD or M3.) When the delta marker is on and MKSP is executed, the delta marker and active marker determine the start and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies start frequency, and the right marker specifies stop frequency. If marker delta is off, there is no operation.

OUTPUT 718;‘MKSp;”

The functions of the MKSP and KS0 commands are identical.

Programming 249

Delta Marker Step Size

(E3)

The MKSS command establishes the center frequency step size as the frequency difference between the delta and active markers. (See M3 or MKD.)

OUTPUT 718; “MKSS;”

The functions of the MKSS and E3 commands are identical.

250, Programming

The MKSTOP command stops the sweep at the active marker. (See also KSu.)

OUTPUT 718;“MKSTOp;”

Marker Stop

(KS4

Programming 251

MKTRACE

Marker Trace

MKTRACE

The MKTRACE command moves the active marker to a corresponding position in trace A, B, or C.

0UTPUT718;“MKTRACETRB;"

252 Programming

MKTRACK

Marker Track

MKTRACK

The MKTRACK command keeps the active marker at the center of the display. To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker at the desired signal before executing MKTRACK. (See MT1 and MT@. Also see

(!@ key in Section I.)

OTJTPlJT7l8;“MKTRACKON;"

Programming 253

MKTYPE

Marker Type

( M K T Y P E )-

The MKTYPE command specifies the kind of marker,

Specifying MKTYPE AMP allows markers to be positioned according to amplitude, as shown in the line below, which positions a marker on a signal response at the -3 dBm level.

OUTPTJT718;“TS;MKTYPEAMP;M.KA-3;"

The program line below returns the 3-dB bandwidth to the controller.

10 0UTPTJT718;“TS;MKPKHI;MKD;"

20 OUTPUT718; "MKTYPE AMp;MKA-3;"

30 OUTPUT718;“MKD;MF?"

40 END

Line 10 executes a sweep, places a reference marker at the signal peak, and enables the delta marker mode.

Line 20 searches for an amplitude that is 3 dB below the reference marker at the signal peak, because the delta marker mode is active.

The MKD in line 30 establishes the marker that is 3 dB below the peak as the new reference marker. However, since the amplitude and reference markers cannot occupy the same position, the analyzer searches again for an amplitude 3 dB below the signal peak and places another marker there. The MF? command returns the frequency difference between the markers.

Specifying MKTYPE PSN allows markers to be positioned according to a horizontal position in display units. The program line below positions a marker on the third major graticule.

OUTPUT.718;“MKTYPEPSN;MKP300;"

Specifying MKTYPE FIXED allows a marker to be placed at any fiied point on the CRT

254, Programming

ML

Mixer Level

(KS,)

The ML command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the reference level.

The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. When ML is activated, the effective mixer level can be set from - 10 dBm* to - 70 dBm in 10 dB steps. Instrument preset (IP) selects -

10 dBm.

The program line below sets the mixer level to -40 dBm.

OUTPUT 718;“ML - 4ODM;”

As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically changes to limit the maximum signal at the mixer input to -40 dBm for signals less that or equal to the reference level.

The functions of the ML and KS, commands, and the m b keys are identical. See also AT

In the extended reference level range, the effective mixer level can be set to 0 dBm.

Programming 255

MOV

Move r DESTINATION 7 r OPERAND 7 trace l a b e l

- t r a c e l a b e l data f i e l d

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier. such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ 101.

Real

Range Restriction

AA- Zz and _

Z- 12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The MOV command moves the operand to the destination.

The operand and destination may be of different length: the trace operands (TRA, TRB, TRC, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length, and a variable identifier or numeric data field is 1 element long. When the operand is longer than the destination, it is truncated to fit. When the operand is shorter than the destination, the last element is repeated to fill the destination.

2 5 6

P r o g r a m m i n g

r DESTINATION y r OPERAND 1 -, rOPERAN 2 T

MPY

Multiply

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA- 22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The MPY command multiples the operands, point by point, and places the result(s) in the destination.

operand 1 x operand 2 - destination

The operands and destination may be of different length: the trace operands (TRA, TRB, TRC, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length; and a variable identifier or numeric data field is 1 element long. When operands are of different lengths, the last element of the shorter operand is repeated and multiplied with the remaining elements of the longer element. When the operands are longer than the destination, they are truncated to fit.

Programming 257

MPY Continued

The results and operands of trace math are truncated if they are not within certain limits. If operating on traces A,

B, or C, results must be within 1023. If operating on user-defined traces, results must be within 32,767.

OUTF’UT 718;“Ml’Y TFLA,TFLC,TRB;”

258 Programming

MRD

Memory Read Word

ANALYZER

MEMORY r-ADDRESS 7 integer MRD

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer memory address.

Range Restriction

Must be even.

The MRD command reads two bytes, starting at the indicated spectrum analyzer memory address, and returns the word to the controller.

J

Programming 259

MRDB

Memory Read Byte

ANALYZER

MEMORY

FADDRESS-

MRDB

INTEGER

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer memory address.

Range Restriction

The MRDB command reads the 8-bit byte at the analyzer memory address, and returns the byte to the controller, as ASCII code.

260 Programming

MT0

Marker Track Off

The MTP) command disables the marker tracking mode. (See MKTRACK and MT1 . Also see @ key in Section

I.1

OUTPUT 718;“IWl’0;”

Programming 261

MT1

Marker Track On

(X--)--Q

The MT1 command keeps the active marker at the center of the display. To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker at the desired signal before executing MTl. (See MKTRACK and MT@. Also see @ key in Section I.)

OUTPUT 718;“MTl;”

262 Programming

MWR

Memory Write Word

ANALYZER

MEMORY

- A D D R E S S - M E S S A G E - - \ i n t e g e r

I

Item

INTEGER

INTEGER

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer memory address.

ASCII decimal number indicating number of bytes to read.

Range Restriction

Must be even number.

The MWR command writes a two-byte message to spectrum analyzer memory, starting at the indicated address.

I

Programming 263

MWRB

Memory Write Byte

ANALYZER

MEMORY

- ADDRESS - M E S S A G E -

MWRB

Item

INTEGER

INTEGER

Description/Default

ASCII decimal number representing analyzer memory address.

ASCII decimal number representing one 8-bit byte.

Range Restriction

The MWRB command writes a one-byte message to a memory address in the analyzer.

2 6 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

r DESTINATION 7 rOPERAND 1 -\ r OPERAND 2 T

MXM

Maximum

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ 101.

Real

Range Restriction

AA-Z.Zand-

2- 12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The MXM command compares operand 1 and operand 2, point by point, sending the greater value of each comparison to the destination.

If one of the operands is a single value, it acts as a threshold, and all values equal to or greater than the threshold pass to the destination.

The operands and destination may be of different length. However, the destination must be as long as the largest operand. The trace operands (TFW, TRB, and TFK, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length, and a variable identifier or numeric data field is 1 element long.

Programming 2 6 5

MXM (Continued)

The operands are truncated if they are not within certain limits. The limit for operands other than trace A, B, or C, is 32,767.

OuTpuT718;"MxMTRA,TRC,TRB;"

266 Programming

MXMH

Maximum Hold

The MXMH command updates each trace element with the maximum level detected, while the trace is active and displayed. The functions of the MXMH and A2 commands, and front panel Iz] key are identical.

,

V I D E O _

DETECTOR

ANALOG

AMPL I TUDE

DISPLAY

D KiThAL - COMPARATOR - ADDRESSES

C O N V E R T E R i!;;;t

MEMORY i - 1 0 0 1

OR

1 0 2 5 - 2 0 2 5

I 1

= -

CTROT

REFRESH D’SPLAY

CLOSED IF RESPONSE AMPLITUDE ’

STORED AMPLITUDE

Programming 267

M l

Marker Off

The Ml command blanks any markers present on the CRT (See also M2, MKOFF, and MKN.)

OUTPUT 718;"Ml;"

268 Programming

- M A R K E R F R E O U E N C Y \ r e a l

M2

Marker Normal

NW

I

I Item

I

Real

Description/Default

Default value for units is Hz.

Range Restriction

The M2 command moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker is not declared with

MKACT, the active marker number is 1.

OUTPUT 718;“M2;”

The functions of the M2 and MKN commands are identical.

1

I

I

Programming 269

Delta Marker

(MW

DELTA MARKER

- FREOUENCY \

Item

REAL

Description/Default

Selects delta marker frequency. Default value for units is Hz.

Range Restriction

The M3 command computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and a special marker, called the delta or differential marker. These values are displayed in the display readout.

Differential value = active marker frequency - delta marker frequency

Differential value = active marker amplitude - delta marker amplitude

If a delta marker is not on screen, MKD places one at the specified frequency, or at the right side of the CRT If an active marker is not on screen, MKD positions an active marker at center screen. (The active marker is the number

1 marker, unless otherwise specified with the MKACT command.)

270 Programming

(Continued)

M3

OUTPUT 718; “M3 120MZ;”

The M3 command function is identical with that of the MKD command, and similar to that of the front panel a key.

Programming 27 1

M4

Marker Zoom

The M4 command activates a single marker at center frequency, the DATA knob changes the position of the marker and the STEP keys change the frequency span and sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency The functions of the M4 command and the front panel Marker Mode a key are identical.

Once a single marker is positioned anywhere on the display, executing the M4 command immediately positions the marker at center frequency.

OUTPUT 718; “M4;"

272 Programming

NSTART

Start Harmonic

NSTAAT

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Real number representing analyzer LO harmonic.

Range Restriction

4- 63

The NSTART command specifies the start harmonic for the signal identification (SIGID) routine. The signal identification routine searches with all harmonics between the start harmonic (NSTART) and the stop harmonic

(NSTOP) .

Programming 273

NSTOP

Stop harmonic

NSTOP

INTEGER

Description/Default

Real number representing analyzer LO harmonic.

Range Restriction

4-63

The NSTOP command specifies the stop harmonic for the signal identification (SIGID) routine. The signal identification routine searches with all harmonics between the start harmonic (NSTART) and the stop harmonic

(NSTOP) .

274 Programming

OL

Output Learn String

The OL command transmits information to the controller that describes the state of the analyzer when the OL command is executed. This information is called the learn string. The learn string can be sent from the controller memory back to the analyzer to restore the analyzer to its original state.

A list of the learn string contents and coding, and the control settings restored when the learn string is sent to the analyzer is provided in Appendix C. Note that the trace data and the state of some analyzer functions are not contained in the learn string.

The learn string requires 80 bytes of storage space. The program below sends the value of the resolution bandwidth to the controller.

10 DIM A$[801

20 PRINTER IS 701

30 !

40 OUTPUT 718;“OL;"

50 ENTER 718 USING “80A”;A$

60 Bandwidth = NUM(A$[27,27])

70 PRINT SHIFl’ (Bandwidth,4)

80 !

90 END

Line 10: Dimensions enough storage to contain the 80-byte learn string.

Lines 40 to 50: Reads and stores the contents of the learn string.

Lines 60 to 70: Prints the numerical equivalent of bits 4 through 7 of byte 27.

When this program is run, the printer prints the code for the current bandwidth. The instrument state is not affected. Interpreting the codes of some function values, such as resolution bandwidth, requires additional program lines that equate these codes to specific function values.

Use OL command to return the state of most instrument functions to the controller simultaneously. Use a query (?) to return the state of a single instrument function. Below, a query returns the value of the input attenuation to the controller.

10 OUTPUT 718; “AT?; ”

20 ENTER 718;N

30 END

The OL command and ,?” do not alter the state of the spectrum analyzer, and for this reason, are the best way to send the states of the analyzer functions to the controller. An analyzer state may be returned to the controller with

“OA”, but this sometimes necessitates changing the analyzer state. For example, the program below changes the attenuation from the coupled state to the uncoupled state when the attenuation value is queried with OA.

10 OUTPUT 718;“AT; OA;”

20 ENTER 718;N

30 END

Programming 275

ONEOS

On end of sweep

/ .

O N E O S )

,- STRING DATA F I ELD a\ s t r i n g del imi ter command

I i s t

,- A-BLOCK DATA F I ELD -, l e n g t h

1 ,- I - B L O C K D A T A F I E L D -, (

I

Item

COMMAND LIST

STRING

DELIMITER

COMMAND LIST

LENGTH

Description/Default

Alphanumeric character. Any spectrum analyzer command from this section.

Mark beginning and end of command string.

End and beginning delimiters must be identical.

Any spectrum analyzer command from this section, except TS, ONSWR or ONEOS.

Two &bit bytes specifying length of command list, in &bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB.

Range Restriction

!“$%&‘{: = \2’

At the end of the sweep, the ONEOS command executes the contents of the data field.

OUTPUT 718;“ONEOS”“CF 1OOMZ;” ” ”

When queried (?) , ONEOS returns the command list.

2 7 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

ONSWP

,- STRING DATA FIELD \ s t r i n g d e l i m i t e r command

I ist

,- A-BLOCK DATA F IELD -, l e n g t h command

I i s t

1 / I - B L O C K D A T A F I E L D -, 1 command

I ist

Item

COMMAND LIST

STRING

DELIMITER

COMMAND LIST

LENGTH

Description/Default

Alphanumeric character. Any spectrum analyzer command from this section.

Mark beginning and end of command string.

End and beginning delimiters must be identical.

Any spectrum analyer command from this section.

Two &bit bytes specifying length of command list, in &bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB.

At the beginning of the sweep, the ONSWP command executes the command list.

OUTPUT 718;“ONSV7P”“CF 1OOMZ;” ” ”

When queried (?) , ONSWP returns the command list.

Range Restriction

!“$%&&‘{: = \2’

ONSWP

On Sweep

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 7 7

OP

Output Parameter

OP

The OP command returns parameter values, Pl and P2, which represent the dimensions of the lower left, and upper right analyzer display. The values returned represent X and Y in display units.

A typical response to OP is O,O, 1023,1023;

0 , 1 0 2 3 , 1 0 2 3

/O. / \ \

PlX PlY P2X P2Y

OUTFVT 718; “OP?; ”

278 Programming

OT

Output Trace Annotations

(T-J--Q

The output annotations command sends 32 character-strings, each up to 64 characters long, to the controller.

These character strings contain all the CRT annotations except annotations written with the label command, LB, the title mode, KSE, or the text command, TEXT The controller must read all 32 strings to successfully execute the command. The strings, listed below in the order they are sent, contain the following information:

String Readout

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

25

26

27

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1

4

5

2

3

6

7

28

29

30

31

32

“BATTERY”

“CORR’D” resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time attenuation reference level scale trace detection center frequency or start frequency span or stop frequency reference level offset display line threshold marker frequency marker amplitude frequency offset video averaging title

“PLl UNLOCK”

“PL2 UNLOCK”

“Y-I-0 UNLOCK”

“HET UNLOCK”

“M/N UNLOCK”

“REFUNLOCK”

“EXT/OVEN”

“MEAS UNCAL” ” * ” frequency diagnostics

“SRQ” center frequency “STEP” active function

The following program stores all the CRT annotations in the string array, A$:

10 DIMA$(32)[641

2 0 P R I N T E R I S

30 !

Programming 279

OT (Continued)

40 OUTPTJT718;"OT"

50 FORN=lTO32

60 ENTER718;A$[N]

70 N E X T N

80 !

90 FORN=lTO32

100 PRINTA$(N)

110 N E X T N

120 E N D

After turning line power on, an OT command and print routine print the following string array contents:

21

22

23

24

25

26

17

18

19

20

27

28

29

3 0

31

32

1

2

3

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

12

13

14

15

16

RES BW 3 MHz

VBW 3 MHz

SWP 500 msec

ATTEN 10 dB

REF 0.0 dBm

10 dB/

START 2.0 GHz

STOP 22.0 GHz

HP-IB ADRS:

All blank lines represent empty strings.

280 Programming

01,02,03,04

FORMAT STATEMENTS

The spectrum analyzer outputs must be formatted appropriately for the controller and measurement requirements.

The spectrum analyzer transmits decimal or binary values, via the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB), to a controller or other HP-IB device, such as a printer. The decimal and binary values represent trace information or instructions.

The format characteristics are summarized in the table below.

Analyzer Output

Sends trace information only as a decimal value in Hz, dB, dBm, volts, or seconds.

Sends trace amplitude and position information, or instruction word as decimal values ranging from 0 to

4095:

0 to 1023 represent positive, unblanked amplitudes in display units.

1024 to 2047 are instruction words (analyzer machine language).

2048 to 3071 represent positive, blanked amplitudes in display units.

Format

Output Example of Marker

Amplitude. Marker is at - 10 dBm

Command reference level.

0 3 - 10.00

0 1 1001

3072 to 4095 represent negative, blanked amplitudes in display units.

Sends trace amplitude and position information, or instruction word as binary values in two 8-bit bytes, sending the most significant bit first. The four most significant bits are zeroes.

Sends trace amplitude information only as binary value in one &bit byte, composed from the 02 output bytes: o o o o x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 2

11 /I//// x x x x x x x x 0 4

0 2

0 4

0000 xxxx x x x x x x x x

(3) (231) values 0 to 4095 x x x x x x x x

(250) values 0 to 255 (full scale)

Programming 28 1

01,02,03,04 (Continued)

03 Format

The 03 format transmits trace amplitude information only, in measure units: Hz, dBm, dB, volts, or seconds. The

03 format cannot transmit instruction words.

A carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10) always follows any data output. The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Instrument preset (IP) automatically selects the 03 format.

01 Format

The 01 format transmits trace amplitude information as decimal values in display units. (See Chapter 4 in Section

I for a description of display units.)

Trace amplitude values can be positive and unblanked, positive and blanked, or negative and blanked. Positive, unblanked values (fJ to 1023) cover the visible amplitude range on the spectrum analyzer CRT

Negative trace values (3072 to 4095) usually result from trace arithmetic, and are not displayed because they are off (below) the screen. Negative values are represented by the X&bit two’s complement of the negative number, that is, 4096- (negative valuel. For example, a - 300 values is an output of 3796.

4096 - I- 3001 = 3796

Positive, blanked values (2048 to 3071) are those responses immediately ahead of the updated, sweeping trace.

These values form the blank-ahead marker, and represent the amplitude responses of the previous sweep, plus

2048. Thus, they are off (above) the screen (See Appendix B.)

The 01 format also transmits instruction words as decimal values. See the Instruction and Data Word Summary in

Appendix B.

A carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10) always follows any data output in the 01 format. The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

02 Format

The 02 format transmits trace information or instruction words as two 8-bit binary numbers. The most significant bit is sent fii. The four most significant bits are always zeroes.

Most Significant Byte

0000 xxxx

Least Significant Byte xxxxxxxx

Refer to the Consolidated Coding table in Appendix B for instruction word information.

Note that the 02 format sends the same kind of information that the 01 format sends, except that 02 transmits the information in binary numbers instead of decimal numbers. Also, the end of transmission is not marked by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes 13, 10) in the 02 format.

282 Programming

(Continued)

01,02,03,04

04 Format

The 04 format transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number. The binary number is one 8-bit byte composed from the bytes established with the 02 format.

0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 2 ll////// xxxxxxxx 04

The 04 output is the fastest way to transmit trace data from the spectrum analyzer to the HP-IB bus. However, sign information is lost. Keep this in mind when transmitting delta marker information (MKD) . The end of data transmission is NOT marked by a carriage-return/line-feed.

Format Statements and the HP-IB Bus

The table below shows a transmission sequence on the HP-IB bus for each of the four formats. Each format is transmitting the amplitude of a marker positioned at the - 10 dBm reference line.

Format

BVte

Bvte

Byte

We

BVte

Bvte

Carriage Return

Line Feed

(EOI asserted)

0 3

NUM(-)

NUM (1)

NUM (0)

NUM (.)

NUM (0)

NUM (0)

13

10

01

NUM (“1")

NUM("0")

NUM ("0")

NUM (“1")

13

10

0 2

(3)

(231)

0 4

(250)

Though the spectrum analyzer transmits either binary or digital information on the HP-IB bus, a decimal number is always returned to the controller display. This is illustrated in the program below, which reads the instruction word

1040 at display address 0, the fist memory location of trace A. The program reads the instruction word, using each of the formats, and the DR command.

1 ASSIGN@SaTO718

2 P R I N T E R I S

4 OUTPUT @Sa;"Al;S2;TS;"

10 OlJTPUT@Sa;“DA001DR"

20 ENTER@Sa;Drl

30 OlJTPTJT@Sa;"DA002DR"

Programming 283

01,02,03,04 (Continued)

40 ENTER @Sa USING “# W”:Dr2

50 OUTPUT @Sa;” DA 0 03 DR

50 ENTER @Sa;Dr3

70 OUTPUT @Sa;” DA 0 04 DR”

80 ENTER @Sa USING “#,B”;Dr4

9 0 PRINT Drl,Dr2,Dr3,Dr4

1 0 0 EN-D

Running the program above produces the following responses on the controller display Note that all the responses are decimal numbers. Also note that the 03 and 04 formats do not return the correct data. (As mentioned above,

03 and 04 do not transmit instruction words.)

01 FORMAT response: 1040

02 FORMAT response: 1040

03 FORMAT response: - 200.8

0 4 F O R M A T r e s p o n s e : 4

Controller Formats

The format of the controller must be compatible with the output format of the analyzer.

Analyzer Format

0 1

03

02

04

Requirements free field field size dependent on output, use free field format binary, read twice for each value binary, read once for each value

Controller Format

Example Statement and

Analyzer Response

ENTER 7 18; PK-AMPLITUDE

Response: 1001

ENTER 7 18; PK-AMPLITUDE

Response: - 10.0

ENTER 718 USING “#,w”

Response: 1001

ENTER 7 18 USING “++‘, B”

R e s p o n s e : 2 5 0

NOTE

The 0 in 01,02,03, and 04 is the letter 0 and not the number zero.

284 Programming

PA

Plot Absolute

PA rX POSITION7 ,-Y POSITION7 integer

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents x,y coordinates of vector endpoint(s), in display units.

Range Restriction

0- 1022

The PA command specifies in display units a vector location on the CRT relative to display reference coordinates

0,O. (See also display size commands Dl, D2, and D3.) The vector is drawn on the CRT if the pen-down (PD) command is in effect. If the pen-up (PU) command is in effect, the vector does not appear of the CRT A sample program using the PA command is shown below.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO718

20 OUTPUT @Sa;“IP;A4;KSm;KSo;"

30 OUTPUT @Sa;“DB;PU;"

40 OUTPUT@Sa;“PA700,500;PD900,5OO;"

50 0UTPUT@Sa;“900,300,700,300,700,500;"

80 E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Presets the analyzer and clears the display

Specifies the full CRT display size. The pen-up command prevents the initial vector (to point

700,500) from being drawn.

Specifies the starting point of the rectangle to be drawn by the program (coordinates 700,500).

The PD (pen-down) command causes a vector to be drawn on the CRT from the starting point coordinates to the next set of coordinates (900,500) specified in the program.

Plots the remainder of the rectangle on the CRT The pen-down command remains in effect.

Programming 285

PD

Pen Down

X Y

/-COORDINATE -\ r COORDINATE 7

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents x,y coordinates of vector endpoint(s), in display units.

Range Restriction

0- 1022

The PD command draws one or more vectors on the analyzer screen. The PA command, plot absolute, may be used to mark the starting point of the vector.

10 ASSIGN @Sa to 718

20 OlJTPDT @@a; “IP,A4;KSm;KSo;”

30 OIJTPUT @Sa;“D3;PU;”

4 0 OUTPTJT @Sa;“PA 300,500;PD 450,250;”

50 OUTPTJT @Sa;“150,250,300,500;”

6 0 END

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Presets the instrument and clears the display.

Specifies the expanded CRT display size. The pen-up command ensures that the initial vector to point (300,500) is not drawn.

Plot absolute command and the starting point of the triangle. The following pen-down command draws the vector from (300,500) to (450,250).

Plots the remainder of the triangle on the CRT The pen-down condition is still in effect.

286 Programming

PDA rDESTINATION- S O U R C E --\

PDA

Probability Distribution in Amplitude

RESOLUTION r PARAMETER -\

I

Item

REAL

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Default is dBm.

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-ZZand-

2- 12 characters required.

I

The PDA command loads the destination trace according to the pattern of amplitude values in the source trace.

Thus, the destination trace represents the amplitude probability function of the source trace.

The assumption is that the source trace is taken from the display. Hence, the values of the source trace are in dBm

(or dBmV or dBpV) when the display is in the log mode, or in display units when the display is in the linear mode.

The resolution parameter determines how the screen is divided vertically to create the probability function.

If the display is in the 10 dB/div log mode and the resolution parameter is specified as 5, then the screen is divided into twenty 5-dB increments. Each value of the source trace is tested in turn and the appropriate element of the destination trace is incremented by one. For example, if the first point of the source trace is 12 dB below the reference level (and thus falls in the eighteenth 5-dB increment from the bottom of the screen), then the 18th element of the destination trace is incremented. Note that the destination trace must have an appropriate number of points (in this case, 20).

If the display mode is linear, then the resolution parameter divides the screen into increments that are a percentage of the total number of display units within the graticule (1000). For example, if the resolution parameter is 5, the screen is divided into twenty 50-display-unit increments (5% of 1000 is 50). Otherwise, the procedure is the same as above.

The data need not be taken from the screen. PDA can be used on an array of calculated data. However, the resolution parameter must be chosen as if the data were in display units. For example, if the array values vary from

0 to 200, and you want to divide it into twenty increments (1 - 10, 11 - 20, 21- 30, etc.), then the resolution parameter must be 1.0 (1.0% of 1000 is 10).

Programming 287

PDF

Probability Distribution in Frequency

PDF rDESTINATION-\ r SOURCE -\

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA- 22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

When the PDF command is executed, elements of the source trace that are above the threshold value cause corresponding elements in the destination trace to be increased in amplitude by one display unit. The threshold value may be specified by the TH command. Otherwise, its default value is nine major divisions below the reference level.

OUTPTJT 718;“TRDEF S-AMJ?LE,SO;”

OUTPUT 718;“PDF S>MFLE,TRA;”

288 Programming

PEAKS

Peaks

PEAKS rDESTINATIONr SOURCE -

I-

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA- 22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

The PEAKS command sorts signal peaks by frequency or amplitude. PEAKS sorts the source trace and sends sorted results to the destination trace.

10 OUTPUT 718; “Ip;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“TRDEF FBEQ;”

30 OUTPUT 718;“TS;MOV FREQ,TBA;”

40 OUTPUT 718;“PEAKS TRC,FREQ,FBQ;”

80 END

When sorting by frequency, PEAKS first computes, in display units, the horizontal position of all peaks. These values are consecutively loaded into the destination trace, the lowest value occupying the first element. Thus, signal horizontal positions, from low to high, determine the amplitude of the destination trace from left to right. To obtain results in frequency units, scale the destination trace from display units to frequency units using either the center frequency and frequency span, or the start and stop frequencies.

When sorting by amplitude, PEAKS first computes the amplitudes of all peaks in the source trace. The horizontal position corresponding to each signal peak is loaded, in display units, into the destination trace. The horizontal position corresponding to the signal with the highest amplitude is loaded into the first element of the destination trace. The horizontal position corresponding to the signal with the second highest amplitude is loaded into the second element of the destination trace, and so on. It is in this manner that the horizontal positions corresponding to signals ranging from the highest amplitude to the lowest amplitude determine, from left to right, the amplitude of the destination trace.

PEAKS only sorts signals that are above the threshold value; to change the threshold, use the TH command before PEAKS is executed.

If necessary, the last sorted value is repeated to fill remaining elements of the destination trace.

Programming 289

PEAKS (Continued)

PEAKS also returns the number of signal peaks found. To access this value, execute

ENTER718;N

PRINTN after line 40 of the example program.

To access the data in the destination trace once PEAKS is executed, move the indexed trace data into a variable and display the variable on the screen, or return it to the controller by querying the variable. The following program example displays the first value of the destination trace, TRC, on the analyzer screen at the analyzer’s current pen location.

10 OUlTUT718;"VARDEFFlRST,O;"

20 OUTPTJT718;“MOVFIFfST,TFKI[1];"

30 OUTPUT718;“DSPLYFIRST,4.5;"

40 END

290 Programming

PLOT

Plot

PLOT

Item

PlX

PlY

P2X

P2Y

Description/Default

Plotter-dependent values that specify lower left plotter dimension.

Plotter-dependent values that specify upper right plotter dimension.

Range Restriction

Plotter dependent

Plotter dependent

The trace data, graticule, and annotation of the analyzer’s screen can be directly transferred via HP-IB to a Hewlett-

Packard plotter such as the 7245A/B, 724OA,7470A, 9872C, or 7550 using the PLOT command.

Before executing a program, set the HP-IB on the plotter to address 5:

16 8 4 2 1

\

4+1=5

ADDRESS

/

If the address switch on the plotter cannot be located, refer to the plotter’s operation manual.

When using the PLOT command, the scaling points (Plx, Ply; P2x, P2y) must be specified. These scaling points specify the x,y coordinates which determine the size of the plot. (For more scaling point information, refer to the plotter’s operation manual.)

I -

_ - -

P2x,P2y

- -+

I

;

I

C-------J

Plx,Ply

I

I

Programming 29 1

PP

Preselector Peak

The PP command optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude of a signal at the active marker. If a marker is not on screen, PP places a marker at the highest signal level, and optimizes preselector tracking at that frequency.

Normally, preselector tracking is automatically maintained so that the center of the preselector filter tracks the sweep. The PP command monitors the signal amplitude at the marker while the preselector frequency is adjusted to yield the maximum level of the signal response, provided the signal is a stable continuous wave signal. Use the

KS/ command to manually adjust the preselector frequency when measuring unstable signals.

OUTPUT.718;“Pp;"

The functions of the PP command and the @ key are identical. (See KS/ and KS = .)

292 Programming

PR

Plot Relative

X r C O O R D I N A T E 7 7 COOR&NATE 7

PR

I

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Represents CRT beam x and y coordinates, in display units, relative to the last beam position.

Range Restriction

0- 1022

The PR command specifies a plot location on the CRT relative to the last plot point coordinates. Vector coordinate sets (x,y pairs) following the PR command can be either positive or negative, depending on the direction the individual vectors are to be drawn. PU (pen-up) and PD (pen-down) commands tell the analyzer to draw or not draw the vectors on the CRT display.

A typical use of the PR command is shown in the sample program below.

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 OUTPTJT @Sa;“IP;A4;KSm;KSo;”

30 FOR X = 200 TO 800 STEP 200

40 OUTPUT @Sa;“PUPA”,X,l,l*X

50 GOSTJB Rectangle

60 NEXTX

70 STOP

80 Rectangle: !

90 OUTPUT @Sa;“PD PR 300,0,0- 200,- 300,0,0,200”

100 RETTJRN

110 END

Line 20:

Line 40:

Line 90:

Presets the analyzer and clears the display.

PA (plot absolute) command defines the starting point for the three rectangles to be drawn on the

CRT display.

PD (pen-down) command tells the analyzer to display the vectors drawn in accordance with the vector coordinates (x,y pairs) that follow the PR command. Vectors are then drawn to the four corners of the current rectangle.

I

Programming 293

PS

Skip Page

The PS command causes the address pointer to skip over the addresses in the remaining portion of the display memory page in use, and go to the first address at the beginning of the next display memory page. Display control work 1056 (DW 1056) can be substituted for the PS command.

If PS is executed when the address pointer is at an address in the fourth and last page (Trace C) of display memory, the pointer skips to address B in page 1. Because the program does not wait for a new refresh cycle l to begin before executing the next instruction, the skip may cause an increase in trace intensity as new data is written over the old. Increased trace intensity occurs only when the time span of the program is less than the default refresh rate. End-of-display control instruction word 1028 in the trace C page normally makes sure a refresh cycle occurs.

A typical use of the PS command is shown in the sample program below.

10 ASSIGN@Sato718

20 OUTPUT @Sa;“IP,S2;TS;DAlOO;PS;"

30 END

In the sample program above, the analyzer is preset (IP), put in the single-sweep mode (Sl), instructed to take a single sweep (TS), and then, from address 100 (DAlOO) in display memory page 1 (trace A), skip over (PS) the remainder of the page 1 addresses to the fist address in display memory page 2 (trace B) .

(See Appendix B.) l

(Refresh means to update the display from the display memory. Refresh cycles occur at a rate of approximately 50 Hz

2 9 4

P r o g r a m m i n g

PU

Pen-up

The PU command blanks the CRT beam to prevent plot vectors from being displayed on the CRT.

A typical use of the PU command is shown in the sample program below.

10 ASSIGN@SaTO718

20 OUTPUT @Sa;“IP,A4;KSm;KSo;"

30 OUTPUT@Sa;“D2;PU;"

40 OUTPUT@Sa;“PA700,500PD900,500"

50 OUTPUT @Sa;“900,300,700,300,700"

60 E N D

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Line 50:

Presets the instrument and clears the display.

Specifies display size D2 and, with the PU command, instructs the analyzer not to display the vector to the initial point specified by x,y coordinates 900,500.

PA (plot absolute) command establishes the starting point of the rectangle to be drawn on the

CRT The following PD (pen-down) command instructs the analyzer to display the vector to coordinates 700,500.

Plots and displays the remainder of the rectangle on the CRT

Programming 295

PWRBW

Power Bandwidth

PWRBW

PERCENT OF rTOTAL POWER-

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

REAL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA- 2.7 and _

2- 12 characters required.

0 to 100

The PWRBW command first computes the combined power of all signal responses contained in a trace array. The command then computes the bandwidth equal to a percentage of the total power, and returns this value to the controller.

For example, if the percent of total power is specified as 100%) the power bandwidth equals the frequency range of the CRT display, which is 100 MHz if the frequency span per division is 10 MHz. If 50% is specified, trace elements are eliminated from either end of the array until the combined power of the remaining signal responses equals half of the original power computed. The frequency span of these remaining trace elements is the power bandwidth returned to the controller.

The following example computes the power bandwidth of a trace, and returns 99% of the total power.

10 OUTPUT 718;“VARDEF P-BW,O;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“MOVP,BW,PWRBW !l’RA,99.0;”

30 OUTPU!C 718; “DIV P,sW,P,BW, lE6;”

40 OUTPUT 718; “D2;EM;PU;PA380,1000;”

45 OUTPUT 718;“TEXT @QQ% POWER BANDWIDTH = @;DSPLY P,BW,6.3;”

4 6 OUTPUT 718;“TEXT @ MHZ@;HD;”

50 END

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Lines 45 and 46:

2 9 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

Define a variable, P-BW, to store the power bandwidth.

Find the power bandwidth and move it into P,BW.

Convert P-BW to MHz.

Set display size to D2, erase trace C memory (which sets the display address to 30721, and set pen position to x = 380, y = 1000.

Write the results on the analyzer screen.

RB

Resolution Bandwidth

The RB command specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available bandwidths are 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The resolution bandwidths, video bandwidths, and sweep time are normally coupled. Executing RB decouples them. Execute CR to reestablish coupling.

OTJTPUT718;"RB 1KZ;"

The execution of the RB command, and the m key is identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 9 7

RC

Recall Last State

(RCLS)

RC

Item

DIGIT

Description/Default

Specifies analyzer register.

Range Restriction

1 through 9

The RC command recalls registers containing a set of instrument states. Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel configuration) sorted with the SAVES or SV commands.

Register 7 is a special register that contains the instrument state prior to the last instrument preset (IP) or single function change. Use the contents of register 7 to recover from inadvertent entries:

OUTPUT 718;“RC 7 ; ”

Registers 8 and 9 recall factory-selected control settings for calibration purposes.

The functions of the RCLS and RC commands, and front-panel RECALL key are identical. (Also see SAVES or

SV)

2 9 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

Recall State Register

(W

RCLS

Item

DIGIT

Description/Default

Specifies analyzer register.

Range Restriction

1 through 9

The RCLS command recalls registers containing a set of instrument states. Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel configuration) stored with the SAVES or SV commands.

Register 7 is a special register that contains the instrument state prior to the last instrument preset (IP) or single function change. Use the contents of register 7 to recover from inadvertent entries:

OUTPUT 718; “RCLS 7;”

Register 8 and 9 recall factory-selected control settings for calibration purposes.

The functions of the RCLS and RC commands, and front-panel [-II key are identical. (Also see SAVES or SV)

P r o g r a m m i n g 2 9 9

REPEAT

UNTIL

command

I ist

UN1 I L

I

Item

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement. Do not follow identifier with semicolon.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA. Do not follow identifier with semicolon.

Trace element, such as TRA[ lo].

Real

Any commands from this remote section.

Range Restriction

AA-U and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

COMMAND LIST

REPEAT and UNTIL commands form a looping construct. The command list is repeated until condition is true.

The following program lowers any off-screen signal.

10 OUTPUT 718;“S2;TS;El;”

2 0 OUTPUT 718;“IF’MA,GT,RL THEN”

3 0 OUTPUT 718;“BEPEAT RL UP;TS;El; ”

4 0 OUTPUT 718;“UNTlL MA,LE,RL ”

5 0 OUTPUT 718;“ENDlF 52;” ” ”

6 0 E N D

300 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

REPEAT

UNTIL

Use the FUNCDEF command to nest a REPEAT UNTIL command within another REPEAT UNTIL looping construct. The program below defines “C-LOP” as a looping construct in lines 30 through 60. The construct is then nested into the REPEAT UNTIL command in line 80.

10 OUTPUT718;“SNGLS;"

20 OUTPlJT718;“VARDEFCOUNT.,0;VARDEFSCORE,0;"

30 OUTPUT718;“FUNCDEFC~LOP,"""

40 OUTPUT718;“FtEPEATTS;"

50 OUl'PUT718;“ADDCOlJNT,COlJNT,1;"

80 OUTPlJT718;“UNTILCOTJNT,EQ,3;"""

70 OUTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

80 OUTPUT718;“C~LOp;"

90 OUTPUT718;“ADDSCOFiE,SCORE,1;"

100 OTJTPUT718;“UNTILSCOR.E,EQ,4;"

The program below does not work because the REPEAT UNTIL commands are nested without the use of the

FUNCDEF command.

10 0UTPUT718;“SNGLS;"

20 OUTPUT718;“VAFbDEFCOUNT,0;VAFbDEFSCORE,0;"

30 0UTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

40 OUTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

50 OUTPUT 718;“TS;"

80 OUTPTJT7l8;"ADDCOUNT,COUNT,1;"

70 OTJTPUT7l8;“UNTILCOUNT,EQ,3;"

80 OUTPUT7l8;“ADDSCORE,SCORE,1;"

90 OUTPUT7l8;“UNTILSCORE,EQ,4;"

100 E N D

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 0 1

REV

Revision

The REV command returns the firmware revision number and HP date code.

O U T P U T 718;“FLEV,”

3 0 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

RL

Reference Level

The RL command specifies the amplitude value of the top CRT graticule line, which is called the reference level.

The reference level can be specified from - 89.9 dBm to + 30 dBm with 0.1 dB resolution.

The reference level and input attenuator are coupled to prevent gain compression. Any signals with peaks at or below the reference level are not affected by gain compression.

The reference level range can be extended from - 129.9 dBm to +60 dBm with the KS1 command. When the reference level range is extended, and the mixer level commands, KS1 or ML, are used to change the threshold of the mixer input to values greater than - 10 dBm, signals on the spectrum analyzer screen may be affected by gain compression. (See AT and ML.)

OUTPUT718;“RL-1ODM;"

The functions of the RL command and the [ Z” ) key are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 0 3

RMS

Root Mean Square

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA- 22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

The RMS command returns the RMS value of the trace, in display units. Note that the value must be moved into a variable to be accessed.

OUTPUT 718;“VARDEF DESTINATION, 0;”

OUTPUT 718;“MOV DESTINATION,RMS TRC;”

3 0 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

ROFFSET

Reference Level Offset

(KSZ)

Item

REAL

Description/Default

Default value for units is dBm (DM) .

Range Restriction

+-3OOdB

The ROFFSET command offsets all amplitude readouts on tp CRT display without affecting the trace. The functions of the ROFFSET command and the front panel [,,,, fy) keys are identical.

Once activated, the ROFFSET command displays the amplitude offset in the active function block. And, as long as the offset is in effect while doing other functions, the offset is displayed to the left of the graticule.

Entering a zero with ROFFSET activated eliminates any amplitude offset.

Ou'TPUT718;“ROFFSET-12DM;"

The functions of the ROFFSET and KSZ commands are identical.

P r o g r a m m i n g 3 0 5

RQS

SRQ Mask

ROS

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Integer representing a bit mask for service requests (SRQ) .

Range Restriction

@- 255

The RQS command sets a bit mask for service requests (SRQ command).

On execution of a SRQ command, the analyzer logically ANDs the RQS mask with the binary equivalent of the

SRQ operand. When the result of this AND operation is a non-zero number, the analyzer sends a service request to the HP-IB controller.

A query for the RQS command returns the RQS operand.

See also SRQ and Appendix D.

3 0 6 P r o g r a m m i n g

Rl

Illegal Command SRQ

The Rl command deactivates all analyzer service requests (SRQs) except SRQ140, the illegal-command service request.

See Appendix D for more information on the Rl command

Programming 307

R2

End-of-Sweep SRQ

The R2 command activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command service requests.

See Appendix D for more information on the R2 command.

308 Programming

The R3 command activates the hardware-broken and illegal-command service requests.

See Appendix D for more information on the R3 command.

R3

Hardware-Broken SRQ

Programming 309

R4

Units-Key-Pressed SRQ

The R4 command activates the units-key-pressed and illegal-command service requests.

See Appendix D for more information on the R4 command.

310 Programming

SAVES

Save State

W)

NUMERIC DATA rFIELD-.

SAVES

Item

DIGIT

Description/Default

Specifies register for storage of instrument states.

Range Restriction l - 6

The SAVES command saves the current spectrum analyzer state in any of registers one through six. Register contents are not affected by power loss, but previously saved data is erased when new data is saved in the same register.

The functions of the SAVES and SV commands, and front-panel I,*I) key are identical.

OUTPUT 718;“SAVES 5;”

Programming 311

Signal Identification Delta Value

SIBDEL integer

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Specifies maximum difference allowed between the amplitude of a signal and its image, in dB.

Range Restriction

0,5, 10, 15,20,

25,30, and 35.

The SIGDEL command specifies the maximum difference allowed between the amplitude of a signal and its image for the internal signal identification routine, used for external mixing bands.

Execute the signal identification routine with the SIGID command.

312 Programming

Signal Identification

WV)

The SIGID command enables a signal identifier routine that uses the normal marker to automatically identify the signal under observation in the external mixing mode. The functions of the SIGID and KSv commands, and the front panel [,,,, ~ lb keys, are identical.

A normal marker must be activated prior to executing the SIGID (external mixer signal identifier) command. The

SIGID command determines the true frequency and mixing harmonic of the signal that the marker is on.

When signal identification is complete, the CENTER FREQUENCY is changed to match the frequency of the true signal, and CENTER FREQUENCY is left as the active function. If no identification can be made, the state before the SIGID command was executed is automatically restored with the “RECALL 7” function. When this happens, changing the harmonics and amplitude delta used by the signal identification routine may give better results. See

SIGDEL, NSTART and NSTOI?

If a harmonic lock is in effect when the SIGID command is executed, it is restored on completion of the SIGID command unless the identified signal cannot be tuned to with the “locked” harmonic. In this case, the original state, prior to executing the SIGID command, is automatically restored with the “RECALL 7” function, and the message “IDENTIFIED OUT OF BAND” appears on the CRT

If no marker is activated prior to executing SIGID, a peak search is done looking for the highest peak.

The SIGID command syntax is shown in the sample program line below.

OUTPUT 718;“SIGID;”

Programming 3 13

SMOOTH

Smooth

SMOOTH n u m b e r o f p a i n t s

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character, User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Integer representing number of points for running average.

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

1 < number of points < 39

Must be odd number.

NUMBER OF

POINTS

The SMOOTH command smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the running average.

Increasing the number of points increases smoothing.

OUTPUT 718; “SMOOTH TRA 23; ”

3 1 4

Programming

SNGLS

Single Sweep

The SNGLS command sets the analyzer to single sweep mode. Each time single sweep is pressed, one sweep is initiated if the trigger and data entry conditions are met. The functions of the SNGLS and S2 commands, and front-panel (,,,,, key are identical.

OUTPUT 718;“SNGLS;”

Programming 3 15

SP

Frequency Span cz3

SP r e a l iH

The SP command changes the total display frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency. The frequency span readout displays the total display frequency range. Divide the readout by ten to determine the frequency span per division.

Specifying 111 Hz enables zero span mode, which configures the analyzer as a fix-tuned receiver. Otherwise, the minimum span width is 100 Hz. Maximum span width is 2.5 GHz in the low band, and 22 GHz (2 to 24 GHz) in the microwave band.

The functions of the SP command and the front panel Ikey are identical. Thus, if span width is coupled to the resolution and video bandwidths, the bandwidths change with the span width to provide a predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise, sweep time changes to maintain a calibrated display, if coupled.

All of these functions are normally coupled, unless RB, VB, or ST have been executed. (See CR, CV or CT)

OUTPUT718;“SP1OMZ;"

316 Programming

- D E S T I N A T I O N t r a c e

I abel

- S O U R C E t r a c e l a b e l

SQR

Square Root v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r r e a l

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA [lo].

Range Restriction

AA-Z and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2-12 characters required.

The SQR command computes the square root of the source trace amplitude, point-by-point. The results go to the destination trace.

OUTPUT 718;“SQR TRC,Tl%B;”

Programming

3 17

SRQ

User-defined SRQ

SRO

Item

INTEGER

Description/Default

Integer representing a service request.

Range Restriction

8- 255

The SRQ command sends a service request to the controller when the SRQ operand fits the mask specified with the RQS command.

On execution of a SRQ command, the analyzer logically ANDs the RQS mask with the binary equivalent of the

SRQ operand. When the result of this AND operation is a non-zero number, the analyzer sends a service request to the HP-IB controller.

See also RQS and Appendix D.

318 Programming

0

ss

Center Frequency Step Size

Item

REAL

Description/Default

Default is Hz.

Range Restriction

The SS command specifies center frequency step size, and is the same function as the [“-“I key.

OUTPUT 718;“SS 10MZ;CF up;”

The above program line changes center frequency by 10 MHz.

Programming 3 19

ST

Sweep Time c33

The ST command specifies the rate at which the analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency or time span.

The sweep times available are shown below.

FREQUENCY SPAN

(> = 1OOHz)

ZERO FREQUENCY

SPAN (0 Hz)

SWEEP TIME

20 ms to 1500 set

SEQUENCY continuously

1ustolOms

20 ms to 1500 set

1,2,5, and 10 continuously

OUTPUT 718; “ST 100MS;”

The above program line sets the sweep time of the analyzer to 100 milliseconds.

320 Programming

STDEV

Standard Deviation

STDEV

Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-Z2 and _

2- 12 characters required.

The STDEV command returns to the controller the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.

OUTPUT 718;“IP;TS;S!I’DEV TRA;”

ENTER 718;N

PRINT N

E N D

Programming 32 1

SUB

Subtract

SUB r DESTINATION I r OPERAND 1 7 r OPERAND 2 7

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[ lo].

Real

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The SUB command subtracts operand 2 from operand 1, point by point, and send the difference to the destination.

operand 1 - operand 2 - destination

The operands and destination may be different lengths. The trace operands (TRA, TRB, TRC, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length. A variable identifier or numeric data field is one element long. When operands diier in length, the last element of the shorter operand is repeated for the subtraction process. When the operands are longer than the destination, they are truncated to fit.

3 2 2 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

SUB

The results and operands of trace math are truncated if they are not within certain limits. If operating on traces A,

B, or C, results must be within 1023. If operating on user-defined traces, results must be within 32,767.

See TRMATH .

Programming 323

SUM

I Item

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

The SUM command sums the amplitudes of the trace elements, and returns the sum to the controller.

10 OTJTPUT 718;“Ip; SNGLS; CLRW TRA; TS;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“SUNI TM;”

30 ENTER 718;N

40 PRINTN

50 END

I

324 Programming

SUMSQR

Sum Square

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

The SUMSQR command squares the amplitude of each trace element, and returns the sum of the squares to the controller.

10 OlJTHJT 718;“Ip; SNGLS; CLRW TRA; TS;”

2 0 OUTPUT 718;“SUMSQR TRA;”

3 0 ENTER 7 1 8 ; N

4 0 P R I N T N

5 0 E N D

Programming 325

sv

Save State

(SAVES)

DIGIT

Description/Default

Specifies register for storage of instrument states.

Range Restriction l - 6

The SV command saves the current spectrum analyzer state in any of registers one through six. Register contents are not affected by power loss, but previously saved data is erased when new data is saved in the same register.

The functions of the SAVES and SV command, and front panel a key are identical.

OUTPTJT 718; “SV 5; ”

326 Programming

SW

Skip to Next Control Instruction

(----G--)-Q

The skip-to-next-control-instruction command, SW, instructs the display to skip to the next control word from the present display memory address. Use SW to omit labels, markers, etc. from the display Display control word

1027 (DW 1027) can be substituted for programming command SW

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 OTJTPUT @Sa; “DA 2073 SW,”

30 END

In the example above, display memory address 2073 contains the label control word that places the center frequency “I I” mark on the CRT However, this marker is omitted from the display because the SW command has been added to the address.

(See Appendix B.)

Programming 327

Sl

Continuous Sweep

(CONT)

The Sl command sets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the analyzer continues to sweep (sweep time L 20 ms) at a uniform rate, from the start frequency to the stop frequency, unless new data entries are made from the front panel or via HP-IB. If the trigger and data entry conditions are met, the sweep is continuous.

The sweep light indicates a sweep is in progress. The light is out between sweeps, during data entry, and for sweep times 40 ms.

OUTPUT 718;“Sl;”

The functions of the Sl and CONT commands and the front panel i-1 key are identical.

328 Programming

Single Sweep

(SNGLS)

The S2 command sets the analyzer to single sweep mode. Each time single sweep is pressed, one sweep is initiated if the trigger and data entry conditions are met.

OUTPUT 718;“52;”

The functions of the S2 and SNGLS commands and the front panel II-] key are identical.

Programming 329

TA

Transfer A

The TA command transfers trace A amplitude values, in display units, from the analyzer to the controller. The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the CRT display. Display unit values that are stored in the display memory can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats of the analyzer (01,02,03, or 04).

Transfer of trace amplitude data should only be done as follows:

1.

Select single sweep mode (S2).

2.

Select desired analyzer settings.

3.

Take one complete sweep (TS) .

4. Transfer data.

This procedure ensures that the current settings of the analyzer are reflected in the transferred data.

When the TA command is executed, and the analyzer is in continuous sweep mode, the blank-ahead marker is also transferred as amplitude values in the 01 and 02 format. The blank-ahead marker is not transferred in the 03 and 04 formats.

The blank-ahead marker is composed of positive, blanked amplitude values and is immediately ahead of the updated, sweeping trace. These values represent the amplitude responses of the previous sweep, plus 2048.

Thus, they are off (above) the screen.

The blank-ahead marker is eight display units wide and is transferred as such. For example, if an amplitude value of 100 falls within the blank-ahead marker area when the sweep is transferred, the amplitude value becomes 2148

(amplitude value 100 + data word 2048, in which bit number 11 of graph data is positive blanked). For further information on data word coding see Consolidated Coding Data in Appendix B.

When transferring amplitude data, only the data words from 1001 display memory addresses are transferred out of the total of 1024 available display memory addresses. Each of the 1024 display memory addresses contains a single data word. The 23 data words not transferred are at address 0 (used for the control instruction word) and at addresses 1002 through 1024 (not used by the analyzer for trace data, but available for programming custom graphics or labels).

The sample program below demonstrates how to store a trace similar to the one in the following illustration.

330 Programming

(Continued)

TA

10 ASSIGN @Sa TO 718

20 PRINTER IS 701

30 DIM A( 1001)

40 !

50 OUTPUT @a; “TP,LF;”

60 ODTPDT @Sa;“CFlOOM3;SP2M3;S2;TS;”

70 OUTPDT @Sa;“Ol;TA;”

80 FOR N = 1 TO 1001

90 ENTER @Sa;A(N)

100 N E X T N

110 !

120 FORN=490TO810

130 PRINT A(N)

140 N E X T N

180 E N D

Line 30:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Lines 80 to 100:

Lines 120 to 140:

Reserves controller memory for 1001 amplitude values.

Presets the instrument.

Sets analyzer to 100 MHz center frequency with 2 MHz frequency span. Selects single sweep mode and takes one complete sweep of the trace (graph) data.

Selects analyzer output to be in 01 format and commands the analyzer to transfer trace

A amplitude values to the controller.

Sequentially reads all 1001 trace A amplitude values into A(N) of the controller.

Prints out trace A amplitude values at all 20 points between x-axis coordinates 490 and

510.

Programming 33 1

T B

Transfer B

The TB command transfers trace B amplitude values, in display units, from the analyzer to the controller. The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the CRT display. Display unit values that are stored in the display memory can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats of the analyzer (01,02,03, or 04).

Transfer of trace amplitude data should only be done as follows:

1.

Select single sweep mode (S2).

2.

Select desired analyzer settings.

3.

Take one complete sweep (TS) .

4. Transfer data.

This procedure ensures that the current settings of the analyzer are reflected in the transferred data.

When the TB command is executed, and the analyzer is in continuous sweep mode, the blank-ahead marker is also transferred as amplitude values in the 01 and 02 format. The blank-ahead marker is not transferred in the 03 and 04 formats.

The blank-ahead marker is composed of positive, blanked amplitude values and is immediately ahead of the updated, sweeping trace. These values represent the amplitude responses of the previous sweep, plus 2048.

Thus, they are off (above) the screen.

The blank-ahead marker is eight display units wide and is transferred as such. For example, if an amplitude value of 100 falls within the blank-ahead marker area when the sweep is transferred, the amplitude value becomes 2148

(amplitude value 100 + data word 2048, in which bit number 11 of graph data is positive blanked). For further information on data word coding see Consolidated Coding Data in Appendix B.

When transferring amplitude data, only the data words from 1001 display memory addresses are transferred out of the total of 1024 available display memory addresses. Each of the 1024 display memory addresses contains a single data word. The 23 data words not transferred are at address P, (used for the control instruction word) and at addresses 1002 through 1024 (not used by the analyzer for trace data, but available for programming custom graphics or labels).

The sample program below demonstrates how to store a trace similar to the one in the following illustration.

332 Programming

(Continued)

TB

10 ASSIGN@SaTO718

20 PRINTJZRIS701

30 DIMA(1001)

40 !

80 OUTPTJT@Sa;“IP;LF;"

60 OUTPTJT@Sa;"CF100MZ;SP2MZ;S2,TS;"

70 OUTPUT @Sa;“Ol;TB;"

80

90

FORN=lTOlOOl

EN'IlZR@Sa;A(N)

100 N E X T N

110 !

120 FORN=490TO810

130 PRINTA

140 N E X T N

180 E N D

Line 30:

Line 50:

Line 60:

Line 70:

Lines 80 to 100:

Lines 120 to 140:

Reserves controller memory for 1001 amplitude values.

Presets the instrument.

Sets analyzer to 100 MHz center frequecy with 2 MHz frequency span. Selects single sweep mode and takes one complete sweep of the trace (graph) data.

Selects analyzer output to be in 01 format and commands the analyzer to transfer trace

B amplitude values to the controller.

Sequentially reads all 1001 trace B amplitude values into A(N) of the controller.

Prints out trace B amplitude values at all 20 points between x-a.xis coordinates 490 and

510.

Programming 333

T D F

Trace Data Format

The TDF command formats trace information for return to the controller.

OUTPUT 718; “TDF B;”

Specifying M enables the 01 format and returns values in display units, from 0 to 1001.

Specifying P enables the 03 format and returns absolute measurement values, such as dBm or Hz.

Specifying A returns data as an A-block data field. The MDS command determines whether data comprises one or two 8bit bytes. (See MDS.)

Specifying I returns data as an I-block data field. The MDS command determines whether data comprises one or two &bit bytes. (See MDS .)

Specifying B enables the 02 or 04 format. The MDS command determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes.

See the 01,02,03, and 04 FORMAT commands.

334 Programming

TEXT

Item

STRING

DELIMITER

Characters

Description/Default

Must match. Marks beginning and end of command list.

Alphanumeric characters.

Range Restriction

!“$%&‘/: = @\S

ASCII character 32 through

126.

The TEXT command writes text on the spectrum analyzer screen at the current pen position.

OUTPUT 718; “TEXT ““CONNECT ANTENNA.” “;”

TEXT

Text

Programming 335

T H

Threshold

Item Description/Default

Threshold value defaults to nine major divisions below reference level.

UP or DN to step threshold by 10 dB.

Range Restriction

The TH command blanks signal responses below the threshold level, similar to a base line clipper. The threshold level is nine major divisions below the reference level, unless otherwise specified. The Up and DN commands move the threshold 10 dB.

The threshold level is annotated in reference level units at the lower left-hand side of the CRT display. (See Tld and

THE.)

The threshold can also be used as a variable. The program below places a marker on the largest signal that is greater than the threshold level.

10 OTJTPUT718;“IF$LF;TH-38DM;"

20 OUTPUT718;“TS;MIPKHI;MA;"

30 OlJTPUT718;“IF MA,GT,TH"

40 OTJTPUT718;“THENCF20MZ;"

50 OV'ITTJT718;“ELSECF100MZ;TS;MKPKHI;"

60 0UTPTJT718;“ENDIF;"

70 E N D

336 Programming

T H E

Threshold Enable

THE

The THE command disables or enables the threshold level. The threshold level is specified by the TH command.

OUTF’UT 718;“THE OFF;"

When queried (? or OA), TH returns the threshold line state, followed by carriage-return/line-feed (ASCII codes

13, 10). The end-or-identify state (EOI) is asserted with line feed.

Programming 337

IF THEN ELSE ENDIF

/ - O P E R A N D 11 v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r n u m e r i c d a t a f i e l d -) r OPERAND 2 7 v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r n u m e r i c d a t a f i e l d

THEN command

I ist

ELSE command

I ist

END I F

Item

COMMAND LIST

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alphanumeric character. Any spectrum analyzer command from this section.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier. such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as TRA[lO].

Real

Range Restriction

AA-Z and _

2- 12 characters required.

I

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

The IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF commands form a decision and looping construct. They compare operand

1 to operand 2. If the condition is true, the command list is executed. Otherwise, commands following

ELSE or ENDIF are executed.

The IF command must be delimited with the ENDIF command.

The following program uses the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command to place a marker on the largest signal that is greater than the threshold level.

3 3 8 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued) IF

THEN

ELSE ENDIF

10 OUTPUT718;“IP;LF;TH-35DM;"

20 OUTPUT718;"T8;MKPKHI;MA;"

30 OUTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,TH"

40 OUTPUT718;“THENCF20MZ;"

50 0TJTPUT718;"EL8ECF100MZ;TS;MKPKHI;"

60 OUTPUT718;“ENDIF;"

70 E N D

The program below does not incorporate the ELSE branch of the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF command. The program lowers any signal positioned above (off) the analyzer screen.

10 OUTPUT718;“S2;TS;El;"

20 OTJTPUT718;“IFMA,GT,RLTHEN"

30 OUTPUT718;‘%EPEATRLUP;TS;E1"

40 OUTPUT718;“UNTILMA,LE,RL"

50 OUTPUT 718;"ENDIF Sl;" " "

60 END

Programming 339

TM

Trigger Mode

TM

The TM command selects trigger mode: free, video, line, or external trigger. See Tl, T2, T3, and T4.

The query response return the trigger mode.

OUTPUT 718;“TM EXT;"

340 Programming

TRDEF

Trace Define

TRDEF trace l e n g t h

I

Item

Trace Label

TRACE LENGTH

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Determines the number of elements (points) in a trace. Default is 1001.

INTEGER.

Range Restriction

AA- ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

p, to 1008

The TRDEF statement establishes the length and name of auser-defined trace. User-defined traces form the operand of many remote functions in this section. These functions show “TRACE LABEL.” as an operand in their syntax diagrams. Following are some of the functions that operate on user-defined traces.

MOV MPk: XCH, TRACE, TRGRPH, NEG, DIV AVG, BLANK, ADD, MXM, SCALE, MXMH, SUB,

MIN, TWNDOW

If two traces have different lengths, the largest length is used for the specified span. The shorter length accepts data until filled.

When a trace of a greater length is operated on and stored in a trace of lesser length, the trace is truncated to fit.

Conversely, when a shorter trace is operated on and stored in a trace of longer length, the last trace element is extended for operations with the longer length. Thus, a single element trace acts like a display line in trace operations.

J

Programming 341

TRDSP

Trace Display

TRDSP

The TRDSP command displays a trace or turns if off. The command does not affect any other trace operations.

OUTPUT718;“TRDSPTRC,ON;"

342 Programming

TRGRPH

Trace Graph

EXPAND I NG rFACTOR I

TRACE r ARRAY 7

The TRGRPH command displays a trace A, B, or C, or a user-defined trace anywhere on the spectrum analyzer display. The X and Y positions orient the trace above and to the right of a point on the CRT specified by the display address. The trace can be expanded, according to the scale determined by the expanding factor.

For example, the following command would display a user-defined trace named TEST occupying the length of the

CRT at the base line, if TEST was originally full-scale, and was compressed by 10 with the COMPRESS command:

TRGRPH0,0,0,10TEST;

Note that the above TRGRPH command fills display addresses Id through 1000 with the amplitude information of the TEST trace array. Thus, any original trace A information is lost.

The program below moves trace A data into a user-defined trace array, called TEST then positions TEST 100 display units above the CRT baseline.

10 0UTPUT718;“IP;LF;CF100MZ;SP20MZ;A1;S2;TS;"

20 OUTPUT718;“TRDEFTEX3T,1001;"

30 OUTPTJT718;“MOVTEST,TFU;"

40 0UTPTJT718‘TRGRPH0,0,100,1,TEST;"

50 E N D

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30:

Line 40:

Sets up an active trace.

Defines user-defined trace array.

Moves trace A into array

Display array, filling display addresses allocated for trace A.

To reposition traces A, B, and C without the use of a user-defined trace array, substitute the letter I for the display address.

Programming 343

TRMATH

Trace Math

( TRMATH -%

,- STRING DATA FIELD -\ s t r i n g del i m i t a r command

I i s t

,- A-BLOCK DATA FIELD ‘-,

,-- I - B L O C K D A T A F I E L D ‘-\ command

I i s t

I

I

Item

COMMAND LIST

LENGTH

Description/Default

Any spectrum analyzer commands from this

Remote section.

Two &bit bytes specifying length of command list, in g-bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB.

Must match. Marks beginning and end of command list.

Range Restriction

STRING

DELIMITER

!‘,$%&‘/: = @J\-

The TRMATH command executes a command list at the end of a sweep. Compose the command Iii with any of the following commands only.

Trace Math Commands:

AMB, AMBPL, APB, AXB, BL, BML, BTC, BXC, Cl, C2, EX, KSG, KSH, KSc, KSi, KSI, VAVG

User-Operator Functions:

MO\! SUB, ADD, MPY DIV, LOG, EXP MXM, MIN, XCH, SQR, CONCAT, CTM, CTA, AVG

If an on-end-of-sweep command is encountered, it is executed after the contents of the TRMATH command are executed.

The operands and resuks of trace math are truncated if they are not within certain limits. If operating on traces A,

B, or C, results must be within 1023. If operating on user-defined traces, results must be within 32,767.

3 4 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

(Continued)

TRMATH

The program below halves the amplitude of trace A and moves it to trace B. If trace A is in log mode, this is equivalent to the square root of trace A.

10 OUTPUT718;“A1;B3;"

12 OUTPUT7l8;“DISPOSETRMA!FH;"

20 OTJTPUT718;"TFtMATH! DIVTFLB,TRA,2! ;"

30 END

See DISPOSE.

Programming 345

TRPST

Trace Preset

The TRPST command executes the following commands:

A l

B4

C l

KSK

EM

TP)

L!J

DISPOSE ONEOS

DISPOSE TRMATH

DISPOSE ONSWP

346 Programming

TRSTAT

Trace State

TRSTAT

The TRSTAT command returns trace states to the controller: clear-write, off, view, or blank.

Trace Clear/Write CLRW

Trace Off TRDSP

Trace View VIEW

Trace Blank BLANK

Trace Is Swept and Updated Trace Is Displayed

X X

X

X

I

Programming 347

TS

Take Sweep

The take sweep command, TS, starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is executed. One

TS command is required for each sweep in the single mode.

The function, marker, trace, coupled function, preselector peak, automatic zoom and video average commands, and a number of the shii functions require one complete sweep to update the display and trace memory. This is to avoid losing information for the output of measurement data on either the CRT display or through the HP-IB interface.

In the example above, the command sequence does not allow sufficient time for a full sweep of the specified span, before VIEW is executed. Therefore, only the span set by the instrument preset is displayed in trace A.

A TS command inserted before VIEW, as shown in the program line below, makes the analyzer take one complete sweep before displaying trace A. This allows the analyzer sufficient time to respond to each command in the sequence.

A TS command is also recommended before HP-IB transmission of marker data (amplitude, frequency) on the

HP-IB bus, and before marker operations (peak search, preselector peak). This is because the active marker is repositioned at the end of each sweep.

The TS command guarantees that the HP-IB bus transmission and CRT display contain marker position information that is relative to the current trace response.

When the analyzer receives a TS command, it is not ready to receive any more data via HP-IB until one full sweep has been completed. However, when slow sweep speeds are being used, the controller can be programmed to perform computations or to address other instruments on the HP-IB bus while the analyzer is completing its sweep.

In normal programming practice, a semicolon terminates each command statement. By using the semicolon as a terminator, an automatic carriage-return/line-feed is performed by the controller. However, the controller can perform computations or address other instruments while the analyzer is executing TS, if the carriage-return/linefeed is suppressed.

In the program line below, the semicolon at the end of the line (outside the quotation marks) suppresses the carriage-return/line-feed. The controller is now available to proceed to the next program line while the analyzer is completing its sweep.

OUTPUT718;“ST5SC;R2;TS";

The R2 command in the program line above enables the end-of-sweep service request when the analyzer is finished sweeping. This service request interrupts the controller program to allow subsequent addressing of the analyzer. Refer to Appendix D for a complete description of the R2 Service Request.

348 Programming

TB

Threshold Off

The TP) command removes the threshold boundary and its readout from the CRT display.

OUTPUT 718;"TO;"

0

The function of the TpI command and the THRESHOLD m key are identical.

350 Programming

Tl

Free Run Trigger

The Tl command sets the analyzer sweep to free run trigger mode. The functions of the Tl command and front panel a key are identical.

See TM.

OUTPTJT718;T1;"

Programming 35 1

T2

Line Trigger

The T2 command sets the analyzer sweep to line trigger mode. This function triggers the analyzer sweep when the line voltage passes through zero in a positive direction. The functions of the T2 command and front panel m key are identical. (See TM.)

OUTPUT 718;"T2;"

352 Programming

T3

External Trigger

The T3 command sets the analyzer to external trigger mode. This function triggers the analyzer sweep when an external voltage passes through approximately 1.5 volts in a positive direction. The external trigger signal level must be between 0 and 5 volts.

The functions of the T3 command and front panel (,,, trigger are identical. (See TM.)

OUTPUT 718; “T3;”

Programming 353

T4

Video Trigger

The T4 command sets the analyzer sweep to video trigger mode. This function triggers the analyzer sweep when the voltage level of a detected RF envelope reaches the level set by the trigger LEVEL knob. The level (set by the

LEVEL knob) corresponds to detected levels displayed on the CRT between the bottom graticule (full CCW) and the top graticule (full CW) .

The functions of the T4 command and front panel (,,,, trigger key are identical. (See TM.)

OUTPUT 718;“T4;"

354 Programming

R E P E A T command

I ist

U N T I L

/ C O N D I T I O N

REPEAT UNTIL

\

Item

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement. Do not follow identifier with semicolon.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA. Do not follow identifier with semicolon.

Trace element, such as TRA[lOl

Real

Any commands from this remote section.

Range Restriction

AA-Z2 and _

Z- 12 characters required.

NUMERIC DATA

FIELD

COMMAND LIST

The REPEAT and UNTIL commands form a looping construct. The command list is repeated until the condition is true.

The following program lowers any off screen-signal.

10 OUTPUT 718;“SW;TS;El;”

2 0 OUTPUT 718;“lF MA,GT,RL THEN”

3 0 OUTPUT 718;“REPEATRL UP;TS;El; ”

4 0 OUTPUT 718;“lJNTlL MA,LE,RL ”

5 0 OUTPUT 718;“ENDlF Sl;” ” ”

6 0 E N D

Programming 355

REPEAT

UNTIL (Continued)

Use the FUNCDEF command to nest a REPEAT UNTIL command within another REPEAT UNTIL looping construct. The program below defines “C-LOP” as a looping construct in lines 30 through 60. The construct is then nested into the REPEAT UNTIL command in line 80.

10 OUTPUT718;“SNGLS;"

20 OUTPUT7l8;“VARDEFCOUNT,0;VARDEFSCORE,0;"

30 OUTPUT 718;“FUNCDEF C-LOP," " "

40 OUTPUT718;“REPEATTS;"

50 OUTPUT7l8;“ADDCOUNT,COUNT,1;"

80 OUTPUT718;“UNTILCOUNT,EQ,3;"""

70 0lJTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

80 OUTPUT7l8;“C~LOp;"

90 OUTPUT718;“ADDSCORE,SCORE,1;"

100 OUTPUT718;“UNTILSCORE,EQ,4;"

The program below does not work because the REPEAT UNTIL commands are nested without the use of the

FUNCDEF command.

10 OUTPUT718,“SNGLS;"

20 OUTPUT7l8;“VARDEFCOUNT,0;VARDEFSCORE,0;"

30 OUTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

40 OUTPUT718;“REPEAT;"

50 OUTPUT 718;“TS;"

50 OUTPUT718;“ADDCOUNT,COUNT,l;"

70 OWITUT718;“UNTILCOTJNT,EQ,3;"

80 OTJTPUT7l8;“ADDSCORE,SCORE,1;"

90 OUTPUT718;“UNTILSCORE,EQ,4;"

100 E N D

356 Programming

UR

Upper Right Recorder Output

The UR command sends a voltage to the rear panel RECORDER OUTFWTS. The voltage level remains until a different command is executed. Use the UR command to calibrate the upper right dimension of a recorder.

OUTPUT 718; “U-R; ”

The functions of the UR command and front panel

UPPER

RIGHT key are identical (See Introduction in Section I.)

Programming 357

USTATE

State

- A-BLOCK DATA F I EL0 \

I

Item

LENGTH

Description/Default

Two 8-bit bytes specifying length of command list, in 8-bit bytes. The most significant byte is first: MSB LSB.

8-bit bytes of data representing command list.

Range Restriction

DATA BYTES ASCII characters 0 to 255.

The USTATE command configures or returns configuration of user-defined states defined by these commands:

ONEOS

ONSWP

KEYDEF

FUNCDEF

TRDEF

TRMATH

358 Programming

VARDEF

Variable Define

VARDEF variable identifier real

I

Item Description/Default Range Restriction

I

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

User-defined identifier. Alphanumeric character.

AA-ZZ and _

2- 12 characters required.

The VARDEF command assigns a real value to a variable. The value is assigned immediately after VARDEF execution and reassigned during any instrument preset.

I

I

The following program demonstrates the VARDEF command.

10 OUTPUT 718;“SNGLS;”

20 OUTPUT 718;“VARDEF COUNT,0;V..DEF SCOR,0;”

30 OUTPUT 718; “FUNCDEF C-LOP;” ” ”

40 OUTPUT 718; “REPEAT TS;”

50 OUTPUT 718; “ADD COUNT,COUNT, 1;”

80 OUTPUT 718;“TJNTIL COUNT,EQ,B;” ” ”

70 OUTPUT 718;“REPEAT;”

80 OUTPUT 718;“C-LOP;”

90 OUTPUT 718;“ADD scoRE,scoRE,1;”

100 OUTPUT 718;“lJNTIL SCORE,EQ,4;”

Programming 359

VARIANCE

TRACE LABEL

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Range Restriction

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

The VARIANCE command returns to the controller the amplitude variance of the specified trace, in display units.

10 OUTPUT 718;“VARIANCE TRC;”

20 ENTER 718;N

30 PRINTN

40 END

360 Programming

VAVG

Video Average

VAVG

Item

AVERAGE LENGTH

Description/Default

Real. Default is 100.

Range Restriction

Represents maximum number of sweeps executed for averaging.

The VAVG command enables video averaging. During video averaging, two traces are displayed simultaneously.

Trace C contains signal responses as seen at the input detector. Trace A or B contains the same responses digitally averaged. The digital reduces the noise floor level, but does not affect the sweep time, bandwidth, or any other analog characteristics of the analyzer.

Before executing VAVG, select trace A or B as the active trace (CLRW) and blank the remaining trace.

The active function readout indicates the number of sweeps averaged; the default is 100 unless otherwise specified. Increasing the number of sweeps averaged increases the amount of averaging.

Use VAVG to view low level signals without slowing the sweep time. Video averaging can lower the noise floor more than a 1 Hz video bandwidth, if a large number of sweeps is specified for averaging. Video average may also be used to monitor instrument state changes (changing bandwidths, center frequencies, etc.) while maintaining a low noise floor. (See Chapter 11 in Section I. Also see KSG and KSH.)

OTJTPUT718;"VAVG125;"

Programming 36 1

VB

Video Bandwidth

The VB command specifies the video filter bandwidth, which is a post-detection filter. Available bandwidths are 1

Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz.

The program line below sets the video bandwidth to 10 kHz.

OUTPUT 718;“VB lOK!Z;”

The functions of the VB command and front panel m key are identical.

362 Programming

VBO

Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset

The VBO command specifies the relation between the video and resolution bandwidths that is maintained when these bandwidths are coupled. The bandwidths are usually coupled, unless the RB or VB commands have been executed.

Selecting P, sets the ratio to one, that is, the resolution and video bandwidths are always equal.

Selecting 1 sets the video bandwidth one step wider than the resolution bandwidth:

Resolution Bandwidth

3 MHz

1 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Video Bandwidth

3MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 Hz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

Selecting -1 sets the video bandwidth 1 step narrower than the resolution bandwidth.

Resolution Bandwidth

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 Hz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

Video Bandwidth

3 MHz

1 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Programming 363

VIEW

View

VIEW

The VIEW command displays trace A, B, or C, and stops the sweep. Thus, the trace is not updated. Trace A and

C are discussed below. For detailed information about trace B. see B3 in this section.

DISPLAY

MEMORY

ADDRESSES l - 1 0 0 1

1025o-R2025

3073°-R4073

- C%

REFRESH D’SPLAY

When VIEW TRA is executed, the contents of trace A are stored in display memory addresses 1 through 1023.

Address 0 is reserved for the instruction word 1040’. Similarly, when VIEW TRC is executed, the contents of trace

C are stored in display memory addresses 3073 through 4095, and address 3072 is reserved for the instruction work 1048’. Therefore, any information stored in address fJ is lost when VIEW TRA is executed. Likewise, the contents of address 3072 are lost when VIEW TRC is executed.

If you have used address 91 or 3072 for a graphics program, or label, you may wish to save their contents before executing VIEW.

OUTPUT 718;“vIEW TFLC;”

For additional information, refer to Appendix A. (See B3, A3, KSj, and TBSTAT) l

1040 and 1048 are machine instruction words. 1040 sets addresses 1 through 1023 to zero, and draws trace A. 1048 does the same, but draws the trace dimly.

3 6 4 P r o g r a m m i n g

XCH

Exchange

/ - - - D E S T I N A T I O N \ - D E S T I N A T I O N - - ,

XCH c t r a c e l a b e l v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r

* t r a c e l a b e l v a r i a b l e i d e n t i f i e r c

I

Item

TRACE LABEL

VARIABLE

IDENTIFIER

Description/Default

Alpha character. User-defined label declared in

TRDEF statement.

Alpha character. User-defined identifier declared in VARDEF statement.

Alpha character. Measurement-variable identifier, such as CF or MA.

Trace element, such as

TRA( 101.

Range Restriction

AA-Z.7 and _

2- 12 characters required.

AA-22 and _

2- 12 characters required.

The XCH command exchanges the contents of the destinations. The destinations may be different lengths, as trace operands (TRA, TRB, TRC, and trace label) range from 1 to 1008 elements in length, and a variable identifier is 1 element long. During execution of the XCH command, the longer destination is truncated to fit the shorter destination.

P r o g r a m m i n g

3 6 5

Section 111

Appendixes

Appendix A - DISPLAY MEMORY STRUCTURE

Appendix B-ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

Appendix C - LEARN STRJNG CONTENT

Appendix D - SERVICE REQUESTS

Appendix E - FAST REMOTE OPERATJON

(KSS AND KST)

Appendix F -TUNING CURVES

Appendix G - CENTER FREQUENCY/SPAN

TUNJNG CHARACTERISTICS

Appendix H - 1 ST LO OUTPUT

Appendix I - OPERATING DIFFERENCES

Appendix J - EQUIVALENT HP 8566B AND HP 8566A

COMMANDS

APPENDIX A DISPLAY MEMORY STRUCTURE

Appendix A

DISPLAYMEMORYSTRUCTURE

This appendix describes the spectrum analyzer display memory A summary of trace data manipulation by the trace mode functions is also included.

The display memory is defined as the digital storage allocated in the spectrum analyzer for the information that is presented on the CRT display. It comprises four different memories: three trace memories and one annotation memory. Addresses are assigned as follows:

DISPLAY MEMORY ADDRESSES

Page 1

Trace A

1023

1 0 2 4

Page 2

Tirace B

2 0 4 7

2 0 4 8

I

Page 3

Graticule and

Annotation

3071

3 0 7 2

Page 4

Trace C

TRACES

The trace pages are used primarily to store analyzer response data to be displayed. Use is not restricted to the storage of trace data. Operator defined graphics and annotation can also be written into the memory for display on the CRT

Each trace address may contain an integer from 0 to 4095. When drawing, trace values from 0 to 1023 are plotted on the CRT display as amplitude y position, in display units. Appendix B discusses these values in detail.

A p p e n d i x 1

DISPLAY M E M O R Y S T R U C T U R E

1 0 2 3

1 0 0 0

APPENDIX A

Y P O S I T I O N i n D i s p l a y U n i t s

7 0 0

6 0 0

5 0 0

4 0 0

3 0 0

2 0 0

1 0 0

0

0

\

1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 3

X POSITION in Display Units

For each trace, A, B, or C, the display width on the CRT is determined by the instruction word in the first address for that trace. In the example below, the first address is 1024 and the instruction word is 1040.

Trace B uyglll~)

Addresses

Address

:

:

:

:

2024

2025

2026

2027

1024

1025

1026

:

:

:

I

2d23

Amplitude

Value, Y

1040

622

531

:

:

:

181 :

162

185

1072

1072

(x,,dnP;i;on

Display Instruction

KU=9

(1,531)

I

I

:

:

(998,181) :

(999,162)

(1000,185)

Over-range

Addresses

(Blanked) i

Addresses 2023 and 2024 describe one trace line drawn from x,y coordinates (998,181) to x,y coordinates

(999,162). The 1072 values shown for the overrange addresses tell the analyzer to blank these values instead of interpreting them as coordinates.

ANNOTATION AND GRATICULE

Page 3 of the display memory fills with instructions on instrument preset. These instructions draw the graticule and annotation on the displays.

The display memory in page 3 contains the information necessary to position and display (or blank) labels, graticule lines, and markers. A brief description of the contents of page 3 is given on the next page. The first

2 A p p e n d i x

APPENDIX A DISPLAY MEMORY STRUCTURE addresses on each line are those of the instructions for each readout.

Address Contents *

2048-2049,2060-2064

.

2050 - 2054

2055 - 2059

2065 - 2084

2085 - 2099

2 1 0 0 - 2 1 1 4

2115-2154,2165-2167

2155 - 2159

2160-2164

2 1 6 8 - 2 1 7 5

2176 - 2191

2192

-

2207

2208 - 2239

2240 - 2271

2272 - 2303

2304- 2335

2336 - 2367

2368 - 2383

2 3 8 4 - 2 3 9 9

2401- 2431

2432 - 2463

2 4 6 4 - 2 4 9 5

2496 - 2527

2528 - 2559

2560 - 2623

2624 - 2655

2656 - 2687

2688 - 2751

2752 - 2767

2768 - 2783

2784 - 2799

2800 - 2815

2816 - 2831

2832 - 2847

2848 - 2863

2864 - 2879

2880 - 2943

2 9 4 4 - 2 9 5 9

2960 - 2975

2976 - 3007

3008 - 3071 indicates the CRT annotation stored, values included where applicable.

controls marker, display line, threshold annotation and graticule on/off functions marker dot 1 marker dot 2 center line marks marker symbols display line graticule marker dot 3 marker dot 4

“hp”

“BA-l-I-ERY”

“CORR’D”

“RES BW”

“VBW”

“ S W

“ATTEN”

“REF”

“dB/“, “LINEAR” trace detection mode: “SAMPLE”, “POS PK”, “NEG PK”

“START” or “CENTER”

“STOP” or “SPAN”

“OFFSET” for amplitude

“DL’

“TH ”

“MKR” or “MKR A”

“OFFSET” for frequency

“VID AVG” title

“Y-I-0 UNLOCK”

“249 UNLOCK”

“275 UNLOCK”

“OVEN COLD”

“EXT. REE”

“VT0 UNCAL’

“Y-l-0 ERROR”

“MEAS UNCAL” or u l

” frequency diagnostics

“2ND L.O.“, “t”, “t”

“SRQ” number center frequency “STEP” active function readout

Appendix 3

APPENDIX A

Blank A4 B4

1.

The sweep is stopped and the trace is not displayed.

DISPLAY MEMORY STRUCTURE

Exchange A and B EX

1.

The sweep is stopped. If either trace is in a CLEAR WRITE or MAX HOLD mode, it is placed in VIEW.

2.

The contents of traces A and B are exchanged.

A-B+AOn C 2

1.

2.

3.

4.

The sweep is stopped and trace B is placed in VIEW mode.

A is replaced with A - B (A minus B) .

The sweep is continued from the left. Each new analyzer response point is reduced by the amount stored in the corresponding address of trace B, and the result is stored in trace A. This process continues at the sweep rate.

Subsequent sweeps continue the process.

A B+AOff C l

1.

2.

Subsequent analyzer responses are written directly into trace A. Trace B and its mode are not changed.

The amplitude stored in the display line register is subtracted from the contents in each trace B address and the result is stored at the same trace B address.

B DL+B BL

1.

2.

Trace B is placed in view. Trace A is not changed.

The amplitude stored in the display line register is subtracted from the contents in each trace B address. The result is stored at the same trace B address.

A p p e n d i x 5

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

APPENDIX B

Appendix B

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

This appendix describes CRT display programming with the analyzer display language.

A display program increases the CRT graphics capability of the spectrum analyzer. Explicit display programming generally uses less display memory, allowing more efficient use of the 4,096 display addresses available.

Appendix A, Display Memory Structure, provides background material for information in this appendix.

DISPLAY PROGRAM DEFINED

A display program consists of a specific set of display commands which are followed by instructions and/or data words written into the display memory.

Use these commands to write display programs into memory.

DA

DW

DD

DR

Display Address puts the address into the display memory address register (referred to as the current address).

Instruction or Data Write writes the instruction or data word into the current display address. The current display address pointer is then automatically advanced to the next higher address.

Binary Instruction or Data Word writes two &bit binary words into the current address. *

Display Read places the contents of the current address on the HP-IB data lines. These contents are then read by the HP-IB controller according to the current Output format

(01 to 04). Execution of each DR concludes by advancing the current address by one

(1).

Instruction Words dictate the operating mode of the CRT circuitry, such as label, graph, or plot. The data words contain amplitude or position information.

Instruction and data words are written into memory when the above commands are used. For example, the code

“PA 500,600” writes into the display memory the instruction word for vector, 1026, followed by the x and y data values 500 and 600. This same “plot absolute” command could also be done as a display program by writing

“1026,500,600” into the display memory. The display program is “executed” each time the CRT is refreshed from memory.

LOADING AND READING A DISPLAY PROGRAM

Instruction and data words are loaded directly into the analyzer display memory by, fist, specifying the beginning address of the program, then writing in the instructions and data serially. To write the “1026,500,600” program beginning at address 1024 (the first address of trace B) , execute

O U T P U T 718;“DA 1024:DW 1026,500,600;”

This program instructs the display to draw a vector to the position (500,600) on the CRT

*The first byte contains the four most significant bits, the second contains eight least significant bits of the E-bit instruction or data word.

DD must be executed for every 2 bytes input into the analyzer.

6 A p p e n d i x

APPENDIX B ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING clear x position (clx) : big expand (hex) :

Reset the x axis display position to the far left (0,~).

Amplify the x and y CRT beam deflection by a 1.9 factor. 1 expand and shift (exs) : Amplify the x and y CRT beam deflection by a 1.13 factor (expand) and shifts the

(zero,zero) reference point to the lower left of the CRT screen. l dim

(dim): bright

(brt) :

Set the CRT beam intensity below the normal level.2

Set the CRT beam intensity to the maximum level.*

Flow-of-Control Instruction Words.

The CRT refresh program normally executes the contents of memory starting with address PI and working one address at a time to address 4095. Flow-of-control instruction words alter the normal flow of a refresh program by allowing program execution to be transferred anywhere in memory.

They allow jumps to specific display addresses (imp), jumps to a display program subroutine (jsb), returns (ret), skips to the next control instruction (skc), and a word that simulates a “for...next” loop, the decrement-and-skipon-zero (dsz). Control instructions contain pI 1 P, in bits 11, 10, and 9, respectively.

jump (imp)

jump to subroutine (jsb) return (ret) skip to next control instruction (skc) skip to next memory page (skp) end of display (end) decrement and skip on zero (dsz)

11109 8 7 6 54 3 2 10

011 lslxls 010 xl1 lel111

1035

1227

1027

The address to be jumped to is the contents of the memory word following the jmp or jsb instruction. For example,

“1035,2048” causes program execution to jump to address 2048. The address given should contain a control instruction. (If the address does not contain a control instruction, the program will go to the first control instruction following the specified address.) A return (ret) causes the program execution to return to the first control instruction following the jsb instruction that sent it to the subroutine.

‘The display size commands combine these size instructions as follows:

Dl

D2

D 3

instructions none exs bex and exs beX ratio to D 1

1.00

1.13

1.68

1.49

origin shifted no yes yes no

2The intensity of the beam is also dependent upon line length. Lines longer than a preset length will be brighter because beam writing rate is slowed.

Appendix 9

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

NOTE

Subroutines must not contain label or graph control words. A subroutine may not call another subroutine.

APPENDIX B

The skip-to-next control instruction

(skc) causes program execution to go to the next instruction in memory The skip-to-next page

(skp) instruction causes program execution to go to the next address that is an integer multiple of

1024. (An instruction that combines skp and skc, 1056 + 3 = 1059, executes as if it were a skp followed by a skc.)

The decrement and skip-on-zero

(dsz) instruction decrements an internal count register then tests the contents for zero. If the contents are not zero, the program goes to the next control instruction. If the contents equal zero, the program will skip the next two addresses then go the next control instruction. For example, “1099, 1035, 1532,

1026” causes the program to skip to the control word 1026 if the counter register is zero; otherwise it executes the

1035, 1532, which is a jump to address 1532. See Load Counter and Threshold Instructions below.

The auxiliary control function clear x position (clx) can be added to any of the program control instructions.

Another method of causing skips in program execution is with the label mode (either LB or lbl). This is discussed under Data Words.

End of Display Instruction.

When executed, the end of display instruction terminates execution of the display program. The next execution of the program then begins at display address zero on the next display refresh trigger (note that refresh trigger and sweep trigger are not the same).

The end of display instruction bit supersedes all other coding in the instruction except the auxiliary function clear x position, clx (bit 4)) which may be added. The end instruction causes a default-to-graph mode at the beginning of the next program execution if no display control instruction is at address zero.

Since fast sweeps (direct display of video and sweep for sweep times less than 20 msec) are displayed between program executions, an end instruction is required for proper operation of the fast sweep display.

An end-of-display in trace C is changed to a skip-to-next memory page, 1056, when a B s C exchange is executed.

Load-Counter and Load-Threshold Instructions.

The load-counter instruction loads an internal count register with a value determined by bits fJ through 8 of the instruction. The internal register is used in either of two ways. In the graph (gra) mode, the display program interprets the register contents as the display THRESHOLD

10 Appendix

APPENDIX B ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING position. The second use is the count register for the decrement and skip-on-zero (dsz) instruction. The interpretation for these two uses is shown below:

1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 load count register (Idc)

- C O U N T I

(lto255) load threshold 0110xxxxxxxx

- Display threshold position 1 dlvfded by 4 threshold off

NOTE

The

Idc and dsr instructions use the THRESHOLD level register. Therefore, load threshold instruction 1536 must be executed after all uses of

Idc and dsz, and before the next graph command is executed. If the load threshold is not executed, the threshold may not function correctly.

DATA WORDS

Data words are differentiated from instruction words by the two most significant bits, bits 11 and 10. The following words are data words:

11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

00xXxX

Interpretation of these data word formats by the CRT refresh program depends entirely on the preceding instruction word.

Graph.

Each data word following a graph instruction is interpreted as an absolute y position. Y position values follow the general rule shown below:

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 positive data, displayed 0 0 x x x x x x x x x x Oto 1023=ypositlon positive data, blanked negative data, blanked x x x x x x

11xxxxxxxxxx

2048 + yposition

4096 - y magnitude

(a two’s complement value)

A p p e n d i x 1 1

APPENDIX B carriage return (CR) blink on (bkon) blink off (bkof) space (SP) skip to next 16 block (sk16) skip to next 32 block (sk32) skip to next 64 block (sk64)

13

145

146

147

17

18

32

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

A blink on (bkon) will cause blinking of everything drawn on the display until a subsequent blink off (bkof) or an end of display (end) instruction is encountered with program execution.

A skip 16, 32, or 64 will cause program execution to go to the next address that is an integer multiple of 16, 32, or

64, respectively.

Note that these functions will work for both the lb1 instruction code (1025 + ) or the LB command.

PROGRAMMING WITH DISPLAY CONTROL INSTRUCTION WORDS

These examples illustrate the use of display control instructions and data words. The display memory commands described at the start of this appendix are used for loading and reading.

Vector (vtr)

Instructions can be used to draw lines on the CRT display. The data words each determine whether the data is plotted absolute/relative or blanked/unblanked (pen up/pen down). The auxiliary functions apply to the vector instructions.

For example, a line is to be plotted on the display with plot relative instructions in trace C memory beginning at address 3072.

address

3072

3073

3074

3075

3076

I description vector x = 450 absolute y = 450 blanked x = - 100 relative y = + 100 relative pen down

I program

vtr

450 + 0

450 + 2048

(1024 - 100) + 2048

100 + 0

I word

1026

450

2498

2972

100

Appendix 13

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

The load program is:

OUTPUT 718;"DA 3072;DW 1026,450,2498,2972,100:"

APPENDIX B

Vector and Label (vtr and Ibl).

To demonstrate the display instructions, a simple block diagram is drawn and labelled. Then the control words are modified with some of the auxiliary functions to demonstrate their use.

First a graphics plan is drawn:

(-300.0) Relative

(0, -200)

Relative

4

A

(0, +200)

Relative

MR

MR

(300,300)

Absolute

/A

*

(+260, +20) Relative

_ a -

(+300,0) Relative

(-10, -40) Relative

* INPUT c

(-100, 0) Relative

Graphics Plan

The vectors with + and - signs are relative vectors, the others are absolute points. Dashed lines are to be blanked.

14 Appendix

APPENDIX B address

3090

3091

3092

3093

3094

3095

3084

3085

3086

3087

3088

3089

3072

3073

3074

3075

3076

3077

3078

3079

3080

3081

3082

3083 description vector absolute x = 300 absolute y =

300 pen up x = +

300 relative y = 0 pen down x = 0 relative y = +

200 pen down x = -3OOrelative

Y = 0 pen down x = 0 relative y = -

200 pen down x = +260relative y = +ZOpenup x = 0 relative y = - 100 pen down x = - 10 relative y = -4Openup label the word

“INPUT” end of display

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING program vtr

300 + 0

3OO+ZO48

300 + 2048 o + o

0+2O48

200 + 0

(1024-300) -t 2048

0

0+2O48

(1024-200) + 0

260 + 2048

20+2O48

0+2O48

(1024-100) + 0

(1024-10) + 2048

(1024-40) + 2048 lb1

I

N

P u

T end word

924

3062

3032

1025

73

78

80

85

84

1028

1026

300

2348

2348

0

2048

ZOO

2772

0

2048

824

2308

2068

2048

The above plan can then be programmed and run.

10

20

30

40

5 0

60 ii:

OUTPUT 718;t~IP;KSo;KSm;A4;1

OUTPUT 718;"DA 3072;DW

1026,300,2348,"

OUTPUT

718;"2348,

0,

2048, 200,"

OUTPUT 718:"2772, 0, 2048, 824,"

OUTPUT 718;"2308, 2068, 2048, 924,"

OUTPUT 718;"3062, 3032,"

OUTPUT 718;"1025,

73, 78, 80, 85, 84, 1028;"

END

Appendix 15

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

The display can now be modified by adding various auxiliary functions to the existing control words.

Brighten the “INPUT” term by adding 128 (brt) to the label address 3089 (1025 + 128 = 1153).

70 O U T P U T 718;“1153, 7 3 , 7 8 , 80, 85, 8 4 , 1028:”

APPENDIX B

The label “INPUT” can be made to blink by adding blink on (bk on) and blink off (bk of) words before and after the

“INPUT” label.

70 OUTPUT

718;"1025,17, 73, 78, 80’ 85, 84’ 18’ 1028:”

Alternately, line 7 could have been replaced with the following lines:

16 Appendix

61

70

OUTPUT 718:“DTB”

OUTPUT 718 USING "K,B,K,B,K

“;“LB”;

17;“INPUT;

18;VDW 1028"

APPENDIX B ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

Note that a write binary (wtb) is used to transmit a mix of characters and non-character codes.

PROGRAMMING WITH PROGRAM CONTROL INSTRUCTION WORDS

These examples use both the commands listed in Section II and instruction words.

End-of-Display (end) and Skip-to-Next-Memory-Page (skp) Instruction Words.

play after the first 100 points of trace A, write “DW 1028” into address 100.

To end the dis-

OUTPUT 718;"IP;S2;TS;DA 100;DW 1028:"

In this example, all display memory information beyond address 100 is ignored, including the annotation. Note that the analyzer is in single sweep, S2, to prevent signal response data from writing over the control word.

Skip control words allow certain portions of the display to be omitted. There are two kinds of skip control words.

The fist enables a skip over the remainder of the present memory page to the beginning of the next memory page, the second enables a skip to the next control word.

The skip-page and skip-to-next-control-word have been assigned two command codes, PS and SW, respectively

In the example, the annotation was blanked because of the end-of-display written into address 100. If a skip had been written instead, the rest of the display memory would have been displayed, but the remainder of trace A would have been omitted.

Appendix 17

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

OUTPUT 718;"IP;S2;TS;DA 100;DW 1056;”

APPENDIX B

(Note that programming code PS can be substituted for DW 1056.)

A skp written into the trace C page skips the refresh pointer to DA 0 (trace A). This may cause an increase in the trace intensity because the program does not wait for a refresh trigger before beginning the next execution of the program. An end of display, 1028, is normally used in the Trace C page. This instruction allows a new refresh cycle to begin.

Skip-to-Next-Control-Instruction (skc).

Program control is transferred to the next control instruction.

For example, address 2073 of the annotation memory page contains the label control word that places the center frequency “I 1” mark on the CRT To omit this marker from the display, the label word is replaced by a skc word.

OUTPUT 718;“DA 2073;DW 1027:” or

OUTPUT 718;"DA 2073:DW SW:" hp ”

1” m

(Note that programming code SW can be used for DW 1027.)

Jump (imp).

The example demonstrates jmp by jumping over the data in addresses 100 to 500 in trace A.

Since the jump should be made to a control word, gra is first written into DA 500.

18 Appendix

APPENDIX B

Before the program is loaded the display might look like this:

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

After the following lines are executed the CRT would appear like this:

1 0

11

13

OUTPUT

718;“IP;S2;TS;DA 500:DW 1024;”

OUTPUT

718;“DA 100:DW 1035, 500;”

END

The trace data that would have been shown between display addresses 100 and 500 is omitted and the data for addresses 501- 1001 is displayed at x positions 100 through 600.

Jump Subroutine (jsb) and Return (rtn).

The jsb instruction transfers program control to the address specified. If the address does not contain a control word, the program skips to the next control word after that address. The rtn instruction transfers program control to the first control word following the jsb instruction.

Appendix 19

APPENDIX B

The display would appear similar to this:

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

Once a subroutine is written in a given location, care must be exercised that it is not accidentally changed.

For example, storing a trace in trace C would destroy the subroutine beginning at DA 3080.

LOOP INSTRUCTIONS C6NIER II .z?)s ss MS

H* 3s *n,

Load Counter Register (Idc) and Decrement and Skip on Zero (dsz).

In the following example, looping is used to draw a grid in two places on the CRT display on refresh. The trace C page is programmed to contain the graphics.

address

3072

3073

3074

3075

3076

3077

3078

3079

3080

3081

3082 description plot absolute x = 600 (PA) y = 300 (PU) jump to subroutine at address plot absolute x = 100 (PA) y = 300 (PU) jump to subroutine at address end of display program vtr

600

300 + 2048 jsb address vtr

100

300 + 2048 jsb address end word

1026

600

2348

1163

3199

1026

100

2348

1163

3199

1028 looping subroutine

3199

3200

3201

3202

3203

3204

3205

3206

3207

3208

3209

3210

3211

3212

3213 vector repeat 10 times plot relative x = 0 (PR) y = +25(PU) x = + 300 (PR) x = 0 (PR) y= +25(PU) x = -3OO(PR) y = 0 (PD) decrement jump to start return vtr

Idc + 10 vtr

0+2048

25 + 2048

300 + 2048

0

0+2048

25+2048

1024-300 + 2048

0 dsz jmp address rtn

1026

1546

1026

2048

2073

2348

0

2048

2073

2772

0

1099

1035

3201

1227

Appendix 2 1

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

The program can then be written, loading the words sequentially as listed in the prior plan.

APPENDIX B

10 g

50

60

70

80

90

100

OUTPUT 718;"IP;KSo;KSm:A4:"~

OUTPUT 718;"DA 3072:DW 1026,600,2348,"

OUTPUT

718;"1163,3199,1026,188,2348,1163,"

OUTPUT

718:"3199,1028:"

OUTPUT 718;"DA 3199;DW 1026,1546,1026,"

OUTPUT 718;"2048,2073,2348,0,2048,2073,"

OUTPUT 718;"2772,0,1099."

OUTPUT 718;"1035,3201,"

OUTPUT

718;"1227:HD;"

END

Line 10:

Lines 20 to 30:

Line 40:

Lines 50 to 90:

Blanks the analyzer display

Contain the positioning vectors.

An end of memory instruction (1028) insures that the following loop (DA 3199) is not executed unless called from addresses 3075 and 3080, the jsb words.

Contain the grid subroutine.

Running the program results in the following display:

22 Appendix

ADVANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

INSTRUCTION AND DATA WORD SUMMARY

Display Control Instruction Data graph kw4 amplitude: position unblanked position blanked negative blanked label (Ibl) character vector blink on (bkon) blink off (bkof) l skip to next 16 block (sk16) * skip to next 32 block (sk32) l skip to next 64 block (sk64) x position y position absolute vectors relative vectors pen down l pen up (blanked) l

APPENDIX B

Word

1024

Y y + 2048

4096-1~1

1025

ASCII or special character code (~25f

17

18

145

146

147

1026 data in display units data in display units x+0 x + 2 0 4 8

Y+o y+2048

Auxiliary to gra, Ibl, and vtr instruction word: big expand (hex) expand and shift (exs) bright (brt) dim (dim) clear x position

Program Control Instruction end of display (end) skip to next memory page (skp) skip to next control word(i) (skc) jump(l) (jmp) jump to subroutine”) f3) (isb)

Data address address word + 256 word + 64 word + 128 word + 8 word + 16

Word

1028

1056 or “PS”

1027 or “SW”

1035

0 to 4096

1163

0 to 4096

1227 return(l) t3) (ret) decrement and skip two addresses

1099 on zero”) (2) (dsz) load counter (THRESHOLD position)‘*) (Idc) 1536 + (count) l

These can also be accessed using the LB command. These functions can be initiated any time the label mode is active.

w Jumps and skips will skip to an address containing a control word.

(*I Loop should use only Ibl and vtr control words. Ldc is not a co&ol word.

c3) Subroutines may use only vtr control words.

24 Appendix

APPENDIX C LEARN STRING CONTENT

Appendix C

LEARN STRING CONTENT

The following table describes the learn string contents and coding, and the control settings restored when the learn string command, OL, is executed. (See OL.)

Appendix 25

LEARN STRING CONTENT APPENDIX C

HP 8566B LEARN STRING DECODING (1 OF 6)

BYTE

NUMBEF

BIT USAGE

BY

EXAMPLE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

- - - - - - 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 - - - - - - -

- - - - - - 0 0

3 1 (decimal)

+ (plus sign)

0 0

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 0

Notifies analyzer that a learn string follows

Unused

Sign of center frequency: I= + , 1 = -

Center frequency (CRT annotation is rounded from this value)

BCD

MSD: Byte 4, bits 4 through 7

For this example, the Center frequency is 1234567896 Hz.

Bit 7 set to 1 if in zero span mode.

10

1 - - - - - - -

03

Band lock

Output Format

#=03,1=01,2=04,3=02

Band Lock

0 = unlock (IP, KSQ)

1 = band lock (KSt)

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

- - - 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 i v

- - - - - -

- 1 - - - - - -

---l---

- - - - I---

- - - - - o - -

- - - - - - o -

- - - - - - - 0

1 - - - - - - -

- I - - - - - -

---I----

- - - - I - - -

- - - - - - - 1

4th Harmonic

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 1

0 0

0 1

Enabled

On

On

On

Coupled

Coupled

Harmonic mode in use, 0, 1,2.. ., where 0 is fundamental mixing O-2.5 GHz.

Frequency span in Hz (CRT annotation is rounded from this value)

BCD

MSD: Byte 12, bits 4 thru 7

For this example: 10001 (Hz)

0 = DATA HOLD (HD) 1 = DATA Enabled

SIGNAL TRACK O=Off

Instr Check I LED

Instr Check II LED

CF STEP SIZE

ATTEN

SWEEP TIME

O=Off

O=Off

0 = Coupled

0 = Coupled

0 = Coupled

VIDEO BW

RES BW

THRESHOLD

DISPLAY LINE

Noise Marker (KSM)

Frequency display mode

0 = Coupled

0 = Coupled

O=Off

O=Off

O=Off

O=CF, SP

1 = start-stop l=On l=On l=On

1 = Uncoupled

1 = Uncoupled

1 = Uncoupled

1 = Uncoupled

1 = Uncoupled l=On l=On l=On

26 Appendix

APPENDIX C LEARN STRING CONTENT

HP 8566B LEARN STRING DECODING (2 OF 6)

BYTE

NUMBEA

BIT USAGE

BY

EXAMPLE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 l o - - - - - -

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

---O----

---- O---

- - - - - - - 0 lll----

-----

0 1 1

01 lO----

- - - - 01 10 lOOl----

- - - - 0 0 1 0 l-------

-1 I-----

1 0 -

----- o--

EXAMPLE l-------

-0 -

-

1

---__

---()----

- - - - - o - -

- - - - - - o -

- - - - - - - 0

On

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

30 dB a = 6

/3=6 y=9 d=2

LOG

1 dB/

DESCRIPTION

UR

Off

Off

Off

Single

Off

- 10 dBm

UR

ON

Recorder Output

SWEEP Mode

1 =Off

Sweep TRIGGER

VIDEO

EXT

LINE

O=Off

O=Off

O=Off

Example shown is FREE RUN l = L L

0 = Continuous

O=Off

O=Off

CLEAR-WRITE B

TRACE Display Modes

CLEAR WRITE A

A-B+A

BLANK B

VIEW B

MAX HOLD B

BLANK A

VIEW A

MAX HOLD A

Internal Flag

2=UR l=On l=On l=On

1 = Single l=On l=On

Input Mixer Level (KS,)

9= -7OdBm lO= -60dBm ll= -5OdBm

12= -40dBm

13= -3OdBm

14= -2OdBm

IS= - 1OdBm

0 = - 0 dBm (only with KSI)

Input attenuator setting (dB)/ 10

Reference Level in dBm

RL= lO(lOrr+fI-64)+r+d/lO

Example:

RL= 10(10(6)+6-64)+9+2/10=29.2dBm

Range is - 640.0 dBm to + 359.9 dBm

Amplitude Scaling 0 = linear (LIN) l=LOG

Log scale factor in

0 = 10 dB/div

1 = 5 dB/div

2 = 2 dB/div

3 = 1 dB/div

XY Recorder Calibrated Output

0 = Off, normal operation

2 = Output for upper right

3 = Output for lower left

CRT Beam O=On 1 = Off (KSg)

Appendix 27

LEARN STRING CONTENT APPENDIX C

HP 8566B LEARN STRING DECODING (3 OF 6)

31

32

33

34

35

BYTE

NUMBER

BIT USAGE

BY

EXAMPLE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 llll----

27

28

29

30

EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

- - - - 0 1 0 1

3 MHz

300 Hz

Resolution Bandwidth (RES BW)

15=3MHz 6=1 kHz

14= 1 MHz

13=3OOkHz

12= 100 kHz

11=30kHz

5=3OOHz

4=1OOHz

3=30Hz

2= 10Hz lO= 10 kHz

9=3 kHz

Video Bandwidth (VIDEO BW)

Coding is same as Resolution Bandwidth with the addition of:

1=3Hz

O=lHz

Internal Flag

--OlO--Sample Trace Detection Mode

0 = Negative peak (KSd)

1 = Positive peak (KSb)

2 = Sample (KSe)

4 = Normal (KSa)

- - - - - 0 1 0 Max Hold B TRACE display modes

0 = CLEAR-WRITE A

1 = CLEAR-WRITE B

2=MAXHOLDA

3 = MAX HOLD A, CLEAR-WRITE B

4=MAXHOLDB

5 = MAX HOLD B, CLEAR-WRITE A

6 = Write A-B

7 = Max Hold A-B

---Ol---

------ll

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

EXT

1000

500

TRIGGER Mode

0 = FREE RUN l=EXT

2 = LINE

3 = VIDEO

Unused

DISPLAY LINE position in display units 0 thru 100 given by

16 bits of bytes 32 and 33 where bit 7 byte 32 is the MSB

THRESHOLD in display units. Coded the same as Display Line bytes 32 and 33 (bit 7 of byte 34 is MSB).

28 Appendix

APPENDIX C LEARN STRING CONTENT

HP 8566B LEARN STRING DECODING (4 OF 6)

43

44

45

40

41

42

46

47

38

39

BYTE

NUMBER

36

BIT USAGE

BY

EXAMPLE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

O-------

- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

37 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

56

57

58

59

- - - - - - - 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

- - - - - 101

1101000-

48

49

50

51

52

5 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

54

55

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 0

1 2

1000

EXAMPLE

Positive

150

Negative

0 1

2 3

4 5

6 7

8 9

0 1

DESCRIPTION

REF LEVEL Offset (KSZ), Sign

REF LEVEL Offset (KSZ), in dB o= + l= -

Where bit 6 Byte 36 is MSB and bit 0 byte 37 is LSB of a 15 bit binary value. If sign bit is 0 (pos) offset is decimal equivalent of binary value/

10. If sign bit is 1 (neg) offset is two’s complement of binary value/lO.

Unused

FREQUENCY OFFSET (KSV). Sign 0 = + l= -

FREQUENCY OFFSET (KSV), in Hz

BCD

MSD: Byte 40, bits 4 thru 7

Example:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 H z

Video Averaging Limit (KSG)

Binary

MSB: Byte 46, bit 2

Center Frequency STEP SIZE (SS)

BCD

MSD: Byte 48 bits 4 thru 7

Range: 0 to 24 GHz

Example:12345678901Hz

500

337

600

Reference Marker X-axis position

Binary

MSB: Byte 54, bit 7

Range: 1 to 1001

Reference Marker Y-axis position

Binary

MSB: Byte 56 bit 7

Range: 1 to 1023

4ctive Marker X-axis position

Binary

MSB: Byte 58 bit 7

Range: 1 to 1001

Appendix 29

LEARN STRING CONTENT APPENDIX C

HP 8566B LEARN STRING DECODING (5 OF 6)

BYTE

NUMBER

BIT USAGE

BY

EXAMPLE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

60

61

62

63

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

()l------

300

ZOOM dBmV

Active Marker Y-axis position

Binary

MSB: Byte 60 bit 7

Range: 1 to 1023

Unused

MARKER mode

O=Off

18 = NORMAL

19= A’

20 = ZOOM

Reference Level units which will be used when the LOG scale is chosen.

---O---Off

0 = dBm, 1 = dBmV, 2 = dBpV, 3 = Volts

Stop Sweep at marker (KSu)

64 O=Off, 1 =On

- - - - - o - -

On *SRQ on Unlock or Hardware Broken, Activated only by R3 or IP commands, 0 = On, 1 = Off

- - - - - - o-

Off *SRQ at End of Sweep. Activated only by R2 command;

O=Off, 1 =On

- - - - - - - 0 Off *SRQ when Units key pressed. Activated only by R4 command;

O=Off, 1 =On

()------Internal

- O - - - - - Disabled *Frequency SRQ, KS < 43 > ; 0 = Off, 1 = On

--I----“CORR’D” Use CAL data O=No

6 5 i--l-e--Cal’d

*Input Mixer 0 = Internal

1 = External

1 =Yes

*Calibration routine correction data has been stored

- - - - lO-dBpV

O=No 1 = Yes

Reference Level units which will be used when the LIN scale is chosen.

0 = dBm, 1 = dBmV, 2 = dBpV, 3 = Volts

- - - - - - l-

View C View trace C O=Off l=On

These settings are recorded by the Learn String but not restored if the string is output to the analyzer (as with RECALL).

30 Appendix

APPENDIX C LEARN STRING CONTENT

HP 85668 LEARN STRING DECODING (6 OF 6)

69

70

71

66

67

68

72

BYTE

NUMBER

BIT USAGE

BY

EXAMPLE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

-l------

EXAMPLE

0 0

0 0

0 0

5 0

0 0

0 0

SWEEP TIME in pet.

BCD

MSD: Byte 66, bits 4 thru 7

DESCRIPTION

YeS

Example: 5OOOOO psec.

Internal Flag

*Power on in last state. This will be activated by KSf command.

O=No

Extended Reference Level allowed (KSI).

l=Yes

---O----

No

73

74

75

76

77

78

- - - - - 1 - -

- - - - - - 0:

- - 0 1 1 0 1 0

- - 0 1 0 1 1 0

- - 1 0 0 0 1 1

- - 0 1 1 1 0 0 lOlOl---

On

Off

26

22

35

28

500 pet

Video Averaging (KSG)

Fast HP-IB (KSS)

C Band (5.8 - 12.5 GHz)

D Band (12.5 - 18.6GHz)

E Band (18.6 - 24 GHz)

O=No

O=Off

O=Off

Preselector tracking offset DAC settings:

B Band (2.0 - 5.8 GHz)

Fast SWEEP TIME’s ( < 20 msec) l=Yes l=On l=On

0 = greater than 10 ms

16= 10ms

17=5 ms

18=2ms

19=lms

21=5OOps

22=2OOps

23= 100~s

25=5Ops

26=2Ops

27= 10~s

29=5ps

30=2ps

31=1ps

79 Unused

80 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Identifies the end of the 8566A Learn String.

These settings are recorded by the Learn String but not restored if the string is output to the analyzer (as with RECALL).

Appendix 3 1

I

SERVICE REQUESTS APPENDIX D

Appendix D

SERWCE REQUESTS

This appendix describes the analyzer service request (SRQ) capability and the use of service requests to interrupt an HP-IB controller to obtain service. A service request is an analyzer output that tells the controller a specific event has taken place in the analyzer. Service requests enable the analyzer to interrupt the controller program sequence, causing the program to branch to a subroutine.

For example, by using service requests, the controller can perform other operations while the analyzer is sweeping, and then service the analyzer when the sweep is completed. The analyzer sends its service request to the controller, which triggers the controller to take action, such as changing the instrument state or reading data from the display memory.

When making a service request, the analyzer places the HP-IB SRQ line true and the analyzer CRT display reads out “SRQ” with a number. Setting the SRQ line true announces to the HP-IB controller that the analyzer requires attention. The controller can then command the analyzer to send its “status byte”. The status byte indicates the type of service request.

NOTE

If the CRT display annotation has been blanked, the service request notation will not appear.

DISPLAY DURING A SERVICE REQUEST

32 Appendix

APPENDIX D

NOTE

A serial polling technique must be used by the HP-IB controller to test for service requests. The analyzer does not respond to HP-IB parallel polling.

The HP-IB controller response to a service request depends on the controller. The operating manuals for each controller discuss that control&s reaction to setting the SRQ line true. Series 200 computers have a sequence of commands which enable a response to a service request. These commands allow monitoring the SRQ line and reading, interpreting, and then clearing the status byte. This sequence of commands and a subroutine, selected according to the type of service request, form a service routine. A general setup is given below.

Specify iherface select code and label of subroutine

Enable interface card to interrupt

Read status byte

Interpret status byte

Computationlcontrol statements

Return to next line in Main Program

Appendix 33

SERVICE REQUESTS APPENDIX D

BASIC 2.0 SERVICE ROUTINE COMMANDS

Interrupt Statements

ON INTR

Example Comments

ON INTR 7 GOSUB Shutoff Declares the name of the service routine where program execution branches on interrupt from the peripheral specified by select code 7.

ENABLE INTR ENABLE INTR 7;2

RETURN RETURN

SUBEXIT

Enables the calculator to accept an SRQ interrupt from select code 7;2 (the HP-IB).

Signals the end of an interrupt service routine. While executing the service routine, the interrupt for the peripheral being serviced must be disabled to prevent cascading of interrupts.

Signals the end of an interrupt service subprogram.

SUBEXIT

Bit Functions

SPOLL A = SPOLL (718) Reads the analyzer status byte, assigns its decimal value to

A and clears the SRQ line.

BIT BIT (A, N) Returns the value of the Nth bit in A (0 or 1).

STATUS BYTE DEFINITION

The status byte sent by the analyzer in response to the controller SPOLL command determines the nature of the service request. The meaning of each bit of the status byte is explained in the following chart.

Bit

0 (LSB)

1

Message

Unused.

Unit Key, I-1] r pressed or frequency limit exceeded.

End of sweep.

Hardware broken.

Unused.

Illegal analyzer command.

Universal HP-IB service request.

HP-IB RQS Bit

Unused.

CRT Display Message

-

“SRQ 102”

“SRQ 104”

“SRQ 110”

-

“SRQ 140”

-

34 Appendix

7

APPENDIX D SERVICE REQUESTS

The CRT SRQ number is an octal number based on the binary value of the status byte. This octal number always begins with a “1” since this is translated from bit 6, the universal HP-IB service request bit. For example, the status byte for an illegal analyzer command (SRQ 140) is as follows: bit number status byte

7

0

6

1

5 4 3

1 0 0

The CRT displays the octal equivalent of the status byte binary number:

2

0

1

0

0

0

“SRQ 140”

The octal equivalent is based on the whole binary number:

01100000 (binary) = 140 (octal)

One simple way to determine the octal equivalent of the binary number is to partition the binary number 3 bits at a time from the least significant bit, and treat each part as a single binary number: binary octal

0 1

1

1 0 0

4

0 0 0

0

The decimal equivalent of the octal number is determined as follows: 140 (octal) = 1 * (8) + 4 l

(8) + 0 * (8)

= 96 (decimal).

More than one service request can be sent at the same time. For example, if an illegal analyzer command and the end of a sweep occurred at the same time, %RQ 144” appears on the CRT display.

bit number status byte octal value

7 6

0 1

1

5 4 3

1 0 0

4

2 1 0

1 0 0

4

= “SRQ 144”

Note if bit 1 is set, it has one of three meanings, depending on how SRQ 102 was activated. These meanings are explained in the following section.

SERVICE REQUEST ACTIVATING COMMANDS

Service requests do not occur unless the appropriate activating command has been given, except for two service requests: illegal command, SRQ 140, and [SHIFT r] command, SRQ 102 (local operation only). The following chart summarizes the service request activating commands.

Appendix 35

SERVICE REQUESTS

Message

Illegal Command

End of Sweep

SRQ Activating

Command

Rl

R2

Hardware Broken

Units Key

Pressed

Front Panel SRQ shift r

R3& IP

R4

Local Operation

SRQ(d

Allowed

140 only

104 & 140

110&140

102 & 140

102,140

APPENDIX D

Cancelled

B Y

Comments

None

Rl

Always activated, Rl disables all SRQ’s but SRQ

140.

Also gives SRQ on completion of CAL routine, video averaging, preselector peak, and auto-zoom.

Rl

Rl, pressing units key, or whenever SRQ is cleared.

Remote Operation

R4 must be reactivated whenever it is used.

Always activated when in local (manual) operation.

Note that R2, R3, and R4 can be activated simultaneously, allowing all the SRQ’s.

Examples

This program interprets the SRQ status byte and prints its message

Line 10:

Line 20:

Line 30:

Lines 70 to 100:

10

20

OUTPUT 718;"Rl;R3;R4;'

ON INTR 7 GOSUB Interpret-srq

30

40

ENABLE INTR 7:2

PRINT "Push Hz key on analyzer."

50

60

70

!

PRINT "Press S on controller to stop program.'*

1dle:REPEAT

140

150

160

170

180

80

90

ON KBD ALL GOSUB Stop

UNTIL

Idle

100 Stop:OUTPUT 718;"Rl;

110

STOP

120

130

!

Interpret-srq:OFF INTR 7

S t a t u s byte=SPOLL (718)

IF BITTStatus byte,3)=1 THEN PRINT "HARDWARE BROKEN'

IF BIT(StatusIbyte,l)=l THEN PRINT "UNITS KEY PRESSED'

WAIT .l

ON INTR 7 GOSUB Interpret-srq

OUTPUT

718;"R4;" 190

200

210

RETURN

END

Enables all but the end of sweep SRQ. Rl clears former SRQ commands.

Executes the “Interpretsrq” subroutine when an interrupt at select code 7 occurs.

Enables the controller interrupt capability.

Any main program. These lines form a program loop that is interrupted when the analyzer requests service.

36 Appendix

APPENDIX D

Lines 130 to 200:

Line 130:

Line 140: Assigns the status byte to the variable “Status- byte”. This clears the analyzer’s SRQ

(i.e., the status byte is reset).

Compares the status byte to two analyzer SRQ codes, and prints the name of the SRQ.

Turns on the controller interrupt capability.

Re-enables the units-key-pressed SRQ.

Returns program execution to the main program.

SERVICE REQUESTS

The “InterpreLsrq” subroutine.

Turns off further interrupts from the HP-IB. This prevents the cascading of interrupts generated by another service request from the analyzer.

Lines 150 to 160:

Line 180:

Line 190:

Line 200:

In the following program, the analyzer sweeps to measure a signal. The controller continues to run its main program while the analyzer sweeps. An end-of-sweep service request tells the controller when the sweep is completed. The controller then re-addresses the analyzer and records the measurement data. This procedure ensures that test data is complete, and improves program execution speed when slow sweeps are used.

10

:o”

40

50

OPTION BASE 1

ON INTR 7 GOSUB Record-data

ENABLE INTR 7;2

I

OUTPUT 718;“IP;S2;FA1MZ;FB150MZ;”

60

70

OUTPUT 718;“ST3SC:R2;TSn:

BEEP

80 !

90 Idle: REPEAT

1 0 0 PRINT “WORKING! ”

110

1 2 0

130

140

150

160

170

180

!

Idle=Idle+l

WAIT 1

UNTIL

BEEP

STOP

Idle=7

PRINT “DONE”

Record-data:OFF INTR 7

190 OUTPUT 718;“Rl;”

200

Is_data_ready=SPOLL(718)

210

220

IF BIT(Is_data_ready,2)=1 THEN

OUTPUT 718;“E1;03:MF;”

230

240

250

260

ENTER 718;Freq

ENTER 718;Ampl

PRINT “FREQUENCY = *I ;Freq:‘*Hz**

270

280

290

PRINT “AMPLITUDE = *I ;Ampl; **dBm**

ELSE

PRINT *I Illegal analyzer command?**

300

310

320

BEEP

END IF

RETURN

330 !

340 END

Appendix 37

SERVICE REQUESTS

Lines 20 and 30:

Lines 50 and 60:

Lines 90 to 150:

Line 180:

Line 190:

Line 200:

Line 210 to 310:

Line 320:

APPENDIX D

Executes the “Recorcldata” subroutine when an interrupt at select code 7 occurs.

Enables interrupts from the HP-IB interface card.

Sets the analyzer for the measurement. The TS command (take sweep) is the last command sent to the analyzer, and the controller CR/LF is suppressed with a semicolon terminator. This is necessary; otherwise, the next program line is not executed until the sweep is complete. (Refer to the description of the TS mnemonic for a detailed explanation of line 60.)

Any main program.

“Record-data” subroutine. Turns off interrupts from the HP-IB. This prevents interrupts from cascading.

Clears the end-of-sweep SRQ. This prevents the SRQ from interrupting the program at the next sweep.

Reads the status byte and clears the SRQ.

Record data if end-of-sweep SRQ was sent.

Returns program execution to the main program.

The following program signals the controller when an operator has completed a data entry. With this information, the controller can read the data entry or branch to a subprogram.

3 8 Appendix

10 ENABLE INTR 7;2

20

30

ON INTR 7 GGSUB Read-entry

OUTPUT 718;“Rl;R4;EE;”

PRINT “Enter center frequency on analyzer’s keyboard.**

40

6": !

PRINT “Press S on controller to stop program-”

70 1dle:REPEAT

80

90

ON KBD ALL GOSUB Stop

UNTIL Idle

1 0 0

110

Stop:OUTPUT 718:“Rl;”

STOP

120 !

130

140

150

Read-entry:OFF INTR

7

Is entry readyzSPOLL(718)

IF-BIT(Ii entry ready,l)=l

THEN

OUTPUT ;r18;“0~;” 160

170

180

ENTER 718;Center-freq

PRINT “YOU ENTERED” ; Center-freq; “Hz”

190 OUTPUT 718;"R4;EE;"

200 ON INTR 7 GOSUB Read-entry

210 ELSE

220

230

240

250

260

PRINT “ILLEGAL ANALYZER COMMAND?”

BEEP

END IF

RETURN

END

APPENDIX D

Lines 10 and 20:

Lines 70 to 90:

Line 100:

Lines 130 to ZOO:

Line 130:

Line 140:

Line 150:

Lines 160 to 180:

Lines 200 and 210:

Lines 220 to 250:

SERVICE REQUESTS

Executes the “Read-entry” subroutine when an interrupt at select code 7 occurs.

Enables interrupts from the HP-IB interface card.

Any main program.

Disables the R4 service request.

Forms a subroutine that records the operator’s entry.

Turns off interrupts from the HP-IB interface.

Clears the end-of-sweep SRQ and reads the status byte.

Checks the status byte to verify that the interrupt was caused by the units-key-pressed

SRQ. If this is not the case, the program continues at line 220.

Reads the operator’s entry and displays it.

Re-enables operator entry, units-key-pressed SRQ, and the controller interrupt capability.

Notifies the operator if the illegal analyzer command SRQ triggered the interrupt.

SERVICE REQUEST FROM THE FRONT PANEL

When the spectrum analyzer is in local operation mode (unaddressed), the operator can call for service from a controller by pressing front panel key [SHIFT r]. This front panel request for service sends SRQ 102, the units-keypressed SRQ. The SRQ command, R4, need not be enabled in order to use the front panel service request.

Example

The front panel service request can summon a controller for assistance. The following example shows one way to do this. During the data transfer, beginning at line 430, the CRT display appears as shown below, with the “DATA

TRANSFER” message blinking.

Several analyzers, each with a different HP-IB address, can call for individual service. This requires serial polling at the beginning of the service subroutine.

Appendix 39

SERVICE REQUESTS APPENDIX D

10

20

DIM A(l001)

DIM A$[201

ENABLE INTR 7;2

430”

20" !

PRINT “Pressing S on the controller stops program when data is received.”

LOCAL

718

70 1dle:REPEAT

80

ON INTR 7 GOSUB Which-inst

90 ON KBD ALL GOSUB Stop

100 UNTIL Idle llo stop:STOP

120 !

130 !*wl*****s******ff**ff*

140 Which inst:OFF INTR 7

150 !ff**i~****i*4k***~*4f**

160

170

180

Analyzer-a=SPOLL(718)

IF BITtAnalyzer a,l)>B

GOSUB Record Tata

190 END IF

200

210 !

RETURN

220 !i*~ff*ff~~*~+~+ff~*~~ffi

230 Record data:!

240 !i*~~*~*i+,+ff*ff~**~~*

THEN

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340

350

360

370

380

390

400

410

420

430

!

!

OUTPUT 718;Y3V1;EM;01;KSm;KSo;A4;DT:n

OUTPUT 718;“D3;PU;PA64,544;LBOPERATOR NO.?:”

REPEAT

OUTPUT 718;“EE;OA;”

ENTER 718;Operator

UNTIL Operator>0

OUTPUT 718;nD3PU;PA512,544;LB”;Operator;n:11

OUTPUT 718;“D3PU;PA64,512;LBTEST DEVICE SERIAL NO?:”

OUTPUT 718;“Dj PU;PA64,490;LBPress Hz key when

OUTPUT 718;“Rl;R4;EE;”

REPEAT

Hz-key-pressedzSPOLL(718)

UNTIL BIT(Hz-key-pressed,l)>B

OUTPUT 718; ,IOA”

ENTER 718;Serial-number

OUTPUT 718;~PU;PA512,512;LB”;Serial_number;”:” ready.:"

OUTPUT 718 USING “K,B,K,B,B1’;PU;PA64,312;LB”:17;”DATA TRANSFER IN

PROGRESS”;18;3

440

450

460

470

480

OUTPUT 718;“TB;’

FOR

N=l

TO

1001

ENTER 718:A(N)

NEXT N

OUTPUT 718;“EM;RC1;KSn;KSp;HD;f’

490 LOCAL 718

500 RETURN

510 END

40 Appendix

APPENDIX D SERVICE REQUESTS

HP4B

C O N T R O L L E R A N A L Y Z E R

Operator 3 performs tests on device serial number 123

Stores results in trace B

Idle

(lines 70 through 110)

/

#

When complete, operator calls for service using m r

KEY FUNCTION

Operator uses DATA keyboard to answer questions (see CRT photograph)

Operator /

‘0

/

/ l -

4.

Service analyzer 18

SRQ Subroutine

(lines 230 through 500)

Ask for operator number and device serial number

(I ines 270 through 410)

Record answers

Record trace B into A(N)

(lines 450 through 470)

Operator continues with next device measurement

‘Ic---a

--99

---mm

---wgg

Return control to operator

(line 490) t

1

Return to idle

(line 500)

Appendix 4 1

FAST REMOTE OPERATION (KSS AND KST) APPENDIX E

Appendix E

FAST REMOTE OPERATION (KSS AND KST)

This section describes the execution time reduction for commonly used commands that involve sweeping, tuning, or active functions (for example - TS, CF; or El).

NORMAL OPERATION

During normal operation, the analyzer repeats a specific cycle of operations each time it sweeps. If a single sweep mode command (S2 or TS) is used, the following sequence of operations occurs once the trigger conditions are met:

1.

Phase lock to the start frequency.

2.

Begin and complete sweep.

3.

Perform computations for the CRT annotations.

4.

Write annotations on the CRT

5.

Reset sweep ramp and phase lock to the start frequency.

The analyzer repeats this cycle each time a single sweep command is executed.

In most cases, the remote operation mode does not require operation 4, updating of CRT annotation; and until another single sweep command is executed, operation 5 is not needed either. Therefore, eliminating operations 4 and 5 does not sacrifice any information or accuracy. Depending on the current instrument state, eliminating operations 4 and 5 saves between 20 and several hundred milliseconds for each single sweep command execution. This is important, because the execution of subsequent analyzer commands must wait for the completion of the sweep cycle. Reducing the required sweep time and eliminating unnecessary operations significantly reduces the command execution time.

FAST OPERATION (KSS)

The KSS command saves execution time by eliminating operation 4, the internal CRT annotation routine, and operation 5, the second phase lock. KSS is activated with a controller, not from the front panel, and remains in effect until deactivated by IP LF, KSU, KST, RC, or a local command such as BASIC command lcl. If a single sweep is executed when KSS is activated, only the first three operations of the sweep cycle are performed; the analyzer is left tuned to the stop frequency. While KSS is activated, the analyzer is in the single sweep mode; therefore, a new sweep does not begin until another single sweep command is given. When KSS is deactivated, the analyzer returns to the sweep mode that was in effect when KSS was activated.

42 Appendix

APPENDIX E FAST REMOTE OPERATION (KSS AND KST)

Because KSS removes operation 4 and part of operation 5 from the sweep cycle, it reduces the execution time of commands involving a sweep cycle, tuning, or annotation. The following commands are some of those that execute faster with KSS: TS, CR, El, RB, SF?

If a command does not require a sweep, or fetches information directly from the analyzer memory, its execution time is not affected by KSS. This kind of command includes OL, RC, Rl, and KS94.

The following program illustrates how the KSS command saves time.

1 0

2 0

30

4 0

6”:

870”

90

100

!

DIM A(100),B(100)

OUTPUT 718;“IP;SPlMZ:M2;S2;”

FOR N=l TO 100

OUTPUT 718;"CF4GZ;TS;El;MA;"

ENTER 718;A(N)

OUTPUT 718;“CF6GZ;TS;El;MA;”

ENTER 718;B(N)

NEXT N

END

The program above stores the amplitude of the largest signal within a 1 MHz band centered about a frequency that alternates between 4 and 6 GHz. This program takes approximately 40 seconds to run. The program takes only

25 seconds to run if line 20 is changed to read as follows:

OUTPUT 718;"IP KSS SPlMZ MS S2"

When the program has finished running, the CRT display is as shown in the following illustration.

Appendix 43

FAST REMOTE OPERATION (KSS AND KST)

To deactivate KSS and leave the analyzer in the same state, execute this command:

OUTPUT 718;"RC0"

APPENDIX E

NOTE

The p) in “RCO” is a zero and not the letter 0.

FAST PRESET (KST)

The instrument preset command, IP initiates a cycle of operations similar to the five steps outlined before, but with the addition of an internal bus check. If this check detects any faults, one or both of the INSTR CHECK LEDs remain on. Fast preset is identical with instrument preset command IP except that it does not perform the internal bus check. In practice, the instrument bus check routine is not needed every time the instrument is preset; therefore, the analyzer can be preset with the fast preset command, KST. KST takes approximately 0.2 seconds to execute; IP takes 0.8 seconds.

44 Appendix

APPENDIX F

TUNING CURVES

Appendix F

TUNING CURVES

60.

.O

I

50.1

o -

40.t

) -

‘f3

5 z

(b

3o.t

I -

/

22.0

/ -

16.0

16.0

14.0

12.0

10.0

6.0

6.0

4.0

2.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

6.0

ko GHz)

Appendix 45

CENTER FREQUENCY/SPAN TUNING CHARACTERISTICS APPENDIX G

Appendix G

CENTERFREQUENCY/SPANTUNING

CHARACTERJSTICS

At the location of the band overlap (2.0- 2.5 GHz) or on band edges (- 1.0 GHz and 24 GHz), the frequency span may change as center frequency is tuned near the above locations. This situation occurs when the frequency, span is such that the equivalent start/stop frequency exceeds the tuning range of the analyzer.

Example

Analyzer Settings: 0 - 2.5 GHz Band

FREQUENCY SPAN = 1 GHz

CENTER FREQUENCY = 2 GHz

Note that the equivalent start/stop frequencies are 1.5

GHz and 2.5 GHz.

Now tune to 2.2 GHz.

46 Appendix

APPENDIX G CENTER FREQUENCY/SPAN TUNING CHARACTERISTICS

Since the maximum stop frequency in low band is 2.5 GHz, the analyzer will reduce the span by changing the

START FREQ in order to enable the center frequency to be tuned to 2.2. GHz. Hence, the equivalent START/

STOP FREQ is now 1.9 GHz/2.5 GHz, which yields a 600 MHz span. If the CENTER FREQUENCY is tuned to

2.25 GHz, the SPAN will be reduced to 500 MHz, a CENTER FREQUENCY greater than 2.25 GHz will automatically switch the analyzer to the microwave (2 - 22 GHz) band while maintaining a 500 MHz span.

The CENTER FREQUENCY/SPAN TUNING CHART below graphically illustrates the aforementioned tuning characteristics.

- 1

1

0

SPAN > 500 MHz

1

I

2

1

I

, 1

I

/

1

I

2.5

CENTER FREGUENCY (GHzl

1

3

I

4

Appendix 47

1 ST LO OUTPUT APPENDIX H

Appendix H

1 ST LO OUTPUT

The 1st LO OUTPUT provides a nominal + 5 dBm signal that is tunable from 2.3214-6.1214 GHz. Since the

HP 8566B is synthesized, the 1st LO can be used as a precise tunable microwave source.

Example

Using the 1st LO OUTPUT as a precision source; connect equipment as shown:

Spectrum Analyzer

Instrument Preset: (ZJ

Select zero span with: (‘“ZY ] z

Offset IF with: B F. This removes the 321.4 MHz IF offset.

By pressing (ii%-], you now have a precision source that can be tuned from 2.3214-6.1214 GHz with 1 Hz resolution.

Example

Using the 1st LO OUTPUT as a tracking signal source from 2 - 5.8 GHz; connect equipment as shown:

+5 d&n c 2-6 GHz

BPF

Instrument Preset: @J

Set START/STOP FREQ: @ 2 GHz, @ 5.8 GHz.

The dynamic range will depend on the conversion loss and isolation characteristics of the mixer. Flatness variations can be normalized through trace arithmetic.

48 Appendix

APPENDIX I OPERATING DIFFERENCES

Appendix I

OPERATING DIFFERENCES

Because of the faster processing speed, the addition of new commands, the slight modification of some old commands, and the input buffering capability of the HP 8566B, there are a few minor operating differences between the HP 8566B and its predecessor, the HP 8566A. If you intend to use the HP 8566A and HP 8566B interchangeably, become familiar with the following differences.

EXPONENTIAL FORMAT

With the HP 8566B, any command that specifies the display address (e.g., DA, DR, DW), and which is given in the exponential format (i.e., with notation El, E2, E3, etc.), executes its prescribed functions as described in this manual. The HP 8566A, however, interprets the exponential notation as an analyzer command. For example, the

El notation is interpreted as a peak search command, the E2 notation as a marker-into-center-frequency command, etc.

RESE-lTING THE INPUT BUFFER AND INSTRUMENT PRESET

The HP 8566A does not have an input buffer, and the HP-IB can be reset with an interface clear (IFC) . To reset the input buffer in the HP 8566B, use a device clear (CLEAR 718). This way, any commands in the input buffer of the

HP 8566B are executed before instrument preset (IP) occurs. However, if device clear (CLEAR 718) is preceded by interface clear (ABORT 7), an instrument preset (IP) occurs and clears the input buffer immediately. Thus, all commands in the buffer are lost and not executed.

REMOTE INSTRUMENT PRESET

gxecution of a remote Instrument Preset (IP) causes the HP 8566B merely to preset its controls. The same command causes the HP 8566A to preset its controls and run a check of its IO bus and memory.

R E L O C K

In the HP 8566A, the local oscillator (LO) is phase-locked to the reference oscillator after every data entry. In the

HP 8566B, the relock does not occur until the analyzer needs to relock for taking data readings. Because the relock occurs less often in the HP 8566B than in the HP 8566A, the HP 8566B operates faster than the HP

8566A.

TIMING

The HP 8566B processes data faster than the HP 8566A (see RELOCK, above). Therefore, if you attempt to use

HP 8566A software with the HP 8566B, timing problems may occur.

Appendix 49

OPERATING DIFFERENCES

ACTIVE FUNCTION

APPENDIX I

Occasionally, a two-letter command to the HP 8566B might not activate the specified function. The reason is that the command mnemonic has been interpreted by the analyzer as the first two letters of a longer command mnemonic that starts with the same two letters. For example, the command ST for Sweep Time could be interpreted by the analyzer as the first two letters of STDEV the command for Standard Deviation. In this situation, the analyzer simply waits for another character before activating the function. To prevent this problem, insert a space or a terminator immediately after the two-letter command.

SWEEP + TUNEOUTPUT

The Tuning Algorithm in the HP 8566B causes large pulses to appear at the end of a sweep or at a band crossing.

These pulses do not appear on the HP 8566A.

BAND CROSSING

In the HP 8566A, a band crossing can occur within the last ten display units of a sweep. In the HP 8566B, a band crossing cannot occur within the last ten display units of a sweep.

SOFTWARE INCOMPATIBILITY

If there are no spaces or semicolons between two-letter commands in HP 8566A software, certain“A” commands might be misinterpreted by the HP 8566B analyzers.

The following is a list of examples where “A” commands might be misinterpreted by the HP 8566B:

CTA

“B” MISINTERPRETATION

(Convert to dBm)

CTM (Convert to Display Units)

DLE (Enable Display Line)

GRAT

PDA

PDF

THE

(Graticule on or off)

(Probability Distribution in

Amplitude)

(Probability Distribution in

Frequency

(Enable Threshold)

VBO (Set Video Bandwidth and Resolution

Bandwidth Ratio)

50 Appendix

“A” SOFIWARE EXAMPLE

CTAl (Couple Sweeptime, View

Trace A)

CTMTl (Couple Sweeptime, Signal

Track On)

DLEl (Activate Display Line,

Peak Search

GRAT (Graph, Set Attenuator)

PDA4 (Pen Down, Blank Trace A)

PDFA (Pen Down, Start Frequency)

THE1 (Activate Threshold, Peak

Search)

VBOA (Activate Video Bandwidth,

Output Active Function)

APPENDIX I OPERATING DIFFERENCES

Examples that are least likely to occur are GRAT, PDA4, and PDFA because, in these sets of commands, the second command will not typically follow the first command. However, all examples have the potential to cause problems, because they don’t follow “B” syntax requirements. The HP 8566B interprets “A” software written like the above examples as invalid commands. As a result, the commands are not executed and an HP-IB command error should appear on the analyzer CRT Fortunately, this command error can be used as a method of finding software errors.

Appendix 5 1

EQUIVALENT HP 8566B AND HP 8566A COMMANDS APPENDIX J

Appendix J

EQUIVALENT HP 8566B AND 8566A COMMANDS

The following list shows combinations of 8566B commands and secondary keywords that are equivalent to other

8566B commands common to the HP 8566A. The commands are interchangeable when programming the

8566B.

Alphabetical Listing Equivalent Commands Alphabetical Listing Equivalent Command5 of 8566B Commands Common to the 8566A of 8566B Commands Common to the 8566A

AMB ON

AMB Off

ANNOT ON

ANNOT OFF

APB

AUNITS DBM

AUNITS DBMV

AUNITS DBUV

AUNITS V

AXB

BLANK TRA

BLANK TRB

BLANKTRC

BML

BTC

BXC

CLRW TRA

CLRW TRB

CONTS

DET NRM

DET SMP

DET POS

DET NEG

DLE OFF

EXTMXR

FOFFSET

GRAT ON

GRAT OFF

HNLOCK

HNUNLK

MKA?

MKCF

MKD

MKF?

MKMIN

MKN

MKNOISE ON c 2

C l

KSP

KSo

KSc

KSA

KSB

KSC

KSD

EX

A4

B4

KSk

BL

KSI

KSi

A l

Bl

Sl

KSa

KSe

KSb

KSd

LO

KSU

KSV

KSn

KSm

KSt

KSQ

MA

E2

M3

MF

KSN

M2

KSM

MKNOISE OFF

MKPK

MKPK HI

MKPK NH

MKRL

MKSP

MKSS

MKSTOP

MKTRACK ON

MKTRACK OFF

ML

MOV TRC, TRB

MXMH TRA

MXMH TRB

RCLS

ROFFSET

SAVES

SIGID

SNGLS

TDF M

TDF P

TDF B

THE ON

THE OFF

TM FREE

TM LINE

TM EXT

TM VID

VAVG

VAVG ON

VAVG OFF

VIEW TRA

VIEW TRB

VIEW TRC

XCH TRA, TRB

XCH TRB, TRC

:;

T3

T4

KSG

KSG

KSH

A3

B3

KSj

EX

KSi

KSL

E l

E l

KSK

E4

KS0

E3

KSu

MT1

MT0

KS,

KSI

E

RC

KSZ s v

KSv

E

0 3

02 or 04

TH

TO

52 Appendix

APPENDIX J EQUIVALENT HP 8566B AND HP 8566A COMMANDS

Mphabetical Listing of

Commands Common to the 8566A

Equivalent

8566B Command

Alphabetical Listing of

Commands Common to the 8566A

Equivalent

8566B Command

A l

A2

A3

A4

Bl

B2

B3

B4

BL

C l c2

EX

E l

E2

E3

E4

KSA

KSB

KSC

KSD

KSG

KSH

KSK

KSL

KSM

KSN

KS0

KSQ

KSU

KSV

KSZ

KSa

KSb

KSc

CLRWTRA

M X M H T R A

VIEWTRA

BLANKTRA

CLRWTRB

MXMHTRB

VIEWTRB

BLANKTRB

BML

AMBOFF

AMBON

XCHTRA,TRBorAXB

MKPKorMKPKHI

MKCF

MKSS

MKRL

AUNITSDBM

AIJNITSDBMV

AUNITSDBUV

AUNITSV

VAVGorVAVGON

VAVGOFF

MKPKNH

MKNOISEOFF

MKNOISEON

MKMIN

MKSP

HNUNLK

EXTMXR

FOFFSET

ROFFSET

DETNRM

DETPOS

APB

KSd

KSe

KSi

KSj

KSk

KSI

KSm

KSn

KSo

KSP

KSt

KSu

KSv

KS,

LO

MA

MF

MT0

MT1

M2

M3

0 1

0 3

02or04

RC

Sl s2 s v

TH

TO

Tl

T2

T3

T4

DETNEG

DETSMP

XCHTRB,TRCorBXC

VIEWTRC

BLANKTRC

BTCorMOVTRC,TRE

GRATOFF

GRATON

ANNOTOFF

ANNOTON

HNLOCK

MKSTOP

SIGID

ML

DLEOFF

MKA?

MKF?

MKTRACKOFF

MKTRACKON

MKN

MKD

TDFM

TDFP

TDFB

RCLS

CONTS

SNGLS

SAVES

THEON

THEOFF

TMFREE

TMLINE

TMEXT

TMVID

Appendix 53

Section IV

INDEX

A

A-B-,A,40,41

A-B*AOFF;40

A + B+A(KSc), 97

As,,,39

Active function, 30

ADD, 24 - 25

Addressing the spectrum analyzer, 5

Advanced display programming, App B

ALIGN, 29

Alphabetical keycode summary, 90

AMB, 26

AMBPL, 27

Amplitude calibration, 3

Amplitude offset (KSZ) ,91

Amplitude units (KSA, KSB, KSC, KSD) ,93

AMPTD CAL, 3,4

ANNOT, 28

Annotation off/on (KSo,KSp), 96

APB, 29

AT, 30

Attenuation (ATTEN), 74 - 76

AUNITS, 31

AUTO (coupled functions), 69

Automatic spectrum analyzer, 14

Automatic zoom, 51

(see also zoom to marker)

AVG, 32 - 33

AXB, 34

Al, 35

AZ, 36

A3,37

A4,38

B

BACKSPACE, 17

Band lock (KSQ, KSt), 106

Baseline clipper (see also Threshold), 66

B-DL-+B,40,41

BL, 39

BLANK, 36,40

Blank annotation (KSo) ,96

Blank display(CRT) (KSg) ,96

Blank graticule (KSm) ,96

Blank output, 6

Blue front panel characters, 89

BML, 41

BRD, 42

BTC, 43

INDEX

BWR, 44

BXC, 45

Bl, 46

B2,47

B3,48

B4,49

C

C (TRACE) (see also Trace C modes), 99, 103

CA, 50

CAL OUTPUT 3

Calibration procedures, 3,4, 104

CENTER FREQUENCY 12,20

Center frequency/span tuning characteristics, App. G

Center frequency step size (CF STEP SIZE), 76

CF; 51

CLEAR-WRITE, 36

CLRAVG, 52

CLRW, 53

CNVLOSS, 54

Command list enter, 109 execute, 110

Command statement elements, 19 - 2 1

COMPRESS, 55 - 56

CONCAT 57

Continuous sweep (CONT) ,79,80

Controller, 112,4

CONTS, 58

CORR’D, 4,104

Correction data (KSX, KSY) ,104

Correction data displayed (KSw) ,96,104

Coupled functions (see also specific functions), 69-70

CR, 59

CRT, 29

CRT display, 4,29

CRT adjustments, 29

CRT beam off/on (KSg, KSh), 96

CRT photography,31

CRT refresh rate, 36

CS,

60

CT, 61

CTA, 62

CTM, 63

Custom softkey functions, 9

Cy

64

Cl, 65

C2,66

NOTE:

Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section I, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

Index 1

D

DA, 67

Data

CONTROLS, 15,16 entries, 16,17 entry, via HP-IB, 8 entry, via front panel, under remote control, 9 entry, terminating, 8 - 9 keys, 11,16 knob, 11, 12, 15, 16 number/units keyboard, 11, 15, 17 step keys, 11, 12, 15, 16 dBm (KSA), 93 dBmV (KSB) ,93 dBpV (KSC) ,93

DC precaution, 3

D D , 6 8 - 6 9

Deactivate function (HOLD), 16

DET 70

Detection modes (KSa, KSb, KSc, KSd) ,97

Diagnostic aids, 107

Differential (DELTA) marker, 13,46

Display correction data (KSw) ,96

Display, CRT, 4

DISPLAY LINE, 41,64 - 65

Display memory structure, App. A

Display outputs, 6

Display unit, 32

Display terms, 32

Display titling (KSE) , 97

DISPOSE, 71- 72

DIV 7 3 - 7 4

DL, 75 - 76

DLE, 77

DONE, 78

DR, 79

DSPLY 80

DT 81

DW, 82

Dl, D2, D3,83 - 88

E

E E , 8 9 - 9 1

Effective mixer level (KS;), 93

EK, 92

Element, 32

ELSE, IF THEN, ENDIE 93 - 94

EM, 95

Enabled LED, 16

ENDIE IF THEN ELSE, 96 - 97

Entering a command lit, 109

Equivalent HP 8566B and HP 8566A commands,

APP.

J

Error correction routine (KSW), 4, 104 - 105

EX, 99

Excessive input power, 3

Exchange trace B and C (KSi) , 100

Executing a softkey, 110

Executing plotter output, 111

EXP 100

Extend reference level (KSI) , 94

External frequency reference, 8

External mixer, 106

External trigger (EXT) ,80, 103

External trigger input, 9

EXTMXR,

101 - 102

El,

103

E2,104

E3,105

E4,106

F

FA, 107

Factory preselector setting (KS = ) ,94

Fast HP-IB (KSS), 106

Fast preset (KST) , 106

Fast remote operation, App. E

FB,

108

FFT,

109- 113

Fit LO output, App. H

Focus, 29

FOFFSET

114

Format statements, 01,02,03,04,

115 - 118

FPKA, 119

FREE RUN (trigger), 79,80

Freq reference input/output, 8

Frequency calibration, 3,4

Frequency drift compensation (SIGNAL TRACK), 56

Frequency offset (KSV) ,91

Frequency response measurement (example), 40 - 41

FREQUENCY SPAN, 12,21- 24

FREQ ZERO, 3

Front panel data entry under remote control, 9

Front panel overview, 5,ll

FS,

120

FULBAND,

12 1

FULL SPAN, 11

0 - 2.5

2 - 22

GHz, 12,85

GHz, 12,83 - 85

FUNCDEE

122

NOTE:

2 Index

Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section I, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

Functional index,

GR, 123

GRAT,124

Graticule ,3 1

11 - 18

FUNCTION keys, 11, 19

Function summary, 90

Function/data summary, 27

General Information, 1 off/on (KSm, KSn) ,96

Harmonic distortion (example), 47

Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB) ,8, 14

Fast HP-IB (KSS) , 106 via, data entry, 8

HD, 125

HNLOCK, 126 - 127

HNUNLK,

128

HOLD, 16

H

IB,

129

ID,

130

IDSTAT,

131

IF input connector, 8, 9

IF output connector, 8,9

IF output, 21.4 MHz, 7

IF THEN ELSE ENDIE

132 - 133

Ineterrupt, App. D

Input attenuation, 74 - 76

Input CRT labels and graphics, 4

Input mixer level (KS;), 93

INPUT, RF,3,7

Internal frequency reference, 8

INSTR CHECK, 2

INSTRUMENT PRESET, 12,83

INSTRUMENT STATE, 83

FULL SPAN, 0 - 2.5 GHz, 85

INSTRUMENT PRESET, 83

LOCAL OPERATION (LCL), 87

SAVE and RECALL, 85 - 86

1p134-135

Intensity, CRT 29

KSk, 177

KSL (noise level off), 58 - 60,

151

KSI(B+C),40,99,

178

KSM (noise level on), 58 - 60,

152

KSm (graticule blanked), 96,

179

KSN (marker to minimum), 95,

153

KSn (graticule on), 96,

180

KS0 (enter A + span), 53,

154

KSo (annotation blanked), 96,

181

KSP (set HP-IB address),

155

KSp (annotation on), 96, 182

KSQ (band unlock), 106,156

KSq (disable step gain), 107,

183

KSR (frequency diagnostic on), 106, 107,

157

KSr (HP-IB service request),

184

KSS (fast HP-IB operation), 106,

158, App. E

KST (fast preset 2 - 22 GHz) , 106,

159

KSt (band lock), 106,185

K

KEYDEE

136 - 137

Key definition, 109

KEYEXC,

138

Knob, 11 - 13, 15 - 16

KSA (amplitude in dBm) ,93,139

KSa (normal detection), 97,

166

KSB (amplitude in dBmv) ,93,

140

KSb (positive peak detection), 97,

167

KSC (amplitude in dBuv), 93,

141

KSc (A + B+A), 97, 168

KSD (amplitude in voltage), 93,

142

KSd (negative peak detection), 97,

169

KSE (title mode), 97,

143 - 144

KSe (sample detection), 97,

170

KSF (remove IF offset for YTO preset), 145, App. H

KSf (power on in last state), 85,

171

KSG (video averaging on), 101,

146

KSg (CRT beam off), 96,172

KSH (video averaging off), 101,147

KSh (CRT beam on), 101,178

KS1 (extended reference level range) ,75,94,

148

KSi (exchange traces B and

C) ,40,100, 174

KSJ (manual DACs control), 107,

149

KSj (view trace C), 40,99,

175 - 176

KSK, 53,95,150

KSU (fast preset external mixer), 106, 160

KSu (stop single sweep at marker), 95,

KSV (frequency offset), 91,161

186

KSv (signal identifier external mixer), 106,

187

KSW (execute error correction routine), 104, 162

KSw (display correction data), 96,107,

188 - 189

KSX (use correction data), 104,

163

N O T E :

Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section 1, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

I n d e x 3

KSx (remove external trigger automatic refresh), 80,

1 0 3 , 1 9 0

KSY (do not use correction data), 104, 164

KSy (remove video trigger automatic refresh), 80, 103,

191

KSZ (amplitude offset), 91, 165

KSz (display address), 192

KS- (negative data entry), 91

KS = (factory preselector setting), 58,94, 194

KS/ (manual preselector setting), 58,94, 199

KS( (lock SAVE registers), 103,

195

KS) (unlock SAVE registers), 103, 196

KSI

,197

KS, (mixer level), 93,

193

KS# (turn off YTX self-heating correction), 107,

198

KS39,ZOO -

201

KS43,202

KS91,203

KS94,205

KS123,206 - 207

KS125,208 - 209

KS126,ZlO

KS127,Zll

L

LB,

212-215

Learn string content, App. C

LF;216

LG,

217

Linear scale (LIN) ,63

LINE TRIGGER, 79

LL,

218

LN,

219

Local operation (LCL), 87,6 - 7

Lock SAVE registers (KS()) 103

LOG, 61,220 - 221

LPI, 222

M

MA, 223

Manual calibration procedure, 3

MARKER, 13,43,44 active, 43 differential (DELTA), 46 - 48 entry, 53 - 56 in view, 44 to center frequency (MKR + CF), 53 to step size (MKR --, STEP SIZE), 53 to minimum (KSN) ,95 to next peak (KSK), 95 noise level measurement, 58 - 60

NORMAL, 44 - 45

OK44 on, 44

PEAK SEARCH, 52 - 53

PRESEL PEAK, 57 - 58 readout, 13 to reference level (MKR * REF LVL) , 53

SIGNAL TRACK, 56 - 57 stop sweep (KSu), 95

ZOOM, 48 - 51 zoom ,automatic, 5 1 - 52

Marker sweeps, 95

MAX HOLD, 36

MBRD, 224

MBWR, 225

MDS, 226

MDU, 227

MEAN, 228

MEM, 229

ME 230

MIN, 231

Mixer level, 93

MKA,232

MKAQ233

MKCF;234

MKCONT,235

MKD, 236 - 237

W238

MKMIN, 239

MKN, 240

MKNOISE, 241

MKOE242

MKe243

MKI?AUSE, 244

MKPK, 245

MKPX,246

MKREAD, 247

MKRL, 248

MKSC 249

MKSS,250

MKSTOP,

251

MKTRACE, 252

MKTRACK, 253

MKTYPE, 254

ML, 255

MOV 256

MPY, 257 - 258

MRD, 259

MRDB, 260

MT!&

261

NOTE:

4

I n d e x

Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section I, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

MTl, 262

MWR, 263

MWRB, 264

MXM, 265 - 266

MXMH, 267

Ml, 268

M2,269

M3,270 - 271

M4,272 outputs blank, 6 display (x, y, and z), 6

HP-IB, 8

PENLIFT, 7 plotter, 4 rear panel, 6

RECORDER, 6

SWEEP 7

VIDEO, 7,9

10 MHz, 7

21.4 MHz IF Output, 7

N

Negative data entry (KS-), 17, 91

Negative peak detection (KSd) ,97

Noise level measurements (KSM, KSL) ,58

NORMAL shift key function, 89

MARKER, 13,44

NSTART, 273

NSTOP 274

0

Offsets amplitude (KSZ), 91 frequency (KSV) ,91 function, 91- 93

OL, 275

ONEOS, 276

ONSWP 277

Op, 278

Operating differences, App. I

Operating precautions, 2,3

OT, 279 - 280

SWEEP + TUNE OUT, 7

Output amplitude and value, 3

01,02,03,04, Format statements, 281- 284

P

PA, 285

PD, 286

PDA, 287

PDE 288

Peak detection modes (KSa, KSb) ,97 - 99

PEAKS, 289 - 290

PEAK SEARCH, 52

Performance, 1

PLOT 291

Plotter addresses, 112

Plotter output, 4, 111 - 112

Plotter pens, 112

Positive peak detection (KSb) ,97

Power ON, 2

PP 292

PR, 293

Preselector factory setting (KS = ) ,94

PEAK, 57,94 tracking (KS/), 94

Programming commands, general information, 19

Programming, general information, 1

PS, 294

PU, 295

PWRBW, 296

Quasi-Peak Adapter, 8

Q

R

RB, 297

RC, 298

RCLS, 299

Readouts, 33 - 34

Rear panel connections, 1 outputs, 6,7

RECALL INSTRUMENT STATE, 14

Recorder outputs, 6

REFERENCE LEVEL, 13,25 - 26

Reference level, extended range (KSI) ,25 - 26,94

Reference lines, 64 display line, 64 threshold line, 66

Refresh display, 36

Remote operation, 14,87,6 - 7

N O T E : Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section I, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

I n d e x 5

Remote operation overview, 2 - 9

Resolution bandwidth (RES BW) , 70 - 71

REPEAT UNTIL, 300 - 30 1

Resolution of markers, 44

REV 302

RF attenuation, 74

RF INPUT, 3 7

RL, 303

RMS, 304

ROFFSET 305

RQS, 306

Rl, 307

R2,308

R3,309

R4,310

S

Sample detection mode (KSe) , 97

SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE, 14 locking registers (KS 0, 103 unlocking registers (KS)), 103

SAVES,

311

Scale, 61 linear (LIN), 63 logarithmic (LOG), 63

Secondary keywords, 22 - 23

Service requests, App. D

SHIFT key, 14 alphabetical key code summary, 90 function index, 107 functions, 89

(see also specific shift key function or KS code)

Shift function codes, 7

SIGDEL, 312

SIGID, 313

SIGNAL TRACK, 51,56

SMOOTH, 314

SNGLS,

313

Softkey functions, custom, 9

Se316

SPAN, 21- 24

SQR, 317

SRQ, 318 ss, 319

ST, 320

STANDBY 2

START FREQUENCY; 24

STDEV

321

Step keys down, 11 - 13,15 - 16 up, ll- 13,15- 16

Step size, center frequency, 76

Step size, marker, 53

STOP FREQUENCY 24

Stop sweep at marker (KSu) , 95

STORE modes, 36

SUB, 322 - 323

SUM, 324

SUMSQR,325

SV 326

SW, 327

Sweep, 36,79 - 80 continuous (CONT) ,80

SINGLE, 80

Sweep and trigger, 79

Sweep time, 73

SWEEP + TUNE OUT, 7

Swept measurement (example), 40 - 41

Sl, 328 s2,329

T

TA, 330 - 331

TB, 332 - 333

TDF, 334

Terminating data entry, 8 - 9

TEXT, 335

TH, 336

THE, 337

THEN, IE ELSE ENDIF, 338 - 339

Threshold, 64,66 - 67

Title mode (KSE), 97

TM, 340

Trace, 35

Az$B, 39

A-B+A,40,41

A-B+AOFE40

A + B-A,97 arithmetic, 40 - 42

BLANK, 35,36,37

B-DL-‘B,41

C, modes (KSi, KSj, KSk, KSI), 40, 99 - 101,

CLEAR-WRITE, 36,37 detection modes (KSa, KSb, KSc, KSd) , 97 exchange trace A and B, 39 exchange trace B and C (KSi) , 100 functions, 35 identification, 35

MAXHOLD, 36,37 memory, 37 memory structure, 36 modes, 36

1LO3

NOTE: Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section I, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

6 I n d e x

priority, 42 store mode, 37 - 39 transfer trace B to C (KSI) ,99

VIEW, 35,36,37 write modes, 36,37

Traces, 31- 32

TRDEE 341

TRDSP 342

TRGRPH, 343

Trigger, 79,80 - 81 automatic, zero span, 80

EXT (external), 80, 103

FREE RUN, 79

LINE, 79

VIDEO, 79,103

VIDEO LEVEL, 81

TRMATH, 344 - 345

TRPST, 346

TRSTAT, 347

TS, 348

Tuning curves, App. F

TWNDOW, 349

TPI, 350

Tl, 351

T2,352

T3,353

T4,354

u

Uncoupled functions, 13

Units, 93

(KSA, KSB, KSC, KSD)

Unlock SAVE registers (KS)), 103

UNTIL, REPEAT 355 - 356

UR, 357

User-defined keys, 109

USTATE, 358

V

VARDEE 359

VARIANCE, 360

VAVG, 361

VB, 362

VBO, 363

Vector, 32

Video averaging (KSG, KSH), 72,101- 103 bandwidth (VIDEO BW), 71- 72 connectors, 8,9

INP connector, 9

OUT connector, 9 trigger, 79, 103 trigger level, 81

VIEW, 36,37,364

Voltage scale (LINEAR), 63

VoIts (KSD), 93

W

WRITE modes, 36

X

XCH, 365

Z

Zero frequency span, 23,80

Zero span, automatic trigger, 80

Zoom, automatic, zero span, 51,52

Zoom to marker, 48

NOTE:

Page numbers in regular typeface refer to Section I, Manual Operation. Page numbers in bold typeface refer to

Section II, Programming.

I n d e x 7

I

HEWLETT-PACKARD SALES AND SERVICE OFFICES

To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard

Sales and Service Office listed in the HP Catalog, or contact the nearest regional office listed below:

IN THE UNITED STATES

CALIFORNIA

PO. Box 4230

1421 South Manhattan Avenue

Fullerton 9263 1

GEORGIA

PO. Box 105005

2000 South Park Place

Atlanta 30339

ILLINOIS

5201 Tollview Drive

Rolling Meadows 60008

NEW JERSEY

W. 120 Century Road

Paramus 07652

IN GERMAN FEDERAL REPUBLIC

Hewlett-Packard GmbH

Vertriebszentrale Frankfurt

Berner Strasse 117

Postfach 560 140

D-6000 Frankfurt 56

IN GREAT BRITAIN

Hewlett-Packard Ltd.

King Street Lane

Winnersh, Wokingham

Berkshire RG 11 5AR

IN CANADA

Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.

17500 South Service Road

Trans-Canada Highway

Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2M5

IN OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

SWITZERLAND

Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG

29 Chemin Chateau Bloc

CH- 12 19 LeLignon-Geneva

IN FRANCE

Hewlett-Packard France

F-91 947 Les Ulis Cedex

Orsay

IN ALL OTHER LOCATIONS

Hewlett-Packard Inter-Americas

3200 Hillview Avenue

Palo Alto, California 94304

I

HP Part Number 08566-90040

HEWLETT

PACKARD

Printed in USA